Mercedes‑AMG GT SOperator's Manual

Order no. 6515 1977 13 Part no. 190 584 78 01 Edition C-2016

É1905847801mËÍ1905847801

Merce

des-A

MGGT

S

Publication detailsInternet

Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi-cles and about Daimler AG can be found on thefollowing websites:http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)

Editorial office

©Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated orotherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, with-out written permission from Daimler AG.

Vehicle manufacturer

Daimler AGMercedesstraße 13770327 StuttgartGermany

SymbolsRegistered trademarks:RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue-tooth SIG Inc.RDTS™ is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.RDolby® and MLP™ are registered trademarksof DOLBY Laboratories.RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are reg-istered trademarks of Daimler AG.RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of John-son Controls.RiPod® and iTunes® are registered trademarksof Apple Inc.RBurmester® is a registered trademark ofBurmester Audiosysteme GmbH.RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are regis-tered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.RSIRIUS® is a registered trademark of SiriusXM Radio Inc.RHD Radio™ is a registered trademark of iBiq-uity Digital Corporation.RGracenote® is a registered trademark ofGracenote, Inc.RZAGAT Survey® and related brands are regis-tered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC.

In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol-lowing symbols:

G WARNINGWarning notes make you aware of dangerswhich could pose a threat to your health orlife, or to the health and life of others.

H Environmental noteEnvironmental notes provide you with infor-mation on environmentally aware actions ordisposal.

! Notes on material damage alert you to dan-gers that could lead to damage to your vehi-cle.

i Practical tips or further information thatcould be helpful to you.

X This symbol indicates an instructionthat must be followed.

X Several of these symbols in successionindicate an instruction with severalsteps.

(Ypage)

This symbol tells you where you can findmore information about a topic.

YY This symbol indicates a warning or aninstruction that is continued on the nextpage.

Dis‐play This text indicates a message on themultifunction display/multimedia dis-play.

~ This symbol tells you that you can findfurther information in the Digital Oper-ator's Manual.

As at 13.04.2015

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-BenzWe urge you to read this Operator's Manualcarefully and familiarize yourself with the vehi-cle before driving. For your own safety and alonger vehicle life, follow the instructions andwarning notices in this manual. Ignoring themcould result in damage to the vehicle or personalinjury to you or others.Vehicle damage caused by failure to followinstructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.The equipment or product designation of yourvehicle may vary depending on:RModelROrderRCountry specificationRAvailabilityMercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right tointroduce changes in the following areas:RDesignREquipmentRTechnical featuresThe equipment in your vehicle may thereforediffer from that shown in the descriptions andillustrations.The following are integral components of thevehicle:RDigital Operator's ManualRPrinted Operator's ManualRMaintenance BookletREquipment-dependent supplementsKeep these documents in the vehicle at alltimes. If you sell the vehicle, always pass alldocuments on to the new owner.Your Operator's Manual:

Digital form inside the vehicleThe Digital Operator's Manual providescomprehensive and specifically adaptedinformation on your vehicle's equipmentand multimedia system. It contains infor-mative animations, individual languagesettings and an intuitive search function.Booklet inside the vehicleIn addition to this manual and the afore-mentioned digital media, you also have theoption to obtain a comprehensive printedversion of the Supplement for your multi-media system from your authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Digital form via the InternetTheOperator'sManual on the Internet pro-vides easy access to all informationregarding your vehicle andmultimedia sys-tem. It also provides helpful animations,interesting background information and awide array of search options.Digital form as an AppUsing the Mercedes-Benz Guides App, youcan view all the information on your vehicleandmultimedia system via mobile Internetor download it independently of networkaccess. Available for smartphones or tab-lets.

Please note that theMercedes-Benz Guides Appmay not yet be available in your country.Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.A Daimler Company

1905847801 É1905847801mËÍ

Index ....................................................... 3

Digital Operator's Manual .................. 20

Introduction ......................................... 21

At a glance ........................................... 29

Safety ................................................... 35

Opening and closing ........................... 60

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 75

Lights and windshield wipers ............ 86

Climate control .................................... 93

Driving and parking .......................... 101

On-board computer and displays .... 151

Multimedia system ........................... 200

Stowage and features ...................... 209

Maintenance and care ...................... 227

Breakdown assistance ..................... 241

Wheels and tires ............................... 254

Technical data ................................... 279

2 Contents

1, 2, 3 ...12 V socket

see Sockets

AABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Display message ............................ 167Function/notes ................................ 52Warning lamp ................................. 192

AccidentAutomaticmeasures after an acci-dent ................................................. 49

Activating media modeGeneral notes ................................ 208

Activating/deactivating coolingwith air dehumidification ................... 95ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 58Adaptive Brake Assist

Display message ............................ 167Function/notes ................................ 54

Adaptive Damping SystemFunction/notes ............................. 138

Adaptive Highbeam AssistDisplay message ............................ 177Function/notes ................................ 88Switching on/off .............................. 89

Additional speedometer ................... 162Additives (engine oil) ........................ 284Address book

see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 200

Adjusting lumbar support .................. 77Adjusting the volume

Multimedia system ........................ 201Air bags

Deployment ..................................... 46Display message ............................ 175Front air bag (driver, frontpassenger) ....................................... 41Important safety notes .................... 40Introduction ..................................... 40Knee bag .......................................... 41Occupant Classification System(OCS) ............................................... 42PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indica-tor lamp ........................................... 36

Side impact air bag .......................... 42Window curtain air bag .................... 42

Air ventsImportant safety notes .................... 99Setting ............................................. 99Setting the side air vents ............... 100

Air-conditioning systemsee Climate control

AlarmATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 58Switching off (ATA) .......................... 58Switching the function on/off(ATA) ................................................ 58

Alarm systemsee ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

AMGAdaptive sport suspension sys-tem ................................................ 138E-SELECT lever .............................. 109Menu (on-board computer) ............ 162Performance Seat ............................ 78SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-gear sporttransmission .................................. 109

AMG ceramic brakes ......................... 125AMG high-performance andceramic brakes .................................. 125AMG sports exhaust system ............ 106Anti-lock braking system

see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)Anti-Theft Alarm system

see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)Ashtray ............................................... 213Assistance display (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 159Assistance menu (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 160ASSYST PLUS

Displaying a service message ........ 233Hiding a service message .............. 233Resetting the service interval dis-play ................................................ 233Service message ............................ 232Special service requirements ......... 233

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)Activating/deactivating ................... 58Function ........................................... 58Switching off the alarm .................... 58

Index 3

ATTENTION ASSISTActivating/deactivating ................. 160Display message ............................ 180Function/notes ............................. 146

Authorized Mercedes-Benz Centersee Qualified specialist workshop

Authorized workshopsee Qualified specialist workshop

AUTO lightsDisplay message ............................ 177see Lights

Automatic car wash (care) ............... 234Automatic engine start (ECO start/stop function) .................................... 106Automatic engine switch-off (ECOstart/stop function) .......................... 105Automatic headlamp mode ................ 86Automatic transmission

Accelerator pedal position ............. 111Automatic drive program ............... 113Changing gear ............................... 111Display message ............................ 185Double-clutch function .................. 112Drive program display .................... 110Driving tips .................................... 111Emergency running mode .............. 117Gliding mode ................................. 112Kickdown ....................................... 112Manual drive program .................... 114Manual mode ................................. 115Oil temperature (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 162Overview ........................................ 109Problem (malfunction) ................... 117Pulling away ................................... 104Rocking the vehicle free ................ 112Starting the engine ........................ 104Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 113Transmission position display ........ 110Transmission positions .................. 111

Automatic transmission emer-gency mode ....................................... 117

BBack button ....................................... 201BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 52

Battery (SmartKey)Checking .......................................... 63Important safety notes .................... 62Replacing ......................................... 63

Battery (vehicle)Charging ........................................ 247Display message ............................ 179Important safety notes .................. 245Jump starting ................................. 248

Beltsee Seat belts

Blind Spot AssistActivating/deactivating (on-board computer) ............................ 160Display message ............................ 181Notes/function .............................. 147

Bluetooth®Connecting another mobilephone ............................................ 208Searching for a mobile phone ........ 207see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 200Telephony ...................................... 206

Brake Assistsee BAS (Brake Assist System)

Brake fluidDisplay message ............................ 172Notes ............................................. 284

Brake force distributionsee EBD (electronic brake forcedistribution)

BrakesABS .................................................. 52Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 54AMG high-performance andceramic brakes .............................. 125BAS .................................................. 52Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 284Display message ............................ 167EBD .................................................. 57Hill start assist ............................... 104Important safety notes .................. 124Maintenance .................................. 125Parking brake ................................ 121Riding tips ...................................... 124Warning lamp ................................. 191

BreakdownWhere will I find...? ........................ 241

4 Index

see Flat tiresee Towing away

Buttons on the steering wheel ......... 152

CCalifornia

Important notice for retail cus-tomers and lessees .......................... 22

Calling up a malfunctionsee Display messages

Calling up the climate control barMultimedia system ........................ 204

Calling up the climate controlmenu

Multimedia system ........................ 204Car

see VehicleCare

Car wash ........................................ 234Carpets .......................................... 240Display ........................................... 238Exhaust pipe .................................. 238Exterior lights ................................ 237Gear or selector lever .................... 239Interior ........................................... 238Matte finish ................................... 236Notes ............................................. 234Paint .............................................. 235Plastic trim .................................... 238Power washer ................................ 235Rear view camera .......................... 238Roof lining ...................................... 240Seat belt ........................................ 239Seat cover ..................................... 239Sensors ......................................... 237Steering wheel ............................... 239Trim pieces .................................... 239Washing by hand ........................... 235Wheels ........................................... 236Windows ........................................ 236Wiper blades .................................. 237Wooden trim .................................. 239

Cargo compartmentUnlocking with KEYLESS-GO ............ 69

Cargo compartment coverImportant safety notes .................. 211

Cargo net ........................................... 211

CDsee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 200

CD player (on-board computer) ........ 157Center console

Overview .......................................... 32Central locking

Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 60Changing the media source ............. 157Charge retention

Socket ........................................... 122Charge-air pressure (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 162Child seat

Forward-facing restraint system ...... 51On the front-passenger seat ............ 51Rearward-facing restraint system .... 51

ChildrenRestraint systems ............................ 50Special seat belt retractor ............... 49

Cigarette lighter ................................ 214Cleaning

Mirror turn signal ........................... 237Climate control

Automatic climate control (dual-zone) ................................................ 94Controlling automatically ................. 96Cooling with air dehumidification ..... 95Cooling with air dehumidification(multimedia system) ...................... 205Defrosting the windows ................... 97Defrosting the windshield ................ 97ECO start/stop function (3-zoneautomatic climate control) ............... 94General notes .................................. 93Indicator lamp .................................. 96Information about using auto-matic climate control ....................... 94Overview ........................................ 204Overview of systems ........................ 93Problem with the rear windowdefroster .......................................... 99Problems with cooling with airdehumidification .............................. 96Refrigerant ..................................... 285Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 286Setting the air distribution ............... 96Setting the air vents ........................ 99

Index 5

Setting the airflow ........................... 97Setting the climate mode (multi-media system) ............................... 205Setting the temperature .................. 96Switching air-recirculation modeon/off .............................................. 99Switching on/off .............................. 95Switching the rear windowdefroster on/off ............................... 97Switching the synchronizationfunction on and off .......................... 97Synchronization function (multi-media system) ............................... 205

Climate control settingsMultimedia system ........................ 204

Climate control systemClimate control (3-zone automaticclimate control) ................................ 94

CockpitOverview .......................................... 29

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS

Activating/deactivating ................. 160Display message ............................ 172Operation/notes .............................. 53

COMAND displayCleaning ......................................... 238

Combination switch ............................ 87Connecting a USB device

see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 200

Consumption statistics (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 154Controller ........................................... 201Convenience closing feature .............. 72Convenience opening feature ............ 72Coolant (engine)

Checking the level ......................... 231Display message ............................ 178Filling capacity ............................... 285Important safety notes .................. 284Temperature display in the instru-ment cluster .................................. 151Warning lamp ................................. 195

Coolingsee Climate control

Copyright ............................................. 28

Cornering light functionDisplay message ............................ 177

Cruise controlCruise control lever ....................... 127Deactivating ................................... 128Display message ............................ 182Driving system ............................... 127Function/notes ............................. 127Setting a speed .............................. 128Storing and maintaining currentspeed ............................................. 127

Cup holderCenter console .............................. 212Important safety notes .................. 212

Customer Assistance Center(CAC) ..................................................... 25Customer Relations Department ....... 25

DData

see Technical dataData carrier

Selecting ........................................ 157Daytime running lamps

Display message ............................ 177Function/notes ................................ 86Switching on/off (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 161

Declarations of conformity ................. 24Diagnostics connection ...................... 25Digital Operator's Manual

Help ................................................. 20Introduction ..................................... 20

Digital speedometer ......................... 154Display

see Display messagessee Warning and indicator lamps

Display messagesASSYST PLUS ................................ 232Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 166Driving systems ............................. 180Engine ............................................ 178General notes ................................ 166Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 166Introduction ................................... 166Lights ............................................. 177Safety systems .............................. 167

6 Index

SmartKey ....................................... 188Tires ............................................... 183Vehicle ........................................... 185

Distance recorder ............................. 153Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 197Distance warning function

Function/notes ................................ 53DISTRONIC PLUS

Activating ....................................... 130Activation conditions ..................... 130Cruise control lever ....................... 130Deactivating ................................... 133Display message ............................ 182Displays in the instrument cluster .. 134Driving tips .................................... 135Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS ....... 131Function/notes ............................. 128Important safety notes .................. 129Setting a speed .............................. 133Setting the specified minimumdistance ......................................... 133Stopping ........................................ 132

Door control panelOverview .......................................... 34

DoorsAutomatic locking (switch) ............... 67Central locking/unlocking(SmartKey) ....................................... 60Display message ............................ 187Emergency locking ........................... 68Emergency unlocking ....................... 68Important safety notes .................... 66Opening (from inside) ...................... 67

Drinking and driving ......................... 123Drive program

Automatic ...................................... 113Display ........................................... 110Manual ........................................... 114SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 163

Driver's doorsee Doors

Driving abroadMercedes-Benz Service ................. 234

Driving on flooded roads .................. 126Driving safety systems

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 52ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 58Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 54

BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 52COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS ................................................ 53Distance warning function ............... 53EBD (electronic brake force distri-bution) ............................................. 57ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram) ............................................... 55Important safety information ........... 52Overview .......................................... 52

Driving systemsAMG adaptive sport suspensionsystem ........................................... 138ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 146Blind Spot Assist ............................ 147Cruise control ................................ 127Display message ............................ 180DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 128HOLD function ............................... 136Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 149Lane Tracking package .................. 147PARKTRONIC ................................. 139RACE START .................................. 137Rear view camera .......................... 142

Driving tipsAMG high-performance andceramic brakes .............................. 125Automatic transmission ................. 111Brakes ........................................... 124Break-in period .............................. 101DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 135Downhill gradient ........................... 124Drinking and driving ....................... 123Driving in winter ............................. 126Driving on flooded roads ................ 126Driving on wet roads ...................... 126Exhaust check ............................... 123Fuel ................................................ 123General .......................................... 123Hydroplaning ................................. 126Icy road surfaces ........................... 126Limited braking efficiency on sal-ted roads ....................................... 124Snow chains .................................. 256Subjecting brakes to a load ........... 124The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ..... 101Wet road surface ........................... 124

Index 7

DVD videoOperating (on-board computer) ..... 158see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 200

DYNAMIC SELECT controller ............ 108

EE-SELECT lever ................................... 109EASY-ENTRY feature

Function/notes ................................ 80EASY-EXIT feature

Function/notes ................................ 80EBD (electronic brake force distri-bution)

Display message ............................ 169Function/notes ................................ 57

ECO start/stop functionAutomatic engine switch-off .......... 105Deactivating/activating ................. 106General information ....................... 105Important safety notes .................. 105Introduction ................................... 105

Electronic Stability Programsee ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

EmergencyAutomaticmeasures after an acci-dent ................................................. 49

Emergency releaseDriver's door .................................... 68Vehicle ............................................. 68

Emergency Tensioning DevicesActivation ......................................... 46

Emergency unlockingTailgate ............................................ 71

Emissions controlService and warranty information .... 22

EngineCheck Engine warning lamp ........... 195Display message ............................ 178ECO start/stop function ................ 105Engine number ............................... 281Irregular running ............................ 107Jump-starting ................................. 248Starting problems .......................... 107Starting the engine with theSmartKey ....................................... 104

Starting with the Start/Stop but-ton ................................................. 104Switching off .................................. 120Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 252

Engine electronicsNotes ............................................. 279Problem (malfunction) ................... 107

Engine oilAdding ........................................... 230Additives ........................................ 284Checking the oil level ..................... 228Checking the oil level using thedipstick .......................................... 228Checking the oil level using theon-board computer ........................ 230Display message ............................ 179Filling capacity ............................... 284Notes about oil grades ................... 283Notes on oil level/consumption .... 228Temperature (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 162

Entering an addresssee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 200

ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram)

AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 163Characteristics ................................. 56Deactivating/activating ................... 56Display message ............................ 167Function/notes ................................ 55General notes .................................. 55Important safety information ........... 56Warning lamp ................................. 192

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys-tem) ...................................................... 55Exhaust check ................................... 123Exhaust pipe (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 238Exterior lighting

Cleaning ......................................... 237see Lights

Exterior mirrorsAdjusting ......................................... 82Dipping (automatic) ......................... 83Folding in/out (automatically) ......... 82Folding in/out (electrically) ............. 82

8 Index

Out of position (troubleshooting) ..... 82Setting ............................................. 82Storing settings (memory func-tion) ................................................. 84Storing the parking position ............. 83

FFavorites

Overview ........................................ 203Features ............................................. 212Filler cap

see RefuelingFlat tire

Changing a wheel/mounting thespare wheel ................................... 272Preparing the vehicle ..................... 242TIREFIT kit ...................................... 242

Floormats ........................................... 226Frequencies

Mobile phone ................................. 279Two-way radio ................................ 279

FuelAdditives ........................................ 283Consumption statistics .................. 154Displaying the current consump-tion ................................................ 153Displaying the range ...................... 153Driving tips .................................... 123E10 ................................................ 282Fuel gauge ....................................... 30Grade (gasoline) ............................ 282Important safety notes .................. 282Problem (malfunction) ................... 119Refueling ........................................ 117Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 282

Fuel filler flapClosing ........................................... 118General information ....................... 118Opening ......................................... 118Problem (malfunction) ................... 119

Fuel levelCalling up the range (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 153

Fuel tankCapacity ........................................ 282Problem (malfunction) ................... 119

FusesAllocation chart ............................. 253Before changing ............................. 253Fuse box in the cargo compart-ment .............................................. 253Fuse box in the front-passengerfootwell .......................................... 253Important safety notes .................. 252

GG-Meter (on-board computer) .......... 163Garage door opener

Clearing the memory ..................... 226General notes ................................ 223Important safety notes .................. 223Opening/closing the garage door .. 225Problems when programming ........ 225Programming (button in the rear-view mirror) ................................... 224Synchronizing the rolling code ....... 224

Gasoline ............................................. 282Gear indicator (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 162Genuine parts ...................................... 21Glove box ........................................... 210Google™ Local Search

see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 200

HHandbrake

see Parking brakeHandwriting recognition

Switching text reader functionon/off ............................................ 203Touchpad ....................................... 202

Hazard warning lamps ........................ 88Head restraints

Adjusting ......................................... 77Headlamps

Cleaning system (notes) ................ 285Fogging up ....................................... 89see Automatic headlamp mode

Heatingsee Climate control

High beam flasher ............................... 87

Index 9

High-beam headlampsDisplay message ............................ 177Switching on/off .............................. 87

Hill start assist .................................. 104HOLD function

Activating ....................................... 136Deactivating ................................... 137Display message ............................ 181Function/notes ............................. 136

Home addresssee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 200

HoodClosing ........................................... 228Display message ............................ 187Important safety notes .................. 227Opening ......................................... 227

Horn ...................................................... 29Hydroplaning ..................................... 126

IIgnition lock

see Key positionsImmobilizer .......................................... 58Indicator and warning lamps

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS .............................................. 197

Indicator lampssee Warning and indicator lamps

Indicatorssee Turn signals

Instrument clusterOverview .......................................... 30Warning and indicator lamps ........... 30

Instrument cluster lighting .............. 161Interior lighting

Automatic control ............................ 90General notes .................................. 89Overview .......................................... 89Reading lamp ................................... 89Setting the brightness of the dis-play/switch (on-board computer) .. 161

iPod®see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 200

JJack

Using ............................................. 274Jump starting (engine) ...................... 248

KKey positions

SmartKey ....................................... 103Start/Stop button .......................... 102

KEYLESS-GOConvenience closing feature ............ 73Deactivation ..................................... 61Locking ............................................ 61Start function ................................... 61Unlocking ......................................... 61

KEYLESS-GO start functionStart/Stop button .......................... 102

KickdownDriving tips .................................... 112

Knee bag .............................................. 41

LLamps

see Warning and indicator lampsLane Keeping Assist

Activating/deactivating (on-board computer) ............................ 161Display message ............................ 181Function/information .................... 149

Lane Tracking package ..................... 147Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 164License plate lamp (display mes-sage) ................................................... 177Light sensor (display message) ....... 177Lights

Automatic headlamp mode .............. 86Fogged up headlamps ...................... 89Hazard warning lamps ..................... 88High beam flasher ............................ 87High-beam headlamps ..................... 87Light switch ..................................... 86Low-beam headlamps ...................... 87Parking lamps .................................. 87Rear fog lamp .................................. 87Setting exterior lighting ................... 86

10 Index

Setting the brightness of the dis-play/switch (on-board computer) .. 161Standing lamps ................................ 87Switching the daytime runninglamps on/off (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 161Turn signals ..................................... 87see Interior lighting

Loading guidelines ............................ 209Locking (doors)

Automatic ........................................ 67Emergency locking ........................... 68From inside (central locking but-ton) .................................................. 67see KEYLESS-GO

Locking centrallysee Central locking

Low-beam headlampsDisplay message ............................ 177Switching on/off .............................. 87

MM button ............................................. 112M+S tires ............................................ 256Malfunction message

see Display messagesManual mode ..................................... 115Matte finish (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 236mbrace

Call priority .................................... 218Display message ............................ 172Downloading destinations(COMAND) ..................................... 218Downloading routes ....................... 221Emergency call .............................. 216General notes ................................ 215Geo fencing ................................... 221Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 220MB info call button ........................ 217Remote fault diagnosis .................. 220Remote vehicle locking .................. 220Roadside Assistance button .......... 217Search & Send ............................... 219Self-test ......................................... 215Speed alert .................................... 221System .......................................... 215

Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 221Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 219

Mechanical keyFunction/notes ................................ 62General notes .................................. 62Inserting .......................................... 62Locking vehicle ................................ 68Removing ......................................... 62Unlocking the driver's door .............. 68

Media Interfacesee Separate operating instructions

Memory card (audio) ......................... 157Memory function

Seats, steering wheel, exteriormirrors ............................................. 84

Mercedes-Benz Intelligent DriveDISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 128

Message memory (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 166Messages

see Display messagessee Warning and indicator lamps

Mirror turn signalCleaning ......................................... 237

Mirrorssee Exterior mirrorssee Vanity mirror

Mobile phoneConnecting (Bluetooth® inter-face) .............................................. 206Connecting another mobilephone ............................................ 208Frequencies ................................... 279Installation ..................................... 279Menu (on-board computer) ............ 158Transmission output (maximum) .... 279

Modifying the programming(SmartKey) ........................................... 62Mounting wheels

Lowering the vehicle ...................... 277Mounting a new wheel ................... 276Preparing the vehicle ..................... 273Raising the vehicle ......................... 274Removing a wheel .......................... 275Securing the vehicle against roll-ing away ........................................ 273

Index 11

MP3Operation ....................................... 157see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 200

Multifunction displayFunction/notes ............................. 153

Multifunction steering wheelOperating the on-board computer .. 152Overview .......................................... 31

Multimedia systemSwitching on and off ...................... 201

Music filessee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 200

NNavigation

Menu (on-board computer) ............ 154see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 200

Notes on breaking-in a new vehi-cle ....................................................... 101

OOccupant Classification System(OCS)

Conditions ....................................... 43Faults ............................................... 46Operation ......................................... 43System self-test ............................... 45

Occupant safetyAir bags ........................................... 40Automaticmeasures after an acci-dent ................................................. 49Children in the vehicle ..................... 49Emergency Tensioning Devices ........ 46Important safety notes .................... 35Introduction to the restraint sys-tem .................................................. 35Occupant Classification System(OCS) ............................................... 42PASSENGER AIR BAG indicatorlamps ............................................... 36Pets in the vehicle ........................... 51PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu-pant protection) ............................... 48

Restraint system warning lamp ........ 35Seat belt .......................................... 36

OCSConditions ....................................... 43Faults ............................................... 46Operation ......................................... 43System self-test ............................... 45

Odometer ........................................... 153Oil

see Engine oilOn-board computer

AMG menu ..................................... 162Assistance graphic menu ............... 159Assistance menu ........................... 160Display messages .......................... 166Displaying a service message ........ 233DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 134Factory settings ............................. 162G-Meter ......................................... 163Important safety notes .................. 151Instrument cluster menu ............... 161Lights menu ................................... 161Media menu ................................... 157Menu overview .............................. 153Message memory .......................... 166Navigation menu ............................ 154Operation ....................................... 152RACETIMER ................................... 164Radio menu ................................... 156Service menu ................................. 160Settings menu ............................... 160Standard display ............................ 153Telephone menu ............................ 158Trip menu ...................................... 153Video DVD operation ..................... 158

Operating safetyDeclaration of conformity ................ 24Important safety notes .................... 24

Operating systemsee On-board computer

OperationDigital Operator's Manual ................ 20

Operator's ManualOverview .......................................... 22Vehicle equipment ........................... 22

Outside temperature display ........... 151Overhead control panel ...................... 33

12 Index

PPaddle shifters

see Steering wheel paddle shiftersPaint code number ............................ 280Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 235Panic alarm .......................................... 35Panorama roof ..................................... 74Parking

Important safety notes .................. 119Parking brake ................................ 121Position of exterior mirror, front-passenger side ................................. 83Rear view camera .......................... 142Switching off the engine ................ 120see PARKTRONIC

Parking aidsee Exterior mirrorssee PARKTRONIC

Parking assistancesee PARKTRONIC

Parking brakeApplying automatically ................... 121Applying or releasing manually ...... 121Display message ............................ 169Electric parking brake .................... 121Emergency braking ........................ 122General notes ................................ 121Releasing automatically ................. 122Warning lamp ................................. 194

Parking lampsSwitching on/off .............................. 87

PARKTRONICDeactivating/activating ................. 141Driving system ............................... 139Function/notes ............................. 139Important safety notes .................. 139Problem (malfunction) ................... 142Range of the sensors ..................... 140Warning display ............................. 140

PASSENGER AIR BAGDisplay message ............................ 175Problem (malfunction) ................... 175

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFIndicator lamp .................................. 36

Pets in the vehicle ............................... 51

Phone booksee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 200

Plastic trim (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 238Power washers .................................. 235Power windows

see Side windowsPRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupantprotection)

Display message ............................ 173Operation ......................................... 48

Protection against theftATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 58Immobilizer ...................................... 58

Protection of the environmentGeneral notes .................................. 21

Pulling awayAutomatic transmission ................. 104General notes ................................ 104Hill start assist ............................... 104

QQR code

Mercedes-Benz Guide App ................. 1Rescue card ..................................... 26

Qualified specialist workshop ........... 25Quick access for audio and tele-phone

Changing the station/musictrack .............................................. 203

RRACE START

Activating ....................................... 138Important safety notes .................. 137

RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 164Radio

Selecting a station ......................... 156Radio mode

see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 200

Radio-wave reception/transmis-sion in the vehicle

Declaration of conformity ................ 24Reading lamp ....................................... 89

Index 13

Rear fog lampDisplay message ............................ 177Switching on/off .............................. 87

Rear lampssee Lights

Rear spoilerDisplay message ............................ 187Extending/retracting ..................... 222Problem ......................................... 223

Rear view cameraCleaning instructions ..................... 238Function/notes ............................. 142Switching on/off ........................... 143

Rear window defrosterProblem (malfunction) ..................... 99Switching on/off .............................. 98

Rear-view mirrorDipping (automatic) ......................... 83

Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-tem)

Important safety notes .................. 285Refueling

Fuel gauge ....................................... 30Important safety notes .................. 117Refueling process .......................... 118see Fuel

Remote controlGarage door opener ....................... 223Programming (garage dooropener) .......................................... 224

Replacing bulbsGeneral notes .................................. 90

Reporting safety defects .................... 25Rescue card ......................................... 26Reserve (fuel tank)

see FuelReserve fuel

Display message ............................ 180Warning lamp ................................. 195

Restraint systemDisplay message ............................ 173Introduction ..................................... 35Warning lamp ................................. 194Warning lamp (function) ................... 35

Reversing featureSide windows ................................... 71

Reversing lamps (display mes-sage) ................................................... 177

Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 23Roller sunblind for the panoramaroof

Opening and closing ........................ 74Operating ......................................... 74

Roof lining and carpets (cleaningguidelines) ......................................... 240Route guidance

see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 200

SSafety

Child restraint systems .................... 50Children in the vehicle ..................... 49Occupant Classification System(OCS) ............................................... 42see Occupant safetysee Operating safety

Safety systemsee Driving safety systems

SD memory cardEjecting .......................................... 208Inserting ........................................ 208Inserting/removing ........................ 208see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 200Selecting ........................................ 157

Search & Sendsee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 200

Seat beltsAdjusting the driver's and front-passenger seat belt ......................... 39Cleaning ......................................... 239Correct usage .................................. 38Fastening ......................................... 39Important safety guidelines ............. 37Introduction ..................................... 36Releasing ......................................... 39Warning lamp ................................. 190Warning lamp (function) ................... 39

SeatsAdjusting (electrically) ..................... 77Adjusting (manually) ........................ 76Adjusting (Performance Seat) .......... 78Adjusting lumbar support ................ 77

14 Index

Adjusting the head restraint ............ 77Cleaning the cover ......................... 239Correct driver's seat position ........... 75Important safety notes .................... 75Seat heating problem ...................... 80Storing settings (memory func-tion) ................................................. 84Switching seat heating on/off ......... 78

SectionSeats ............................................... 75

Selector leverCleaning ......................................... 239Positions ........................................ 109

Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 237Service menu (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 160Service message

see ASSYST PLUSService products

Brake fluid ..................................... 284Coolant (engine) ............................ 284Engine oil ....................................... 283Fuel ................................................ 281Important safety notes .................. 281Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-tem) ............................................... 285Washer fluid ................................... 285

Setting the date/time formatsee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 200

Setting the languagesee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 200

Setting the timesee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 200

SettingsFactory (on-board computer) ......... 162On-board computer ....................... 160

SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 163Side impact air bag ............................. 42Side marker lamp (display mes-sage) ................................................... 177Side windows

Cleaning ......................................... 236Convenience closing feature ............ 72Convenience opening feature .......... 72

Important safety information ........... 71Opening/closing .............................. 72Problem (malfunction) ..................... 74Resetting ......................................... 73Reversing feature ............................. 71

SIRIUS servicessee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 200

SmartKeyChanging the battery ....................... 63Changing the programming ............. 62Checking the battery ....................... 63Convenience closing feature ............ 73Convenience opening feature .......... 72Display message ............................ 188Door central locking/unlocking ....... 60Important safety notes .................... 60KEYLESS-GO start function .............. 61Loss ................................................. 65Mechanical key ................................ 62Overview .......................................... 60Positions (ignition lock) ................. 103Problem (malfunction) ..................... 65Starting the engine ........................ 104

SMSsee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 200

Snow chains ...................................... 256Sockets

General notes ................................ 214Luggage compartment ................... 215

SoundSwitching on/off ........................... 201

Special seat belt retractor .................. 49Specialist workshop ............................ 25Speed, controlling

see Cruise controlSpeedometer

Activating/deactivating the addi-tional speedometer ........................ 162Digital ............................................ 154Segments ...................................... 151Selecting the display unit ............... 161

SPEEDTRONICDisplay message ............................ 182

SPORT handling modeActivating/deactivating ................... 56Warning lamp ................................. 194

Index 15

Sports exhaust systemsee AMG sports exhaust system

Standing lampsDisplay message ............................ 177Switching on/off .............................. 87

Start/Stop buttonGeneral notes ................................ 102Key positions ................................. 102Starting the engine ........................ 104

Start/stop functionsee ECO start/stop function

Starting (engine) ................................ 103Steering

Display message ............................ 188Warning lamps ............................... 199

Steering wheelAdjusting (electrically) ..................... 80Button overview ............................... 31Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 152Cleaning ......................................... 239EASY ENTRY/EXIT feature ............... 80Important safety notes .................... 80Paddle shifters ............................... 113Storing settings (memory func-tion) ................................................. 84

Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 113Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 164Stowage areas ................................... 209Stowage compartments

Armrest (front) ............................... 210Armrest (under) ............................. 210Cup holders ................................... 212Glove box ....................................... 210Important safety information ......... 209Stowage net ................................... 210

Stowage net ....................................... 210Summer tires

In winter ........................................ 256Sun visor ............................................ 212Suspension setting

AMG adaptive sport suspensionsystem ........................................... 138

Suspension settingsSETUP (on-board computer) .......... 163

Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ................................................... 99

Switching on media modeVia the device list .......................... 208

TTachometer ........................................ 151Tail lamps

Display message ............................ 177see Lights

TailgateDisplay message ............................ 187Emergency unlocking ....................... 71Important safety notes .................... 68Opening (automatically frominside) .............................................. 70Opening dimensions ...................... 286Opening/closing .............................. 68Opening/closing (from outside) ....... 69Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO ............ 69

Tank contentFuel gauge ....................................... 30

Technical dataCapacities ...................................... 281Information .................................... 279Tires/wheels ................................. 277Vehicle data ................................... 286

TelephoneAccepting a call (multifunctionsteering wheel) .............................. 159Authorizing a mobile phone (con-necting) ......................................... 207Connecting a mobile phone (gen-eral information) ............................ 206Display message ............................ 188Introduction ................................... 158Menu (on-board computer) ............ 158Number from the phone book ........ 159Redialing ........................................ 159Rejecting/ending a call ................. 159see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 200Switching between mobilephones ........................................... 208

TemperatureCoolant (display in the instrumentcluster) .......................................... 151Engine oil (on-board computer) ...... 162Outside temperature ...................... 151

16 Index

Setting (climate control) .................. 96Transmission oil (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 162

Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 164Tire pressure

Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 260Checking manually ........................ 260Display message ............................ 183Maximum ....................................... 259Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 244Notes ............................................. 258Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 244Recommended ............................... 257

Tire pressure monitorChecking the tire pressure elec-tronically ........................................ 261Function/notes ............................. 260General notes ................................ 260Important safety notes .................. 260Restarting ...................................... 262Warning lamp ................................. 198Warning message .......................... 262

Tire-change tool kit ........................... 241TIREFIT kit .......................................... 242

Important safety notes .................. 242Storage location ............................ 241Tire pressure not reached .............. 244Tire pressure reached .................... 244

TiresAspect ratio (definition) ................. 272Average weight of the vehicleoccupants (definition) .................... 270Bar (definition) ............................... 270Changing a wheel .......................... 272Characteristics .............................. 270Checking ........................................ 255Curb weight (definition) ................. 271Definition of terms ......................... 270Direction of rotation ...................... 273Display message ............................ 183Distribution of the vehicle occu-pants (definition) ............................ 272DOT (Department of Transporta-tion) (definition) ............................. 270DOT, Tire Identification Number(TIN) ............................................... 270GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)(definition) ..................................... 271

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (def-inition) ........................................... 271GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-ing) (definition) .............................. 271Important safety notes .................. 254Increased vehicle weight due tooptional equipment (definition) ...... 271Information on driving .................... 254Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 271Labeling (overview) ........................ 267Load bearing index (definition) ...... 272Load index ..................................... 269Load index (definition) ................... 271Maximum load on a tire (defini-tion) ............................................... 271Maximum loaded vehicle weight(definition) ..................................... 271Maximum permissible tire pres-sure (definition) ............................. 271Maximum tire load ......................... 269Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 271Optional equipment weight (defi-nition) ............................................ 272PSI (pounds per square inch) (def-inition) ........................................... 272Replacing ....................................... 272Service life ..................................... 255Sidewall (definition) ....................... 272Speed rating (definition) ................ 271Storing ........................................... 273Structure and characteristics(definition) ..................................... 270Summer tires in winter .................. 256Temperature .................................. 267TIN (Tire Identification Number)(definition) ..................................... 272Tire bead (definition) ...................... 272Tire pressure (definition) ................ 272Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 271Tire size (data) ............................... 277Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity, speed rating .................... 267Tire tread ....................................... 255Tire tread (definition) ..................... 272Total load limit (definition) ............. 272Traction ......................................... 266Traction (definition) ....................... 272Tread wear ..................................... 266

Index 17

Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards ...................................... 266Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards (definition) .................... 271Wear indicator (definition) ............. 272Wheel and tire combination ........... 277Wheel rim (definition) .................... 271see Flat tire

TouchpadChanging the station/musictrack .............................................. 203Character suggestions ................... 202Deleting characters ....................... 202Entering a space ............................ 202Entering characters ....................... 202Gesture control .............................. 202Handwriting recognition ................ 202Operating the touchpad ................. 202Overview ........................................ 202Quick access for Audio .................. 203Switching ....................................... 202Switching input line ....................... 202

Tow-startingEmergency engine starting ............ 252

Towing awayImportant safety guidelines ........... 250Installing the towing eye ................ 251Removing the towing eye ............... 251Transporting the vehicle ................ 252With both axles on the ground ....... 251

Towing eye ......................................... 241Traffic reports

see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 200

TransmissionDriving tips .................................... 111Selector lever ................................ 109see Automatic transmission

Transmission position display ......... 110Transmission positions .................... 111Transporting the vehicle .................. 252Trim pieces (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 239Trip computer (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 154Trip odometer

Calling up ....................................... 153

Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 154Trunk load (maximum) ...................... 286Trunk partition .................................. 211Turn signals

Display message ............................ 177Switching on/off .............................. 87

Two-way radioFrequencies ................................... 279Installation ..................................... 279Transmission output (maximum) .... 279

Type identification platesee Vehicle identification plate

UUnlocking

Emergency unlocking ....................... 68From inside the vehicle (centralunlocking button) ............................. 67

USB devicesConnecting to the Media Inter-face ............................................... 208

VVanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 213Vehicle

Correct use ...................................... 25Data acquisition ............................... 26Display message ............................ 185Electronics ..................................... 279Equipment ....................................... 22Individual settings .......................... 160Limited Warranty ............................. 26Loading .......................................... 263Locking (in an emergency) ............... 68Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 60Lowering ........................................ 277Maintenance .................................... 23Operating safety .............................. 24Parking .......................................... 119Parking for a long period ................ 122Pulling away ................................... 104Raising ........................................... 274Reporting problems ......................... 25Securing from rolling away ............ 273Towing away .................................. 250Transporting .................................. 252

18 Index

Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 68Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 60Vehicle data ................................... 286

Vehicle dataTrunk load (maximum) ................... 286

Vehicle dimensions ........................... 286Vehicle emergency locking ................ 68Vehicle identification number

see VINVehicle identification plate .............. 280Vehicle tool kit .................................. 241Video

Operating the DVD ......................... 158see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 200

VINSeat ............................................... 281Type plate ...................................... 280

Voice Control Systemsee Separate operating instructions

WWarning and indicator lamps

ABS ................................................ 192Brakes ........................................... 191Check Engine ................................. 195Coolant .......................................... 195Distance warning ........................... 197ESP® .............................................. 192ESP® OFF ....................................... 193Fuel tank ........................................ 195Overview .......................................... 30Parking brake ................................ 194PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ............... 36Reserve fuel ................................... 195Restraint system ............................ 194Seat belt ........................................ 190SPORT handling mode ................... 194Steering ......................................... 199Tire pressure monitor .................... 198

Warranty .............................................. 22Washer fluid

Display message ............................ 188Wheel and tire combinations

Tires ............................................... 277Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 277Wheel chock ...................................... 273

WheelsChanging a wheel .......................... 272Checking ........................................ 255Cleaning ......................................... 236Important safety notes .................. 254Information on driving .................... 254Interchanging/changing ................ 272Mounting a new wheel ................... 276Mounting a wheel .......................... 273Removing a wheel .......................... 275Storing ........................................... 273Tightening torque ........................... 277Wheel size/tire size ....................... 277

Window curtain air bagDisplay message ............................ 174Operation ......................................... 42

Windowssee Side windows

WindshieldDefrosting ........................................ 97

Windshield washer fluidsee Windshield washer system

Windshield washer systemAdding washer fluid ....................... 232Important safety notes .................. 285

Windshield wipersProblem (malfunction) ..................... 92Replacing the wiper blades .............. 91Switching on/off .............................. 90

Winter drivingImportant safety notes .................. 256Slippery road surfaces ................... 126Snow chains .................................. 256

Winter operationSummer tires ................................. 256

Winter tiresM+S tires ....................................... 256

Wiper bladesCleaning ......................................... 237Important safety notes .................... 91Replacing ......................................... 91Replacing (windshield) ..................... 91

Wooden trim (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 239Workshop

see Qualified specialist workshop

Index 19

Introduction

The printed Operator's Manual provides infor-mation about the safe operation of your vehicle.The Digital Operator's Manual additionallydescribes further functions and equipmentinstalled in your vehicle. The functions of thevehicle and multimedia system are described inthe Digital Operator's Manual. You can call uptheDigital Operator'sManual via themultimediasystem.

i You will not incur any costs when calling upthe Digital Operator's Manual. The DigitalOperator's Manual works without connectingto the Internet.

There are three ways to access the topics of theDigital Operator's Manual:RVisual searchThe visual search allows you to explore yourvehicle "virtually". Starting from either thevehicle exterior view or interior view, you canaccess many of the different topics coveredby the Digital Operator's Manual. To accessthe vehicle interior section, select the "Vehi-cle interior" view.RKeyword searchThe keyword search allows you to search for akeyword by entering characters. Furtherinformation can be found in the Digital Oper-ator's Manual in the "COMAND" sectionunder the "Character entry (telephony)" key-word.RContentsYou can select individual sections in the con-tents.

i The Digital Operator's Manual is deactiva-ted for safety reasons while driving.

Operation

Calling up the Digital Operator's Man-ualX Show the main function bar by sliding thecontroller upwards5.

X Select the Vehicle menu item by turning3 and pressing7 the controller.The vehicle menu is displayed.

X Select the Operator's Manualmenu itembyturning3 and pressing7 the controller.

X Confirm7 the message about the warningand safety notes.The basic menu for the Digital Operator'sManual appears.

Operating the Digital Operator's Man-ual

General notesPlease observe the information about the oper-ation of the controller (Y page 201).

Content pagesThe content pages can be accessed bymeans ofa visual search, a keyword search or using thecontents.

X To scroll forwards/backwards: turn3the controller.

X To display in full-screen or animation: slide8 the controller to the left:.

X To select information texts or save book-marks: slide9 the controller to theright;.

X To select a link: slide6 the controllerdownwards=.

X To exit a content page: select the%symbol?.

X To call up the basic menu of the DigitalOperator's Manual: selectÞ symbolA.

X To switch functions to the multimediasystem: select the%? symbol repeat-edly until you exit the Digital Operator's Man-ual.

20 Digital Operator's Manual

Protection of the environment

General notes

H Environmental noteDaimler's declared policy is one of compre-hensive environmental protection.The objectives are for the natural resourcesthat form the basis of our existence on thisplanet to be used sparingly and in a mannerthat takes the requirements of both natureand humanity into account.You too can help to protect the environmentby operating your vehicle in an environmen-tally responsible manner.Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,transmission, brake and tire wear are affectedby these factors:Roperating conditions of your vehicleRyour personal driving styleYou can influence both factors. You shouldbear the following in mind:Operating conditions:Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con-sumption.Ralways make sure that the tire pressuresare correct.Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.Rremove roof racks once you no longer needthem.Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contributeto environmental protection. You shouldtherefore adhere to the service intervals.Ralways have service work carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

Personal driving style:Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal whenstarting the engine.Rdo notwarmup the enginewhen the vehicleis stationary.Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front.Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration andbraking.

Rchange gear in good time and use each gearonly up toÔ of its maximum engine speed.Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump-tion.

Environmental concerns and recom-mendationsWherever the operating instructions require youto dispose of materials, first try to regenerate orre-use them. Observe the relevant environmen-tal rules and regulations when disposing ofmaterials. In this way you will help to protect theenvironment.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

H Environmental noteDaimler AG also supplies reconditionedmajorassemblies and parts which are of the samequality as new parts. They are covered by thesame Limited Warranty entitlements as newparts.

! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi-ces, as well as control units and sensors forthese restraint systems, may be installed inthe following areas of your vehicle:RdoorsRdoor pillarsRdoor sillsRseatsRcockpitRinstrument clusterRcenter consoleDo not install accessories such as audio sys-tems in these areas. Do not carry out repairsor welding. You could impair the operatingefficiency of the restraint systems.Have aftermarket accessories installed at aqualified specialist workshop.

You could jeopardize the operating safety ofyour vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels aswell as accessories relevant to safety whichhave not been approved byMercedes-Benz. Thiscould lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts 21

Introductio

n

Z

systems, e.g. the brake system. Use only genu-ine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal qual-ity. Only use tires, wheels and accessories thathave been specifically approved for your vehi-cle.Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject tostrict quality control. Every part has been spe-cifically developed, manufactured or selectedfor and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.Therefore, only genuine Mercedes-Benz partsshould be used.More than 300,000 different genuineMercedes-Benz parts are available forMercedes-Benz models.All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintaina supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts fornecessary service and repair work. In addition,strategically located parts delivery centers pro-vide quick and reliable parts service.Always specify the vehicle identification number(VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benzparts (Y page 280).

Operator's Manual

Vehicle equipmenti ThisOperator'sManual describes allmodelsand all standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle available at the time of going toprint. Country-specific differences are possi-ble. Bear in mind that your vehicle may notfeature all functions described here. This alsoapplies to safety-relevant systems and func-tions. The equipment in your vehicle maytherefore differ from that shown in thedescriptions and illustrations.

The original purchase agreement lists all sys-tems installed in your vehicle.Should you have any questions concerningequipment and operation, please consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Book-let are important documents and should be keptin the vehicle.

Service and vehicle operation

WarrantyThe implied warranty for your vehicle applies inaccordance with the warranty terms and condi-

tions in the Service and Warranty Informationbooklet.Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center willreplace and repair all factory-installed parts inaccordance with the following warranty termsand conditions:RNew Vehicle Limited WarrantyREmission System WarrantyREmission Performance WarrantyRCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachu-setts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Islandand Vermont Emission Control System War-rantyRState warranty enforcement laws (lemonlaws)

Replacement parts and accessories are coveredby the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessorieswarranties. These are available at any author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

i Should you lose your Service and WarrantyInformation booklet, have an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replace-ment. The new Service and Warranty Infor-mation booklet will be posted to you.

Information for customers in Califor-niaUnder California law you may be entitled to areplacement of your vehicle or a refund of thepurchase price or lease price, if after a reason-able number of repair attempts Mercedes-BenzUSA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or servicefacilities fail to fix one or more substantialdefects or malfunctions in the vehicle that arecovered by its express warranty.During the period of 18 months from originaldelivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of18,000 miles (approximately 29,000 km) on theodometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first,a reasonable number of repair attempts is pre-sumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or moreof the following occurs:(1) the same substantial defect or malfunction

results in a condition that is likely to causedeath or serious bodily injury if the vehicle isdriven, that defect or malfunction has beensubject to repair two ormore times, and you

22 Service and vehicle operationIntroductio

n

have directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA,LLC in writing of the need for its repair.

(2) the same substantial defect or malfunctionof a less serious nature than category (1)has been subject to repair four or moretimes and you have directly notifiedMercedes-Benz in writing of the need for itsrepair.

(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason ofrepair of the same or different substantialdefects or malfunctions for a cumulativetotal of more than 30 calendar days.

Please send your written notice to:Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCCustomer Assistance CenterOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350

MaintenanceThe Service and Warranty Booklet describes allthe necessary maintenance work which shouldbe done at regular intervals.Always have the Service and Warranty Bookletwith you when you bring the vehicle to anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The serviceadvisor will record every service for you in theService and Warranty Booklet.

Roadside AssistanceThe Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro-gram offers technical help in the event of abreakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assis-tance Hotline are answered by our agents 24hours a day, 365 days a year.1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)(USA)1-800-387-0100 (Canada)For additional information, refer to theMercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Programbrochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance"section in the Service and Warranty booklet(Canada). You will find both in your vehicle lit-erature portfolio.

Change of address or change of own-ershipIn the event of a change of address, please sendus the "Notification of Address Change" in theService andGuarantee booklet or simply call theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center(USA) at the hotline number1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service Center (Canada) at1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in contact-ing you in a timelymanner should the need arise.If you sell yourMercedes, please leave the entireliterature in the vehicle so that it is available tothe next owner.If you have purchased a used car, please send usthe "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in theService andGuarantee booklet or simply call theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center(USA) at the hotline number1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.

Vehicle operation outside the USAand CanadaIf you plan to operate your vehicle in foreigncountries, please be aware that:Rservice facilities or replacement parts maynot be readily available.Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalyticconverter may not be available. Leaded fuelmay cause damage to the catalytic converter.Rthe fuelmay have a considerably lower octanerating. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine dam-age.

Some Mercedes-Benz models are available fordelivery in Europe through our European Deliv-ery Program. For details, consult an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center or write to one of thefollowing addresses.In the USAMercedes-Benz USA, LLCEuropean Delivery DepartmentOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In CanadaMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.European Delivery Department98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Service and vehicle operation 23

Introductio

n

Z

Operating safety

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you do not have the prescribed service/maintenance work or any required repairscarried out, this can result in malfunctions orsystem failures. There is a risk of an accident.Always have the prescribed service/mainte-nance work as well as any required repairscarried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigsmay ignite if they come into contactwithhot parts of the exhaust system. There is a riskof fire.When driving off road or on unpaved roads,check the vehicle's underside regularly. Inparticular, remove parts of plants or otherflammable materials which have becometrapped. In the case of damage, contact aqualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGModifications to electronic components, theirsoftware as well as wiring can impair theirfunction and/or the function of other net-worked components. In particular, systemsrelevant to safety could also be affected. As aresult, these may no longer function as inten-ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety ofthe vehicle. There is an increased risk of anaccident and injury.Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-tronic components or their software. Youshould have all work to electrical and elec-tronic equipment carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a highcurb or an unpaved roadRyou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. acurb or a hole in the roadRa heavy object strikes the undercarriage orparts of the chassis

In situations like this, the body, the undercar-riage, chassis parts, wheels or tires could bedamaged without the damage being visible.Components damaged in this way can unex-pectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, nolonger withstand the strain they are designedto.If the underbody paneling is damaged, com-bustible materials such as leaves, grass ortwigs can gather between the underbody andthe underbody paneling. If these materialscome in contact with hot parts of the exhaustsystem, they can catch fire.In such situations, have the vehicle checkedand repaired immediately at a qualified spe-cialist workshop. If on continuing your jour-ney you notice that driving safety is impaired,pull over and stop the vehicle immediately,paying attention to road and traffic condi-tions. In such cases, consult a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Declarations of conformity

Vehicle components which receiveand/or transmit radio wavesUSA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle com-ply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation issubject to the two following two conditions: 1)These devices may not cause harmful interfer-ence, and 2) These devices must accept anyinterference received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation. Changesor modifications not expressly approved by theparty responsible for compliance could void theuser’s authority to operate the equipment."Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehiclecomply with Industry Canada license-exemptRSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) These devices maynot cause interference, and (2) These devicesmust accept any interference, including inter-ference that may cause undesired operation ofthe device."

24 Operating safetyIntroductio

n

Diagnostics connectionThe diagnostics connection is only intended forthe connection of diagnostic equipment at aqualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you connect equipment to the diagnosticsconnection in the vehicle, it may affect theoperation of the vehicle systems. As a result,the operating safety of the vehicle could beaffected. There is a risk of an accident.Do not connect any equipment to a diagnos-tics connection in the vehicle.

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicle isjeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

! If the engine is switched off and equipmenton the diagnostics connection is used, thestarter battery may discharge.

Connecting equipment to the diagnostics con-nection can lead to emissions monitoring infor-mation being reset, for example. This may leadto the vehicle failing tomeet the requirements ofthe next emissions test during the main inspec-tion.

Qualified specialist workshopAn authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a quali-fied specialist workshop. It has the necessaryspecialist knowledge, tools and qualifications tocorrectly carry out the work required on yourvehicle. This is especially the case for work rel-evant to safety.Observe the notes in the Maintenance Booklet.

Always have the following work carried out at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center:Rwork relevant to safetyRservice and maintenance workRrepair workRalterations, installation work and modifica-tionsRwork on electronic components

Correct useIf you remove any warning stickers, you or oth-ers could fail to recognize certain dangers.Leave warning stickers in position.Observe the following information when drivingyour vehicle:Rthe safety notes in this manualRthe vehicle technical dataRtraffic rules and regulationsRlaws and safety standards pertaining tomotorvehicles

Problems with your vehicleIf you should experience a problem with yourvehicle, particularly one that you believe mayaffect its safe operation, we urge you to contactan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immedi-ately to have the problem diagnosed and recti-fied. If the problem is not resolved to your sat-isfaction, please discuss the problem again witha Mercedes-Benz Center or contact us at one ofthe following addresses.In the USACustomer Assistance CenterMercedes-Benz USA, LLCOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In CanadaCustomer Relations DepartmentMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Reporting safety defectsUSA only:

Operating safety 25

Introductio

n

Z

The following text is published as required ofmanufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Fed-eral Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the"National Traffic andMotor Vehicle Safety Act of1966".If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could cause injuryor death, you should immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-BenzUSA, LLC.If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of vehicles, it may ordera recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, or Mercedes-BenzUSA, LLC.To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Admin-istrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW.,Washington, DC 20590.You can also obtain other information aboutmotor vehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov

Limited Warranty! Follow the instructions in this manual aboutthe proper operation of your vehicle as well asabout possible vehicle damage. Damage toyour vehicle that arises from culpable contra-ventions against these instructions is not cov-ered either by the Mercedes-Benz LimitedWarranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle War-ranty.

QR codes for the rescue card

The QR codes are secured in the fuel filler flapand on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In theevent of an accident, rescue services can usethe QR code to quickly find the appropriate res-cue card for your vehicle. The current rescuecard contains the most important informationabout your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. therouting of the electric cables.You can find more information under http://portal.aftersales.i.daimler.com/public/

content/asportal/en/communication/informationen_fuer/QRCode.html.

Data stored in the vehicle

Data storageA wide range of electronic components in yourvehicle contain data memories.These data memories temporarily or perma-nently store technical information about:Rvehicle's operating stateRincidentsRmalfunctionsIn general, this technical information docu-ments the state of a component, a module, asystem or the surroundings.These include, for example:Roperating conditions of system components,e.g. fluid levelsRthe vehicle's statusmessages and those of itsindividual components, e.g. number of wheelrevolutions/speed, deceleration in move-ment, lateral acceleration, accelerator pedalpositionRmalfunctions and defects in important systemcomponents, e.g. lights, brakesRvehicle reactions and operating conditions inspecial driving situations, e.g. air bag deploy-ment, intervention of stability control sys-temsRambient conditions, e.g. outside temperatureThis data is of an exclusively technical natureand can be used to:Rassist in recognizing and rectifying malfunc-tions and defectsRanalyze vehicle functions, e.g. after an acci-dentRoptimize vehicle functionThe data cannot be used to trace the vehicle'smovements.When your vehicle is serviced, technical infor-mation can be read from the event datamemoryand malfunction data memory.Services include, for example:Rrepair servicesRservice processesRwarrantiesRquality assurance

26 Data stored in the vehicleIntroductio

n

The vehicle is read out by employees of the ser-vice network (including the manufacturer) usingspecial diagnostic testers. More detailed infor-mation is obtained from it, if required.After a malfunction has been rectified, the infor-mation is deleted from the malfunction memoryor is continually overwritten.When operating the vehicle, situations are con-ceivable in which this technical data, in connec-tion with other information (if necessary, underconsultation with an authorized expert), couldbe traced to a person.Examples include:Raccident reportsRdamage to the vehicleRwitness statementsFurther additional functions that have been con-tractually agreed upon with the customer allowcertain vehicle data to be conveyed by the vehi-cle as well. The additional functions include, forexample, vehicle location in case of an emer-gency.

COMAND/mbraceIf the vehicle is equipped with COMAND ormbrace, additional data about the vehicle'soperation, the use of the vehicle in certain sit-uations, and the location of the vehicle may becompiled through COMAND or the mbrace sys-tem.For additional information please refer to theCOMAND User Manual or the Digital Operator'sManual and/or the mbrace Terms and Condi-tions.

Event data recordersThis vehicle is equipped with an event datarecorder (EDR). This vehicle is equipped with anevent data recorder (EDR). The main purpose ofan EDR is to record, in certain crash or nearcrash-like situations, such as an air bag deploy-ment or hitting a road obstacle, data that willassist in understanding how a vehicle's systemsperformed. The EDR is designed to record datarelated to vehicle dynamics and safety systemsfor a short period of time, typically 30 secondsor less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to recordsuch data as:RHow various systems in your vehicle wereoperatingRWhether or not the driver and passengersafety belts were buckled/fastenedRHow far (if at all) the driver was depressing theaccelerator and/or brake pedal andRHow fast the vehicle was traveling.These data can help provide a better under-standing of the circumstances in which acci-dents and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data arerecorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivialcrash situation occurs; no data is recorded bythe EDR under normal driving conditions and nopersonal data (e.g. name, gender, age and acci-dent location) are recorded. However, other par-ties, such as law enforcement could combineEDR data with the type of personally identifyingdata routinely acquired during a crash investi-gation.Access to the vehicle and/or the EDR is neededto read data that is recorded by the EDR, andspecial equipment is required. In addition to thevehicle manufacturer, other parties that havethe special equipment, such as law enforce-ment, can read the information by accessing thevehicle or the EDR.EDR data may be used in civil and criminal mat-ters as a tool in accident reconstruction, acci-dent claims and vehicle safety. Since the CrashData Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extractdata from the EDR is commercially available,Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expresslydisclaims any and all liability arising from theextraction of this information by unauthorizedMercedes-Benz personnel.MBUSA will not share EDR data with otherswithout the consent of the vehicle owners or, ifthe vehicle is leased, without the consent of thelessee. Exceptions to this representationinclude responses to subpoenas by law enforce-ment; by federal, state or local government; inconnectionwith or arising out of litigation involv-ing MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or,as required by law.Warning: The EDR is a component of theRestraint SystemModule. Tamperingwith, alter-ing, modifying or removing the EDR componentmay result in a malfunction of the Restraint Sys-tem Module and other systems.State laws or regulations regarding EDRs thatconflict with federal regulation are pre-empted.

Data stored in the vehicle 27

Introductio

n

Z

Thismeans that in the event of such conflict, thefederal regulation governs. As of February 2013,13 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.

Information on copyright

General informationInformation on license for free and open-sourcesoftware used in your vehicle and its electroniccomponents is available on the following web-site:http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

28 Information on copyrightIntroductio

n

Cockpit

Function Page

: Combination switch 87

; Steering wheel paddle shift-ers 113

= Instrument cluster 30

? Overhead control panel 33

A Climate control systems 95

B Horn

C Adjusts the steering wheelelectrically 80

Function Page

D Cruise control lever 127

E Unlocks the tailgate 70

F Electric parking brake 121

G Diagnostics connection 25

H Opens the hood 227

I Rear fog lamp 87

J Light switch 86

Cockpit 29

Ataglance

Instrument cluster

Function Page

: SpeedometerSpeedometer segments 151Warning and indicator lamps:h Tire pressure monitor 198å ESP® OFF 192÷ ESP® 192· Distance warning 197Ð Power steering 1996 Restraint system 35ü Seat belts 190K High-beam headlamps 87L Low-beam headlamps 87T Parking lamps 87N This lamp has no func-tionR Rear fog lamp 87

; #! Turn signals 87

= Multifunction display 153

? Tachometer 151

Function PageWarning and indicator lamps:! Electric parking brake(yellow) 194! ABS 192; Check Engine 195Electric parking brake (red) 194F USA only! Canada onlyBrakes (red) 191$ USA onlyJ Canada onlyM SPORT handling mode 194

A Coolant temperature display 151Warning and indicator lamps:? Coolant 195

B Fuel level indicatorWarning and indicator lamps:8 Reserve fuel level withfuel filler flap location indica-tor (right) 195

i Information on the display of the outsidetemperature in the multifunction display canbe found under "Outside temperature dis-play" (Y page 151).Adjusting the instrument cluster lightingusing the on-board computer (Y page 161).

30 Instrument clusterAt

aglance

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page

: Multifunction display 153

; Multimedia system display

= ~ Rejects or ends a call6Makes or accepts a callFurther telephone functions 158WX Adjusts volume8 Muteó Switches on the VoiceControl System

Function Page

? ò Opens the menu list9: Selects a menua Confirms the selection% BackOperates the on-board com-puter 152ñ Switches off the VoiceControl System

i In vehicles with multimedia systemCOMAND you can find further information:Ron the multimedia system in the DigitalOperator's ManualRon the DVD changer or single DVD drive inthe Digital Operator's ManualRon the Voice Control System in the sepa-rate operating instructions

Multifunction steering wheel 31

Ataglance

Center console

Function Page

: Stowage compartment 21012 V socket 214Cigarette lighter 214Ashtray 213

; Switches themultimedia sys-tem on or off (see separateoperating instructions)

= M button (activates manualmode) 112

? è ECO button (start/stopfunction) incl. indicator lamp 106

A Adjusts the exhaust flap ofthe AMG sports exhaust sys-tem 106

B Ignition lock (in the stowagecompartment) 103

C Stowage compartment 210

Function Page

D AMGE-SELECT selector lever 109

E Adjusts AMG adaptive sportsuspension system 138

F Button for gear P 109

G Activates/deactivates ESP® 56Activates/deactivatesSPORT handling mode 56

H Touchpad (see the separateoperating instructions)

I Start/Stop button 102

J Multimedia system control-ler (see the separate operat-ing instructions)

K Selects the drive program(DYNAMIC SELECT control-ler) 108

32 Center consoleAt

aglance

Overhead control panel

Function Page

: c Seat heating 78

; Extends/retracts rearspoiler 222

= £ Hazard warning lamps 88

? PASSENGER AIR BAG indica-tor lamp 36ATA indicator lamp 58

A c PARKTRONIC 139

B |Switches the automaticinterior lighting controlon/off 90

C p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off 89

D ï MB Info call button(mbrace system) 217

Function Page

E Rear-view mirror 83

F Transmitter buttons for thegarage door opener 224

G G SOS button (mbracesystem) 216

H F Roadside Assistancecall button (mbrace system) 217

I p Switches the left-handreading lamp on/off 89

J c Switches the interiorlighting on/off 89

K u Switches the cargocompartment lamp on/off 90

Overhead control panel 33

Ataglance

Door control panel

Function Page

: Opens the door 67

; &% Locks/unlocksthe vehicle 67

= Z Selects the left exteriormirror 81

? ª Folds the exterior mir-rors in/out electrically 82

Function Page

A \ Selects the right exte-rior mirror 81

B 7 Adjusts the exteriormirrors 82

C W Opens/closes the sidewindows 72

34 Door control panelAt

aglance

Panic alarm

X To activate: press! button: for atleast one second.A visual and audible alarm is triggered if thealarm system is armed.

X To deactivate: press! button: again.orX Press the Start/Stop button.The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

Occupant safety

Introduction to the restraint systemThe restraint system can reduce the risk of vehi-cle occupants coming into contact with parts ofthe vehicle's interior in the event of an accident.The restraint system can also reduce the forcestowhich vehicle occupants are subjected duringan accident.The restraint system comprises:RSeat belt systemRAir bagsThe components of the restraint system work inconjunction with each other. They can onlydeploy their protective function if, at all times, allvehicle occupants:Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly(Y page 38)Rhave adjusted their seat properly(Y page 75).

As the driver, you also have to make sure thatthe steering wheel is adjusted correctly.Observe the information relating to the correctdriver's seat position (Y page 75).

You also have to make sure that an air bag caninflate properly if deployed (Y page 40).An air bag supplements a correctly worn seatbelt. As an additional safety device, the air bagincreases the level of protection for vehicleoccupants in the event of an accident. For exam-ple, if, in the event of an accident, the protectionoffered by the seat belt is sufficient, the air bagsare not deployed.When an accident occurs, onlythe air bags that increase protection in that par-ticular accident situation are deployed. How-ever, seat belts and air bags generally do notprotect against objects penetrating the vehiclefrom the outside.Information on restraint system operation canbe found under "Triggering of the EmergencyTensioning Devices and air bags" (Y page 46).See "Children in the vehicle" for information oninfants and children traveling with you in thevehicle restraint systems for infants and chil-dren (Y page 49).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGModifications to the restraint system maycause it to no longer work as intended. Therestraint system may then not perform itsintended protective function andmay fail in anaccident or trigger unexpectedly, for example.This poses an increased risk of injury or evenfatal injury.Never modify parts of the restraint system.Never tamper with the wiring, the electroniccomponents or their software.If it is necessary tomodify an air bag system toaccommodate a person with disabilities, con-tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center fordetails. USA only: for further information con-tact our Customer Assistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1‑800‑367‑6372).

Restraint system warning lampThe functions of the restraint system arechecked after the ignition is switched on and atregular intervals while the engine is running.Therefore, malfunctions can be detected ingood time.

Occupant safety 35

Safety

Z

The 6 restraint system warning lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up when the ignition isswitched on. It goes out no later than a few sec-onds after the engine is started. The compo-nents of the restraint system are in operationalreadiness.Amalfunction has occurred if the 6 restraintsystem warning lamp:Rdoes not light up after the ignition is switchedonRdoes not go out after a few seconds with theengine runningRlights up again while the engine is running

G WARNINGIf restraint system is malfunctioning, restraintsystem components may be triggered unin-tentionally or might not be triggered at all inthe event of an accident with a high rate ofvehicle deceleration. This can affect the Emer-gency Tensioning Device or air bag, for exam-ple. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.Have the restraint system checked andrepaired in a qualified specialist workshop assoon as possible.

PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp

PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp: andPASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp; arepart of the Occupant Classification System(OCS).The indicator lamps display the status of thefront-passenger front air bag.RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up: the front-passenger front air bag is enabled. If, in theevent of an accident, all deployment criteria

are met, the front-passenger front air bag isdeployed.RPASSENGER AIR BAGOFF lights up: the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. It willthen not be deployed in the event of an acci-dent.

Depending on the person in the front-passengerseat, the front-passenger front air bag musteither be deactivated or enabled; see the fol-lowing points. You must make sure of this bothbefore and during a journey.RChildren in a child restraint system:whether the front-passenger front air bag isenabled or deactivated depends on the instal-led child restraint system, and the age andsize of the child. Therefore, be sure to observethe notes on the "Occupant ClassificationSystem (OCS)" (Y page 42) and on "Chil-dren in the vehicle" (Y page 49). There youwill also find instructions on rearward andforward-facing child restraint systems on thefront-passenger seat.RAll other persons: depending on the classi-fication of the person in the front-passengerseat, the front-passenger front air bag is ena-bled or deactivated (Y page 42). Be sure toobserve the notes on "Seatbelts“ (Y page 36) and "Air bags"(Y page 40). There you can also find infor-mation on the correct seat position.

Seat belts

IntroductionSeat belts are the most effective means ofrestricting the movement of vehicle occupantsin the event of an accident or the vehicle rollingover. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupantscoming into contact with parts of the vehicleinterior or being ejected from the vehicle. Fur-thermore, the seat belt helps to keep the vehicleoccupant in the best position in relation to theair bag.The seat belt system comprises:RSeat beltsREmergency Tensioning Devices and seat beltforce limiters

If the seat belt is pulled out of the belt outletquickly or with a jerky movement, the beltretractor locks. The belt strap cannot be extrac-ted any further.

36 Occupant safetySafety

The Emergency Tensioning Device tightens theseat belt in an accident, pulling the belt closeagainst the body. However it does not pull thevehicle occupant back in the direction of thebackrest.The Emergency Tensioning Device does not cor-rect an incorrect seat position or the routing ofan incorrectly fastened seat belt.When triggered, a seat belt force limiter helps toreduce the force exerted by the seat belt on thevehicle occupant.The seat belt force limiters are synchronizedwith the front air bags which absorb part of thedeceleration force. This can reduce the forceexerted on the vehicle occupants during an acci-dent.

! If the front-passenger seat is not occupied,do not engage the seat belt tongue in thebuckle on the front-passenger seat. Other-wise, in the event of an accident, the Emer-gency Tensioning Device and front-passengerfront air bagmay be triggered andwould needto be replaced.

Important safety notesThe use of seat belts and child restraint systemsis required by law in:Rall 50 statesRthe U.S. territoriesRthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provincesEvenwhere this is not required by law, all vehicleoccupants should correctly fasten their seatbelts before starting the journey.

G WARNINGIf the seat belt is incorrectly fastened, it can-not protect as intended. Furthermore, anincorrectly fastened seat belt can cause addi-tional injury, for example, in an accident, dur-ing braking or when abruptly changing direc-tion. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.Make sure that all vehicle occupants areseated properly with a correctly fastened seatbelt.

G WARNINGThe seat belt does not offer the intended levelof protection if you have not moved the back-rest to an almost vertical position.When brak-ing or in the event of an accident, you couldslide underneath the seat belt and sustainabdomen or neck injuries, for example. Thisposes an increased risk of injury or even fatalinjury.Adjust the seat properly before beginningyour journey. Always ensure that the backrestis in an almost vertical position and that theshoulder section of your seat belt is routedacross the center of your shoulder.

G WARNINGPersons under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height cannotfasten the seat belt correctly without an addi-tional suitable restraint system. If the seatbelt is incorrectly fastened, it cannot protectas intended. Furthermore, an incorrectly fas-tened seat belt can cause additional injury, forexample, in an accident, during braking or anabrupt change of direction. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.For this reason, always secure persons under5 ft (1.50 m) in height in suitable restraintsystems.

If a child younger than twelve years old andunder 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in thevehicle:Ralways secure the child in a child restraintsystem suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehi-cle. The child restraint systemmust be appro-priate to the age, weight and size of the childRalways observe the instructions and safetynotes in the "Children in the vehicle" sectionof this Operator's Manual (Y page 49) inaddition to the child restraint system manu-facturer's installation instructionsRbe sure to observe the instructions and safetynotes on the "Occupant classification system(OCS)" (Y page 42)

Occupant safety 37

Safety

Z

G WARNINGThe seat belts may not perform their intendedprotective function if:Rthey are damaged, modified, extremelydirty, bleach or dyedRthe seat belt buckle is damaged orextremely dirtyRthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, beltanchorages or inertia reels have beenmodi-fied

Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage inan accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modi-fied or damaged seat belts may tear or fail,e.g. in an accident. Modified Emergency Ten-sioning Devices could accidentally trigger orfail to deploy when necessary. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Ten-sioning Devices, belt anchorages or inertiareels. Make sure that the seat belts areundamaged, not worn out and clean. Follow-ing an accident, have the seat belts checkedimmediately at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Only use seat belts that have been approved foryour vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.VehicleswithAMGPerformance seats: theseseats are designed for the standard three-pointseat belt. If you install another multi-point seatbelt, e.g. sport or racing seat belts, the restraintsystem cannot provide the best level of protec-tion.

G WARNINGIf you feed seat belts through the opening inthe seat backrest, the seat backrest may bedamaged or may even break in the event of anaccident. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.Only use the standard three-point seat belt.Never modify the seat belt system.

Proper use of the seat beltsObserve the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 37).

All vehicle occupants must be wearing the seatbelt correctly before beginning the journey. Alsomake sure that all vehicle occupants are alwayswearing the seat belt correctly while the vehicleis in motion.When fastening the seat belt, always make surethat:Rthe seat belt tongue is only inserted to the beltbuckle belonging to that seat.Rthe seat belt is tight across your body.Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a wintercoat.Rthe seat belt is not twisted.Only then can the forces which occur be dis-tributed over the area of the belt.Rthe shoulder section of the belt is alwaysrouted across the center of your shoulder.The shoulder section of the belt must notcome into contact with your neck or be routedunder your arm.Rthe lap belt passes tightly and as low down aspossible across your lap.The lap belt must always be routed acrossyour hip joints and not across your abdomen.This applies particularly to pregnant women.If necessary, push the lap belt down to yourhip joint and pull it tight using the shouldersection of the belt.Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp, poin-ted or fragile objects.If you have such items located on or in yourclothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses, storethese in a suitable place.Ronly one person is using a seat belt at a time.Infants and children must never travel sittingon the lap of a vehicle occupant. In the eventof an accident, they could be crushedbetween the vehicle occupant and seat belt.Robjects are never secured with a seat belt ifthe seat belt is also being used by one of thevehicle's occupants.Also ensure that there are never objectsbetween a person and the seat, e.g. cushions.

Seat belts are only intended to secure andrestrain vehicle occupants. Always observe the"Loading guidelines" for securing objects, lug-gage or loads (Y page 209).

38 Occupant safetySafety

Fastening seat beltsObserve the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 37) and the notes on correct use of seatbelts (Y page 38).

Basic illustrationX Adjust the seat (Y page 75).The seat backrest must be in an almost ver-tical position.

X Pull the seat belt smoothly out of belt loop=and engage belt tongue; into beltbuckle:.The seat belt on the driver’s seat and thefront-passenger seat may be tightened auto-matically, see "Belt adjustment"(Y page 39).

X If necessary, pull upwards on the shouldersection of the seat belt to tighten the beltacross your body.

In order to attach the child restraint systemsecurely in the vehicle, the seat belt on the front-passenger seat is equipped with a special seatbelt retractor. Further information on the "Spe-cial seat belt retractor" (Y page 49).

Releasing seat belts! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up.Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will betrapped in the door or in the seat mechanism.This could damage the door, the door trimpanel and the seat belt. Damaged seat beltscan no longer fulfill their protective functionand must be replaced. Visit a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Basic illustrationX Press release button: and guide belttongue; back towards belt loop=.

Seat belt adjustmentThe seat-belt adjustment is an integral part ofthe PRE-SAFE® convenience function. This func-tion adjusts the driver's and front-passengerseat belt to the upper body of the occupants.The belt strap is tightened slightly when:Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle andRthe ignition is switched onThe seat-belt adjustment will apply a certainretraction force if any slack is detected betweenthe vehicle occupant and the seat belt. Do nothold on to the seat belt tightly while it is adjust-ing.You can activate and deactivate the seat-beltadjustment function using the multimedia sys-tem. Information on activating and deactivatingthe seat-belt adjustment function can be foundin the Digital Operator's Manual.

Belt warning for the driver and frontpassengerThe 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru-ment cluster is a reminder that all occupantsmust fasten their seat belts. It may light up con-tinuously or flash. In addition, there may be awarning tone.Regardless of whether the driver's seat belt hasalready been fastened, the 7 seat belt warn-

Occupant safety 39

Safety

Z

ing lamp lights up for six seconds each time theengine is started. If, after six seconds, the driveror front-passenger seat belt has not been fas-tened and the doors are closed, the 7 seatbelt warning lamp lights up. As soon as the driv-er's and front-passenger seat belts are fastenedor a front door is opened again, the 7 seatbelt warning lamp goes out.If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after theengine is started, an additional warning tone willsound. Thiswarning tone stops after six secondsor when the driver's seat belt is fastened.If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph(25 km/h) once and the driver's and front-passenger seat belts are not fastened, awarningtone sounds. A warning tone also sounds withincreasing intensity for 60 seconds or until thedriver or front passenger have fastened theirseat belts.If the driver or front passenger unfasten theirseat belts during the journey, the seat belt warn-ing is activated again.

i For more information on the 7 seat beltwarning lamp, see "Warning and indicatorlamps in the instrument cluster, seat belts"(Y page 190).

Air bags

IntroductionThe installation point of an air bag can be rec-ognized by the AIR BAG symbol.An air bag complements the correctly fastenedseat belt. It is no substitute for the seat belt. Theair bag provides additional protection in appli-cable accident situations.Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. Thedifferent air bag systems function independ-ently from one another (Y page 46).However, no system available today can com-pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities.It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injurycaused by an air bag due to the high speed atwhich the air bag must be deployed.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you do not sit in the correct seat position,the air bag cannot protect as intended and

could even cause additional injury whendeployed. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.To avoid hazardous situations, always makesure that all of the vehicle's occupants:Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly,including pregnant womenRare sitting correctly andmaintain the great-est possible distance to the air bagsRfollow the following instructionsAlways make sure that there are no objectsbetween the air bag and the vehicle's occu-pants.

RAdjust the seats properly before beginningyour journey. Always make sure that the seatis in an almost upright position.RMove the driver's and front-passenger seatsas far back as possible. The driver's seat posi-tionmust allow the vehicle to be driven safely.ROnly hold the steering wheel on the outside.This allows the air bag to be fully deployed.RAlways lean against the backrest while driv-ing. Do not lean forwards or lean against thedoor or side window. Youmay otherwise be inthe deployment area of the air bags.RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in frontof the seat. Do not put your feet on the dash-board, for example. Your feet may otherwisebe in the deployment area of the air bag.RFor this reason, always secure persons lessthan 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint sys-tems. Up to this height, the seat belt cannotbe worn correctly.

If a child is traveling in your vehicle, alsoobserve the following notes:RAlways secure children under twelve years ofage and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitablechild restraint systems.ROnly secure a child in a rearward-facing childrestraint system on the front-passenger seatwhen the front-passenger front air bag isdeactivated. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp is permanently lit, the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated(Y page 36).RAlways observe the instructions and safetynotes on the "Occupant Classification System(OCS)" (Y page 42) and on "Children in thevehicle" (Y page 49) in addition to the child

40 Occupant safetySafety

restraint system manufacturer's installationinstructions.

Objects in the vehicle interior may preventthe air bag from functioning correctly.Before starting your journey and to avoid risksresulting from the speed of the air bag as itdeploys, make sure that:Rthere are no people, animals or objectsbetween the vehicle occupants and an airbag.Rthere are no objects between the seat, doorand B-pillar.Rno accessories, such as cup holders, areattached to the vehicle within the deploymentarea of an air bag, e.g. to doors or side win-dows.Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are inthe pockets of your clothing. Store suchobjects in a suitable place.

G WARNINGIf you modify the air bag cover or affix objectssuch as stickers to it, the air bag can no longerfunction correctly. There is an increased riskof injury.Never modify an air bag cover or affix objectsto it.

G WARNINGSensors to control the air bags are located inthe doors. Modifications or work not per-formed correctly to the doors or door panel-ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to thefunction of the sensors being impaired. The airbags might therefore not function properlyanymore. Consequently, the air bags cannotprotect vehicle occupants as they aredesigned to do. There is an increased risk ofinjury.Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.Always have work on the doors or door pan-eling carried out at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Front air bags

Driver's air bag: deploys in front of the steer-ing wheel. Front-passenger front air bag;deploys in front of and above the glove box.When deployed, the front air bags offer addi-tional head and thorax protection for the occu-pants in the driver's and front-passenger seats.The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGERAIR BAG ON indicator lamps inform you aboutthe status of the front-passenger air bag(Y page 36).Front-passenger front air bag;will only deployif:Rthe system, based on the OCS weight sensorreadings, detects that the front-passengerseat is occupied (Y page 42). ThePASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is lit(Y page 43)Rthe restraint system control unit predicts ahigh accident severity

Knee bags

Driver's knee bag: deploys under the steeringcolumn and front-passenger knee bag; underthe glove box. The driver's and front-passengerknee bags are triggered together with the frontair bags.

Occupant safety 41

Safety

Z

The driver's and front-passenger knee bagsoffer additional thigh, knee and lower leg pro-tection.

Side impact air bags

G WARNINGUnsuitable seat covers could restrict or evenprevent the deployment of the air bags inte-grated into the seats. Consequently, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants asthey are designed to do. In addition, the func-tion of the Occupant Classification System(OCS) could be restricted. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.You should only use seat covers that havebeen approved for the respective seat byMercedes-Benz.

Side impact air bags: deploy next to the outerbolster of the seat backrest.When deployed, the side impact air bag offersadditional thorax protection. However, it doesnot protect the:RheadRneckRarmsIn the event of a side impact, the side impact airbag is deployed on the side on which the impactoccurs.The side impact air bag on the front-passengerside deploys under the following conditions:Rthe OCS system detects that the front-passenger seat is occupied orRthe belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckleof the front-passenger seat

If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle,the side impact air bag on the front-passenger

side deploys if an appropriate accident situationoccurs. In this case, deployment is independentof whether the front-passenger seat is occupiedor not.

Window curtain air bags

Window curtain air bags: are integrated intothe side of the roof frame and deployed in thearea from the A-pillar to the C-pillar.When deployed, the window curtain air bagenhances the level of protection for the head.However, it does not protect the chest or arms.In the event of a side impact, the window curtainair bag is deployed on the side on which theimpact occurs.If the system determines that they can offeradditional protection to that provided by theseat belt, a window curtain air bag may bedeployed in other accident situations(Y page 46).

Occupant Classification System(OCS)

IntroductionThe Occupant Classification System (OCS) cat-egorizes the person in the front-passenger seat.Depending on that result, the front-passengerfront air bag and front-passenger knee bag areeither enabled or deactivated.The system does not deactivate:Rthe side impact air bagRthe window curtain air bagRthe Emergency Tensioning Devices

42 Occupant safetySafety

PrerequisitesTo be classified correctly, the front passengermust sit:Rwith the seat belt fastened correctlyRin an almost upright position with their backagainst the seat backrestRwith their feet resting on the floor, if possibleIf the front passenger does not observe theseconditions, OCS may produce a false classifica-tion, e.g. because the front passenger:Rtransfers their weight by supporting them-selves on a vehicle armrestRsits in such a way that their weight is raisedfrom the seat cushion

If you install a child restraint system on thefront-passenger seat, be sure to observe thecorrect positioning of the child restraint system.Never place objects under or behind the childrestraint system, e.g. cushions.Only then can OCS be guaranteed to functioncorrectly. Always observe the child restraint sys-tem manufacturer's installation instructions.

Occupant Classification System opera-tion (OCS)

: PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp; PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampThe indicator lamps inform you whether thefront-passenger front air bag is deactivated orenabled.X Press the Start/Stop button once or twice, orturn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.The system carries out self-diagnostics.

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGERAIR BAGON indicator lampsmust light up simul-taneously for approximately six seconds.

The indicator lamps display the status of thefront-passenger front air bag.RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up: the front-passenger front air bag is enabled. If, in theevent of an accident, all deployment criteriaare met, the front-passenger front air bag isdeployed.RPASSENGER AIR BAGOFF lights up: the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. It willthen not be deployed in the event of an acci-dent.

If the status of the front-passenger front air bagchangeswhile the vehicle is inmotion, an air bagdisplaymessage appears in the instrument clus-ter (Y page 175). When the front-passengerseat is occupied, always pay attention to thePASSENGER AIR BAG ON and PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF indicator lamps. Be aware of the statusof the front-passenger front air bag both beforeand during the journey.

G WARNINGIf the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag isdisabled. It will not be deployed in the event ofan accident and cannot perform its intendedprotective function. A person in the front-passenger seat could then, for example, comeinto contact with the vehicle's interior, espe-cially if the person is sitting too close to thedashboard. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.When the front-passenger seat is occupied,always ensure that:Rthe classification of the person in the front-passenger seat is correct and the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-bled in accordance with the person in thefront-passenger seatRthe front-passenger seat has been movedback as far back as possible.Rthe person is seated correctly.Make sure, both before and during the jour-ney, that the status of the front-passengerfront air bag is correct.

G WARNINGIf you secure a child in a rearward-facing childrestraint system on the front-passenger seat

Occupant safety 43

Safety

Z

and the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicatorlamp is lit up, the front-passenger front air bagmay deploy in an accident. The child could bestruck by the air bag. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.Make sure that the front-passenger front airbag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampremains off and/or the PASSENGER AIR BAGON indicator lamp lights up, do not install a rear-ward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. You can find more informationon OCS under "Problems with the OccupantClassification System" (Y page 46).

G WARNINGIf you secure a child in a forward-facing childrestraint system on the front-passenger seatand you position the front-passenger seat tooclose to the dashboard, in the event of anaccident, the child could:Rcome into contact with the vehicle's inte-rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-cator lamp is lit, for exampleRbe struck by the air bag if the PASSENGERAIR BAG ON is lit up

This poses an increased risk of injury or evenfatal injury.Move the front-passenger seat as far back aspossible. Always make sure that the shoulderbelt strap is correctly routed from the vehiclebelt loop to the shoulder belt guide on thechild restraint system. The shoulder belt strapmust be routed forwards and downwardsfrom the belt loop. Always observe the childrestraint system manufacturer's installationinstructions.

If OCS determines that:Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied, thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamplights up after the system self-test andremains lit. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated.Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by achild of up to twelvemonths old, in a standardchild restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR

BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after thesystem self-test and remains lit. This indi-cates that the front-passenger front air bag isdeactivated.But even in the case of a twelve-month-oldchild, in a standard child restraint system, thePASSENGER AIR BAG ON can light up perma-nently after the system self-test. This indi-cates that the front-passenger front air bag isactivated. The result of the classification isdependent on, among other factors, the childrestraint systemand the child's stature.Makesure that the conditions for a correct classi-fication are met. If the PASSENGER AIR BAGON indicator lamp is still lit, do not install achild restraint system on the front-passengerseat.Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a per-son of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager orsmall adult), either the PASSENGER AIR BAGON or PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp lights up and remains lit after the systemself-test depending on the result of the clas-sification.- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicatorlamp lights up, move the front-passengerseat as far back as possible.

- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp is lit, a person of smaller statureshould not use the front-passenger seat.

Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by anadult or a person of a stature correspondingto that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIR BAGON indicator lamp lights up after the systemself-test and remains lit. This indicates thatthe front-passenger front air bag is activated.

If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure toobserve the notes on "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 49).When OCS is malfunctioning, the red 6restraint systemwarning lamp in the instrumentcluster and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-cator lamp light up simultaneously. The front-passenger front air bag is deactivated in thiscase and does not deploy during an accident.Have the system checked by qualified techni-cians as soon as possible. Consult an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center. The front-passengerseat should only be repaired at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or theseat cushion is damaged, have the necessaryrepair work carried out at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

44 Occupant safetySafety

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use seat accessories thathave been approved by Mercedes-Benz.If the driver's air bag deploys, this does notmean that the front-passenger front air bag willalso deploy. The Occupant Classification Sys-tem (OCS) categorizes the occupant in the front-passenger seat. Depending on that result, thefront-passenger front air bag is either enabled ordeactivated.

System self-test

G DANGERIf both the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF andPASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps donot light up during the system self-test, thesystem is malfunctioning. The front-passenger front air bag might be triggeredunintentionally or might not be triggered at allin the event of an accident with high deceler-ation. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.In this case the front-passenger seat may notbe used. Do not install a child restraint systemon the front-passenger seat. Have the Occu-pant Classification System (OCS) checkedand repaired immediately at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp remains lit after the system self-test, thefront-passenger front air bag is disabled. It willnot be deployed in the event of an accident. Inthis case, the front-passenger front air bagcannot perform its intended protective func-tion, e.g. when a person is seated in the front-passenger seat.That person could, for example, come intocontact with the vehicle's interior, especiallyif the person is sitting too close to the dash-board. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.

When the front-passenger seat is occupied,always ensure that:Rthe classification of the person in the front-passenger seat is correct and the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-bled in accordance with the person in thefront-passenger seatRthe person is seated properly with a cor-rectly fastened seatbeltRthe front-passenger seat has been movedas far back as possible

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp remains lit when it should not, the front-passenger seat may not be used. Do notinstall a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classifi-cation System (OCS) checked and repairedimmediately at a qualified specialist work-shop.

G WARNINGObjects between the seat surface and thechild restraint system could affect OCS oper-ation. This could result in the front-passengerair bag not functioning as intended during anaccident. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.Do not place any objects between the seatsurface and the child restraint system. Theentire base of the child restraint system mustalways rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far aspossible, be resting on the backrest of thefront-passenger seat. Always comply with thechild restraint system manufacturer's instal-lation instructions.

After the system self-test, the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF or PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicatorlamp displays the status of the front-passengerfront air bag (Y page 43).Further information about the OCS can be foundunder "Problems with the Occupant Classifica-tion System" (Y page 46).

Occupant safety 45

Safety

Z

Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS)Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 45).

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamplights up and remains lit,even though the front-passenger seat is occu-pied by an adult or a per-son of a stature corre-sponding to that of anadult.

The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is incor-rect.X Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the personon the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 43).

X If the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF indicator lamp remains lit, the front-passenger seat may not be used.

X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lampdoes not light up and/ordoes not stay on.The front-passenger seatis:RunoccupiedRoccupied with theweight of a child up totwelve months old in achild restraint system

OCS is malfunctioning.X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the childseat.

X Make sure that the backrest and base of the child restraint systemare resting securely on the front-passenger seat. If necessary,adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.

X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the seatbelt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight using the front-passengerseat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and the childrestraint system being pulled too tightly.

X Check for correct installation of the child restraint system. Makesure that the head restraint does not apply a load to the childrestraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraint accord-ingly.

X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto theseat.

X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/orthe PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do not installa child restraint system on the front-passenger seat.

X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Deployment of Emergency TensioningDevices and air bags

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe air bag parts are hot after an air bag hasbeen deployed. There is a risk of injury.Do not touch the air bag parts. Have adeployed air bag replaced at a qualified spe-cialist workshop as soon as possible.

G WARNINGA deployed air bag no longer offers any pro-tection and cannot provide the intended pro-tection in an accident. There is an increasedrisk of injury.Have the vehicle towed to a qualified special-ist workshop in order to have a deployed airbag replaced.

For your own safety and that of your frontpassenger, it is important that you havedeployed air bags replaced and faulty air bagsrepaired. This will help to make sure the air bags

46 Occupant safetySafety

continue to perform their protective function forthe vehicle occupants in the event of a crash.

G WARNINGPyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devicesthat have been deployed are no longer opera-tional and are unable to perform their inten-ded protective function. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Therefore, have pyrotechnic Emergency Ten-sioning Devices which have been triggeredimmediately replaced at a qualified specialistworkshop.

An electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE® to trig-ger the tightening of the seat belt in hazardoussituations. This procedure is reversible.If Emergency Tensioning Devices are triggeredor air bags are deployed, you will hear a bang,and a small amount of powder may also bereleased. The 6 restraint system warninglamp lights up.Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hear-ing. The powder that is released generally doesnot constitute a health hazard, but it may causeshort-term breathing difficulties in people withasthma or other respiratory problems. To avoidthis, you may wish to get out of the vehicle oropen the windows as soon as it is safe to do so.Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency TensioningDevices (ETDs) contain perchlorate material,which may require special handling and regardfor the environment. National guidelines mustbe observed during disposal. In California, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.

Method of operationDuring the first stage of a collision, the restraintsystem control unit evaluates important physi-cal data relating to vehicle deceleration or accel-eration, such as:RdurationRdirectionRintensityBased on the evaluation of this data, therestraint system control unit triggers the Emer-gency Tensioning Devices during a frontal orrear collision.

An Emergency Tensioning Device can only betriggered, if:Rthe ignition is switched onRthe components of the restraint system areoperational; see "Restraint system warninglamp" (Y page 35)Rthe belt tongue has engaged in the belt buckleof the respective seat

If the restraint system control unit detects amore severe accident, further components ofthe restraint system are activated independ-ently of each other in certain frontal collisionsituations:RFront air bags as well as driver's and front-passenger knee bagsRSide impact air bag and window curtain airbag, if the system determines that deploy-ment can offer additional protection to thatprovided by the seat belt

The front-passenger front air bag is activated ordeactivated depending on the person on thefront-passenger seat. The front-passenger frontair bag can only deploy in an accident if thePASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is lit.Observe the information on the PASSENGERAIRBAG indicator lamps (Y page 36).Your vehicle has two-stage front air bags. Duringthe first deployment stage, the front air bag isfilled with propellant gas to reduce the risk ofinjuries. The front air bag is fully deployed withthe maximum amount of propellant gas if a sec-ond deployment threshold is reached within afew milliseconds.The activation threshold of the Emergency Ten-sioning Devices and the air bag are determinedby evaluating the rate of vehicle deceleration oracceleration which occurs at various points inthe vehicle. This process is pre-emptive innature. Deployment should take place in goodtime at the start of the collision.The rate of vehicle deceleration or accelerationand the direction of the force are essentiallydetermined by:Rthe distribution of forces during the collisionRthe collision angleRthe deformation characteristics of the vehicleRthe characteristics of the object with whichthe vehicle has collided

Factors which can only be seen and measuredafter a collision has occurred do not play a deci-sive role in the deployment of an air bag, Nor do

Occupant safety 47

Safety

Z

they provide an indication of air bag deploy-ment.The vehicle can be deformed considerably, with-out an air bag being deployed. This is the case ifonly parts which are relatively easily deformedare affected and the rate of deceleration is nothigh. Conversely, air bagsmay be deployed eventhough the vehicle suffers only minor deforma-tion. This is the case if, for example, very rigidvehicle parts such as longitudinal body mem-bers are hit, and sufficient deceleration occursas a result.If the restraint system control unit detects a sideimpact or that the vehicle is rolling over, the rel-evant restraint system components are activa-ted independently of one another depending onthe apparent type of accident. If the systemdetermines a need for additional protection forthe vehicle occupants, the Emergency Tension-ing Devices are triggered.RSide impact air bag on the side of impact,independently of the Emergency TensioningDevice and the use of the seat belt on thedriver's seatThe side impact air bag on the front-passenger side deploys under the followingconditions:- the OCS system detects that the front-passenger seat is occupied or

- the belt tongue is engaged in the beltbuckle of the front-passenger seat

i Not all air bags are deployed in an accident.The different air bag systems work independ-ently of each other.How the air bag system works is determinedby the severity of the accident detected,especially the vehicle deceleration or accel-eration and the apparent type of accident:RFrontal collisionRSide impactRRollover

PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupantprotection system)

IntroductionIn certain hazardous situations, PRE-SAFE®takes pre-emptivemeasures to protect the vehi-cle occupants.

Important safety notes! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell under or behind the seats whenmov-ing the seats back. There is a risk that theseats and/or the objects could be damaged.

Despite your vehicle being equipped with thePRE-SAFE® system, the possibility of personalinjuries occurring as a result of an accident can-not be eliminated. Always adapt your drivingstyle to suit the prevailing road and weatherconditions and maintain a safe distance fromthe vehicle in front. Drive carefully.

FunctionPRE-SAFE® intervenes:Rin emergency braking situations, e.g. whenBAS is activatedRin critical driving situations, e.g. when physi-cal limits are exceeded and the vehicle under-steers or oversteers severelyRon vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS: if adaptiveBrake Assist intervenes powerfully

PRE-SAFE® takes the following measuresdepending on the hazardous situation detected:Rthe seat belts are pre-tensioned.Rif the vehicle skids, the side windows areclosed.Rvehicles with the memory function for thefront-passenger seat: the front-passengerseat is adjusted if it is in an unfavorable posi-tion.

If the hazardous situation passes without result-ing in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackens the beltpre-tensioning. All settings made by PRE-SAFE®can then be reversed.If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced:X Move the seat backrest or seat back slightlywhen the vehicle is stationary.The seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced andthe locking mechanism is released.

The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part ofthe PRE-SAFE® convenience function. Informa-tion about the convenience function can befound under "Belt adjustment" (Y page 39).

48 Occupant safetySafety

Automatic measures after an acci-dentImmediately after an accident, the followingmeasures are implemented, depending on thetype and severity of the impact:Rthe hazard warning lamps are activatedRthe emergency lighting is activatedRthe vehicle doors are unlockedRthe front side windows are loweredRthe engine is switched offRvehicles with mbrace: automatic emer-gency call

Children in the vehicle

Important safety notesIf a child younger than 12 years and under 5 ft(1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle:Ralways secure the child in a child restraintsystem suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.The child restraint system must be appropri-ate to the age, weight and size of the childRbe sure to observe the instructions and safetynotes in this section in addition to the childrestraint system manufacturer's installationinstructionsRbe sure to observe the instructions and safetynotes on the "Occupant classification system(OCS)" (Y page 42)

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion, for example by:Rreleasing the parking brakeRshifting the transmission to the neutralpositionRstarting the engineIn addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is subjected todirect sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-dren may burn themselves on these parts,particularly on the metal parts of the childrestraint system. There is a risk of injury.If you leave the vehicle, taking the child withyou, always ensure that the child restraintsystem is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-tect it with a blanket, for example. If the childrestraint system has been exposed to directsunlight, let it cool down before securing thechild in it. Never leave children unattended inthe vehicle.

Always ensure that all vehicle occupants havetheir seat belts fastened correctly and are sittingproperly. Particular attention must be paid tochildren.Observe the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 37) and the information on the correctuse of the seat belt (Y page 38).A booster seat may be necessary to achieveproper seat belt positioning for children over41 lbs (18 kg) or until they reach a height wherea lap/shoulder belt can be fastened properlywithout a booster seat.

Special seat belt retractor

G WARNINGIf the seat belt is released while driving, thechild restraint system will no longer besecured properly. The special seat belt retrac-tor is disabled and the inertia real draws in aportion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannotbe immediately refastened. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten-tion to road and traffic conditions. Reactivate

Children in the vehicle 49

Safety

Z

the special seat belt retractor and secure thechild restraint system properly.

The seat belt on the front-passenger side isequipped with a special seat belt retractor.When activated, the special seat belt retractorensures that the seat belt will not slacken oncethe child restraint system has been secured.Installing a child restraint system:X Always comply with the child restraint systemmanufacturer's installation instructions.

X Pull the seat belt smoothly out of the seat beltguide.

X Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt buckle.Activating the special seat belt retractor:X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertiareel retract it again.While the seat belt is retracting, you shouldhear a ratcheting sound. The special seat beltretractor is activated.

X Push the child seat restraint system down sothat the seat belt is tight and does not loosen.

Removing a child restraint system/deactivatingthe special seat belt retractor:X Always comply with the child restraint systemmanufacturer's installation instructions.

X Press the belt buckle release button andguide the belt tongue to the seat belt guide.The special seat belt retractor is deactivated.

Child restraint systemThe use of seat belts and child restraint systemsis required by law in:Rall 50 statesRthe U.S. territoriesRthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provincesYou can obtain further information about thecorrect child restraint system from any author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is installed incor-rectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect asintended. The child cannot then be restrainedin the event of an accident, heavy braking or

sudden changes of direction. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Make sure that you observe the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installation instruc-tions and the notes on use. Please ensure,that the base of the child restraint system isalways resting completely on the seat cush-ion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, underor behind the child restraint system. Only usechild restraint systems with the original coverdesigned for them. Only replace damagedcovers with genuine covers.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is installed incor-rectly or is not secured, it can come loose inthe event of an accident, heavy braking or asudden change in direction. The childrestraint system could be thrown about, strik-ing vehicle occupants. There is an increasedrisk of injury, possibly even fatal.Always install child restraint systems prop-erly, even if they are not being used. Makesure that you observe the child restraint sys-tem manufacturer's installation instructions.

You will find further information on stowingobjects, luggage or loads under "Loading guide-lines" (Y page 209).

G WARNINGChild restraint systems or their securing sys-tems which have been damaged or subjectedto a load in an accident can no longer protectas intended. The child cannot then berestrained in the event of an accident, heavybraking or sudden changes of direction. Thereis an increased risk of injury, possibly evenfatal.Replace child restraint systems which havebeen damaged or subjected to a load in anaccident as soon as possible. Have the secur-ing systems on the child restraint systemchecked at a qualified specialist workshop,before you install a child restraint systemagain.

50 Children in the vehicleSafety

The securing systemof child restraint systems isthe seat belt system.If you install a child restraint system on thefront-passenger seat, be sure to observe theinstructions and safety notes on the "OccupantClassification System (OCS)" (Y page 42). Thereyouwill also find information on deactivating thefront-passenger front air bag.All child restraint systems must meet the fol-lowing standards:RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards213 and 225RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards213 and 210.2

Confirmation that the child restraint system cor-responds to the standards can be found on aninstruction label on the child restraint system.This confirmation can also be found in the instal-lation instructions that are included with thechild restraint system.Observe the warning labels in the vehicle inte-rior and on the child restraint system.

Child restraint system on the front-passenger seat

General notesIf you secure a child in a child restraint systemon the front-passenger seat, be sure to observethe instructions and safety notes on the "Occu-pant Classification System (OCS)" (Y page 42).You can thus avoid the risks that could arise asa result of:Ran incorrectly categorized person in the front-passenger seatRthe unintentional deactivation of the front-passenger front air bagRthe unsuitable positioning of the childrestraint system, e.g. too close to the dash-board

Rearward-facing child restraint systemIf it is absolutely necessary to install a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, always make sure that thefront-passenger front air bag is deactivated.Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp is permanently lit (Y page 36) is the front-passenger front air bag deactivated.

Always observe the child restraint system man-ufacturer's installation and operating instruc-tions.

Forward-facing child restraint systemIf you secure a child in a forward-facing childrestraint system on the front-passenger seat,always move the front-passenger seat as farback as possible. The entire base of the childrestraint system must always rest on the seatcushion of the front-passenger seat; the rearside must, as far as possible, be resting on thebackrest of the front-passenger seat. The childrestraint system must not touch the roof or besubjected to a load by the head restraint. Adjustthe angle of the seat backrest and the headrestraint position accordingly. Always makesure that the shoulder belt strap is correctlyrouted from the front-passenger seat belt loopto the shoulder belt guide on the child restraintsystem. The shoulder belt strap must be routedforwards and downwards from the front-passenger seat belt loop.Always observe the child restraint system man-ufacturer's installation and operating instruc-tions.

Pets in the vehicle

G WARNINGIf you leave animals unattended or unsecuredin the vehicle, they could press buttons orswitches, for example.As a result, they could:Ractivate vehicle equipment and becometrapped, for exampleRactivate or deactivate systems, therebyendangering other road users

Unsecured animals could also be flung aroundthe vehicle in the event of an accident or sud-den steering or braking, thereby injuring vehi-cle occupants. There is a risk of an accidentand injury.Never leave animals unattended in the vehi-cle. Always secure animals properly duringthe journey, e.g. use a suitable animal trans-port box.

Children in the vehicle 51

Safety

Z

Driving safety systems

Overview of driving safety systemsIn this section, you will find information aboutthe following driving safety systems:RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)(Y page 52)RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 52)RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS(Y page 53)RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)(Y page 55)REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)(Y page 57)RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 58)

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style or if you areinattentive, the driving safety systems can nei-ther reduce the risk of an accident nor overridethe laws of physics. Driving safety systems aremerely aids designed to assist driving. You areresponsible for maintaining the distance to thevehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking ingood time, and for staying in lane. Always adaptyour driving style to suit the prevailing road andweather conditions andmaintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front. Drive carefully.The driving safety systems described only workas effectively as possible when there is ade-quate contact between the tires and the roadsurface. Please pay special attention to thenotes on tires, recommended minimum tiretread depths, etc. (Y page 254).In wintry driving conditions, always use wintertires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow chains.Only in this way will the driving safety systemsdescribed in this section work as effectively aspossible.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

General informationABS regulates brake pressure in such a way thatthe wheels do not lock when you brake. Thisallows you to continue steering the vehiclewhenbraking.

The ! ABS warning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up when the ignition is switchedon. It goes out when the engine is running.ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph(8 km/h), regardless of road-surface conditions.ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when youonly brake gently.

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 52).

G WARNINGIf ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock whenbraking. The steerability and braking charac-teristics may be severely impaired. Addition-ally, further driving safety systems are deac-tivated. There is an increased danger of skid-ding and accidents.Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme-diately at a qualified specialist workshop.

When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,including driving safety systems, will alsobecome inoperative. Observe the informationon the ABS warning lamp (Y page 192) and dis-play messages which may be shown in theinstrument cluster (Y page 167).

BrakesX If ABS intervenes: continue to depress thebrake pedal vigorously until the braking sit-uation is over.

X To make a full brake application: depressthe brake pedal with full force.

If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel apulsing in the brake pedal.The pulsating brake pedal can be an indicationof hazardous road conditions, and functions as areminder to take extra care while driving.

BAS (Brake Assist System)

General informationBAS operates in emergency braking situations.If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BASautomatically boosts the braking force, thusshortening the stopping distance.

52 Driving safety systemsSafety

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 52).

G WARNINGIf BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distancein an emergency braking situation isincreased. There is a risk of an accident.In an emergency braking situation, depressthe brake pedal with full force. ABS preventsthe wheels from locking.

BrakingX Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed untilthe emergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will function as usual once yourelease the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS

General informationi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 52).

COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS consistsof a distance warning function with an autono-mous braking function and adaptive BrakeAssist.COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS can helpyou to minimize the risk of a front-end collisionwith a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects ofsuch a collision.If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUSdetects that there is a risk of a collision, you willbewarned visually and acoustically. If you do notreact to the visual and audible collision warning,autonomous braking can be initiated in criticalsituations. If you apply the brake yourself in acritical situation, the COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS adaptive Brake Assist assists you.

Important safety notesIn particular, the detection of obstacles can beimpaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is snow or heavy rainRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, for exam-ple in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle traveling in front on a different lineRnew vehicles or after a service on the COLLI-SION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS systemObserve the important safety notes in the"Breaking-in notes" section (Y page 101).

Following damage to the front end of the vehicle,have the configuration and operation of theradar sensor checked at a qualified specialistworkshop. This also applies to collisions at slowspeeds where there is no visible damage to thefront of the vehicle.

Switching on/offThe COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS isautomatically active after switching on the igni-tion.You can activate or deactivate COLLISION PRE-VENTION ASSIST PLUS in the on-board com-puter (Y page 160). When deactivated, the dis-tance warning function and the autonomousbraking function are also deactivated.If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS isdeactivated, theæ symbol appears in theassistance graphics display.

Distance warning function

General informationThe distance warning function can help you tominimize the risk of a front-end collision with avehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such acollision. If the distance warning functiondetects that there is a risk of a collision, you willbe warned visually and acoustically.

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion for driving safety systems (Y page 52).

Driving safety systems 53

Safety

Z

G WARNINGThe distance warning function does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringThus, the distance warning function cannotprovide a warning in all critical situations.There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

G WARNINGThe distance warning function cannot alwaysclearly identify objects and complex trafficsituations.In such cases, the distance warning functionmay:Rgive an unnecessary warningRnot give a warningThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and do not rely solely on the distancewarning function.

FunctionStarting at a speed of approximately 4 mph(7 km/h), the distance warning function warnsyou if you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. Anintermittent warning tone will then sound, andthe· distance warning lamp will light up inthe instrument cluster.X Brake immediately in order to increase thedistance from the vehicle in front.

orX Take evasive action, provided it is safe to doso.

Due to the nature of the system, particularlycomplicated but non-critical driving conditionsmay also cause the system to display a warning.With the help of the radar sensor system, thedistance warning function can detect obstaclesthat are in the path of your vehicle for an exten-ded period of time.Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph(70 km/h), the distance warning function can

also react to stationary obstacles, such as stop-ped or parked vehicles.

Autonomous braking functionIf the driver does not react to the distance warn-ing signal in a critical situation, COLLISION PRE-VENTION ASSIST PLUS can assist with theautonomous braking function.The autonomous braking function:Rgives the driver more time to react to criticaldriving situationsRcan help the driver to avoid an accident orRreduces the effects of an accidentVehicles without DISTRONIC PLUS: theautonomous braking function is available in thefollowing speed ranges:Rfrom 4 mph (7 km/h) to approx. 65 mph(105 km/h) for moving objectsRfrom 4 mph (7 km/h) to approx. 31 mph(50 km/h) for stationary objects

Vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS: the autono-mous braking function is available in the follow-ing speed ranges:Rfrom 4 mph (7 km/h) to approximately124 mph (200 km/h) for moving objectsRfrom 4 mph (7 km/h) to approximately31 mph (50 km/h) for stationary objects

Due to the nature of the system, particularlycomplicated but non-critical driving conditionsmay also cause the Autonomous Braking Func-tion to intervene.If the autonomous braking function requires aparticularly high braking force, preventativepassenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®)are activated simultaneously (Y page 48).

Adaptive Brake Assist

General informationi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 52).

With the help of adaptive Brake Assist, the dis-tance warning signal can detect obstacles thatare in the path of your vehicle for an extendedperiod of time.If adaptive Brake Assist detects a risk of colli-sion with the vehicle in front, it calculates thebraking force necessary to avoid a collision. Ifyou apply the brakes forcefully, adaptive Brake

54 Driving safety systemsSafety

Assist will automatically increase the brakingforce to a level suitable for the traffic conditions.Adaptive Brake Assist provides braking assis-tance in hazardous situations at speeds above4mph (7 km/h). It uses radar sensor technologyto assess the traffic situation.Up to a speed of approximately 155 mph(250 km/h), Adaptive Brake Assist is capable ofreacting to moving objects that have alreadybeen detected as such at least once over theperiod of observation.Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph(70 km/h), Adaptive Brake Assist reacts to sta-tionary obstacles.If adaptive Brake Assist demands particularlyhigh braking force, preventative passenger pro-tection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activatedsimultaneously (Y page 48).X Keep the brake pedal depressed until theemergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will work normally again if:Ryou release the brake pedal.Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision.Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehi-cle.

Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated.

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion for driving safety systems (Y page 52).

G WARNINGAdaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearlyidentify objects and complex traffic situa-tions.In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist can:Rintervene unnecessarilyRnot interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake. Terminate theintervention in a non-critical driving situation.

G WARNINGAdaptive Brake Assist does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringAs a result, the Adaptive Brake Assist may notintervene in all critical conditions. There is arisk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

Due to the nature of the system, particularlycomplicated but non-critical driving conditionsmay also cause Adaptive Brake Assist to inter-vene.If adaptive Brake Assist is not available due to amalfunction in the radar sensor system, thebrake system remains available with full brakeboosting effect and BAS.

ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

General notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 52).

ESP® monitors driving stability and traction, i.e.power transmission between the tires and theroad surface.If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating fromthe direction desired by the driver, one or morewheels are braked to stabilize the vehicle. Theengine output is also modified to keep the vehi-cle on the desired course within physical limits.ESP® assists the driver when pulling away onwet or slippery roads. ESP® can also stabilizethe vehicle during braking.

ETS (Electronic Traction System)i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 52).

ETS traction control is part of ESP®.Traction control brakes the drive wheels indi-vidually if they spin. This enables you to pullaway and accelerate on slippery surfaces, forexample if the road surface is slippery on one

Driving safety systems 55

Safety

Z

side. In addition, more drive torque is transfer-red to the wheel or wheels with traction.Traction control remains active, even if youdeactivate ESP®.

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 52).

G WARNINGIf ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable tostabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driv-ing safety systems are deactivated. Thisincreases the risk of skidding and an accident.Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at aqualified specialist workshop.

ESP® is only deactivated if the å warninglamp is lit continuously.When SPORT handling mode is activated, theM warning lamp lights up in the instrumentpanel.When theå andhwarning lamps light upcontinuously, ESP® is not available due to amal-function.Observe the information on warning lamps(Y page 192) and display messages which maybe shown in the instrument cluster(Y page 167).Only use wheels with the recommended tiresizes. Only then will ESP® function properly.

Characteristics of ESP®

General informationIf the ÷ ESP® warning lamp goes out beforebeginning the journey, ESP® is automaticallyactive.If ESP® intervenes, the÷ ESP®warning lampflashes in the instrument cluster.If ESP® intervenes:X Do not deactivate ESP® under any circum-stances.

X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far asnecessary when pulling away.

X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailingroad and weather conditions.

ECO start/stop functionThe ECO start/stop function switches theengine off automatically when the vehicle stopsmoving. The engine starts automatically whenthe driver wants to pull away again. ESP®remains in its previously selected status. Exam-ple: if ESP® was deactivated before the enginewas switched off, ESP® remains deactivatedwhen the engine is switched on again.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 52).

You can select between the following states ofESP®:RESP® is activated.RSPORT handling mode is activated.RESP® is deactivated.

G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased riskof skidding and an accident.Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-bed in the following.

G WARNINGWhen SPORT handling mode is activated,there is a greater risk of skidding and acci-dents.Only activate SPORT handling mode in the sit-uations described in the following.

In the following situations, it may be better toactivate SPORT handling mode or deactivateESP®:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravelRon closed roads when the vehicle's own over-steering and understeering characteristicsare desired

Driving in SPORT handling mode or withoutESP® requires an extremely qualified and expe-rienced driver.

56 Driving safety systemsSafety

Activate ESP® as soon as the situations descri-bed above no longer apply. ESP® will otherwisenot be able to stabilize the vehicle if the vehiclestarts to skid or a wheel starts to spin.

! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for anextended period with ESP® deactivated. Youcould otherwise damage the drivetrain.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

X To activate SPORT handling mode: brieflypress button:.TheM handling mode warning lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up. The SPORT han‐dling mode message appears in the multi-function display.

X To deactivate SPORT handling mode:briefly press button:.TheM handling mode warning lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out. ESP® is activa-ted.

X To deactivate ESP®: press button:.The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up. The ÷ OFFmessage appears in themultifunction display.

X To activate ESP®: when SPORT handlingmode is activated or ESP® is deactivated,press button:.The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out. The ÷ ONmessage appears in themultifunction display.

Characteristics of activated SPORT han-dling modeIf SPORT handling mode is activated and one ormore wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warn-ing lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. ESP®only stabilizes the vehicle to a limited degree.

When SPORT handling mode is activated:RESP® only improves driving stability to a limi-ted degree.RTraction control is still activated.REngine torque is no longer limited and thedrive wheels are able to spin.The spinning of the wheels results in a cuttingaction for better traction on loose surfaces.RESP® still provides support when you brakefirmly.

Characteristics when ESP® is deactivatedIf ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheelsstart to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in theinstrument cluster flashes. In such situations,ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.If you deactivate ESP®:RESP® no longer improves driving stability.REngine torque is no longer limited and thedrive wheels are able to spin.The spinning of the wheels results in a cuttingaction for better traction on loose surfaces.RTraction control is still activated.RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is no longeravailable, nor is it activated if you brake firmlywith assistance from ESP.RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available, nor is itactivated if you brake firmly and ESP® inter-venes.RESP® still provides support when you brakefirmly.

EBD (electronic brake force distribu-tion)

General informationEBD monitors and controls the brake pressureon the rear wheels to improve driving stabilitywhile braking.

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 52).

Driving safety systems 57

Safety

Z

G WARNINGIf EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels canlock, e.g. under full braking. This increases therisk of skidding and an accident.You should therefore adapt your driving styleto the different handling characteristics. Havethe brake system checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Observe information regarding indicator andwarning lamps (Y page 192) as well as displaymessages (Y page 169).

ADAPTIVE BRAKEADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety andoffers increased braking comfort. In addition tothe braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also fea-tures the hill start assist function (Y page 104).

Protection against theft

ImmobilizerThe immobilizer prevents your vehicle frombeing started without the correct SmartKey.X To activate with KEYLESS-GO start-func-tion or KEYLESS-GO: switch the ignition offand open the driver's door.

X To activate with the SmartKey: remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock.

X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Anyonecan start the engine if a valid SmartKey has beenleft inside the vehicle.

i The immobilizer is always deactivated whenyou start the engine.In the event that the engine cannot be started(yet the vehicle's battery is charged), the sys-tem is not operational. Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center or call1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

ATA (anti-theft alarm system)

X To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey orKEYLESS-GO.Indicator lamp: flashes. The alarm systemis armed after approximately 15 seconds.

X To disarm: unlock the vehicle with the Smart-Key or KEYLESS-GO.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.A visual and audible alarm is triggered if thealarm system is armed and you open:Ra doorRthe vehicle with the mechanical keyRthe tailgateRthe hoodX To turn the alarm off with the SmartKey:press the% or& button on the Smart-Key.The alarm is switched off.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.The alarm is switched off.

X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:grasp the outside door handle. The SmartKeymust be outside the vehicle.The alarm is switched off.

orX Press the Start/Stop button. The SmartKeymust be inside the vehicle.The alarm is switched off.

The alarm is not switched off, even if you closethe open door that triggered it, for example.

i If the alarm continues for more than30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call sys-tem automatically notifies the CustomerAssistance Center. This is done either by textmessage or data connection.

58 Protection against theftSafety

The emergency call system sends a messageor establishes a data connection providedthat:Ryou have subscribed to thembrace service.Rthe mbrace service has been activatedproperly.Rthe necessary mobile phone network isavailable.

Protection against theft 59

Safety

Z

SmartKey

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGIf you attach heavy or large objects to theSmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten-tionally turned in the ignition lock. This couldcause the engine to be switched off. There is arisk of an accident.Do not attach any heavy or large objects to theSmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings beforeinserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

! Keep the SmartKey away from strong mag-netic fields. Otherwise, the remote controlfunction could be affected.Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicin-ity of powerful electrical installations.

Do not keep the SmartKey:Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phoneor another SmartKey.Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil.Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case.This can affect the functionality of the Smart-Key.

VehicleswithKEYLESS-GO start function: donot keep the SmartKey on the cargo compart-ment cover or in the cargo compartment. Oth-erwise, the SmartKey may not be detected, e.g.when starting the engine using the Start/Stopbutton.A check which periodically establishes a radioconnection between the vehicle and the Smart-Key determines whether a valid SmartKey is inthe vehicle. This occurs, for example:Rwhen starting the engineRwhilst drivingRwhen using HANDS-FREE ACCESSRwhen the external door handles are touchedRduring convenience closing

SmartKey functions

: & To lock the vehicle; F To open the tailgate= % To unlock the vehicleX To unlock centrally: press the% button.If you do not open the vehicle within approx-imately 40 seconds of unlocking:Rthe vehicle is locked again.Rthe anti-theft alarm system is armed again.

X To lock centrally: press the& button.The key centrally locks and unlocks the doorsand the fuel filler flap.When unlocking, the turn signals flash once.When locking, they flash three times.You can also set an audible signal to confirmthat the vehicle has been locked. The audiblesignal can be activated and deactivated via themultimedia system (see the Digital Operator'sManual).

60 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

When the locator lighting is activated via themultimedia system, it lights up when it is darkafter the vehicle is unlocked with the SmartKey.Information on activating and deactivating thelocator lighting can be found in the Digital Oper-ator's Manual.X To open the tailgate: press and hold theF button until the tailgate opens.

KEYLESS-GO

General notesBear in mind that the engine can be started byany of the vehicle occupants if there is a Smart-Key in the vehicle (Y page 104).

Locking/unlocking centrallyYou can start, lock or unlock the vehicle usingKEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry theSmartKey with you. You can combine the func-tions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a conven-tional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle by usingKEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it using the& button on the SmartKey.The driver's door and the door at which the han-dle is used, must both be closed. The SmartKeymust be outside the vehicle. When locking orunlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the distancebetween the SmartKey and the correspondingdoor handle must not be greater than 3 ft (1 m).A check which periodically establishes a radioconnection between the vehicle and the Smart-Key determines whether a valid SmartKey is inthe vehicle. This occurs, for example:Rwhen starting the engineRwhile drivingRwhen using HANDS-FREE ACCESSRwhen the external door handles are touchedRduring convenience closing

X To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner sur-face of the door handle.

X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface:or;.Make sure that you do not touch the innersurface of the door handle.

X Convenience closing feature: touchrecessed sensor surface; for an extendedperiod.Further information on the convenience clos-ing feature (Y page 72).

Deactivating and activatingIf you do not intend to use the vehicle for a lon-ger period of time, you can deactivate KEYLESS-GO. The SmartKeywill then use very little power,thereby conserving battery power. For the pur-poses of activation/deactivation, the vehiclemust not be nearby.X To deactivate: press the& button on theSmartKey twice in rapid succession.The battery check lamp of the SmartKeyflashes twice briefly and lights up once, thenKEYLESS-GO is deactivated (Y page 63).

X To activate: press any button on the Smart-Key.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.KEYLESS-GO and all of its associated featuresare available again.

KEYLESS-GO start function

General notesBear in mind that the engine can be started byany of the vehicle occupants if there is a Smart-Key in the vehicle (Y page 104).

SmartKey 61

Openingandclosing

Z

Changing the settings of the lockingsystemYou can change the settings of the locking sys-tem. This means that only the driver's door andthe fuel filler flap are unlocked when the vehicleis unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travelon your own.X To change the setting: press and hold downthe% and& buttons simultaneouslyfor about six seconds until the battery indica-tor lamp flashes twice (Y page 63).

If the setting of the locking system is changedwithin the signal range of the vehicle, pressingthe& or% button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicleThe SmartKey now functions as follows:X To unlock: press the% button once.X To unlock centrally: press the% buttontwice.

X To lock: press the& button.

The KEYLESS-GO functions can be changed asfollows:X To unlock the driver's door: touch the innersurface of the door handle on the driver'sdoor.

X To unlock centrally: touch the inner surfaceof the front-passenger door handle.

X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensorsurface on one of the door handles.

X To restore the factory settings: press andhold down the% and& buttons simul-taneously for approximately six seconds untilthe battery check lamp flashes twice(Y page 63).

Mechanical key

General notesIf the vehicle can no longer be locked orunlocked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO,use the mechanical key.If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm sys-tem will be triggered. Switch off the alarm(Y page 58).

If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanicalkey, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked auto-matically.X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert theSmartKey into the ignition lock.

Removing the mechanical key

X Push release catch: in the direction of thearrow and at the same time remove mechan-ical key; from the SmartKey.

For further information about:Runlocking the driver's door (Y page 68)Rlocking the vehicle (Y page 68)

Inserting the mechanical keyX Push mechanical key; completely into theSmartKey until it engages and releasecatch: is back in its basic position.

SmartKey battery

Important safety notes

G WARNINGBatteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result insevere health problems. There is a risk of fatalinjury.Keep batteries out of the reach of children. Ifa battery is swallowed, seekmedical attentionimmediately.

62 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

H Environmental noteBatteries contain dangeroussubstances. It is against thelaw to dispose of them withthe household rubbish. Theymust be collected separatelyand recycled to protect theenvironment.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally friendlymanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualified spe-cialist workshop or a specialcollection point for used bat-teries.

The SmartKey batteries contain perchloratematerial, which may require special handlingand regard for the environment. National guide-lines must be observed during disposal. In Cal-ifornia, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have thebatteries replaced at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Checking the battery

X Press the& or% button.The battery is working properly if batterycheck lamp: lights up briefly.The battery is discharged if battery checklamp: does not light up briefly.

X Change the battery (Y page 63).

If the SmartKey battery is checked within thesignal reception range of the vehicle, pressingthe& or% button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicle

i You can get a battery at any qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Replacing the batteryYou require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey(Y page 62).

X Press mechanical key; into the SmartKeyopening in the direction of the arrow until bat-tery compartment cover: opens. Do nothold battery compartment cover: closedwhile doing so.

X Remove battery compartment cover:.

X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against yourpalm until battery= falls out.

X Insert the new battery with the positive ter-minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth todo so.

X Make sure that the surface of the battery isfree of lint, grease and other contaminants.

SmartKey 63

Openingandclosing

Z

X Insert the front tabs of battery compartmentcover: into the housing first and then pressto close it.

X Insert mechanical key; into the SmartKey(Y page 62).

X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons onthe vehicle.

64 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

Problems with the SmartKey

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

You can no longer lock orunlock the vehicle usingthe SmartKey.

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 63) and replace it if necessary(Y page 63).

If this does not work:X Unlock (Y page 68) or lock (Y page 68) the vehicle using themechanical key.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Unlock (Y page 68) or lock (Y page 68) the vehicle using themechanical key.

The SmartKey is faulty.X Unlock (Y page 68) or lock (Y page 68) the vehicle using themechanical key.

X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

You can no longer lock orunlock the vehicle usingKEYLESS-GO.

KEYLESS-GO was deactivated.X Reactivate KEYLESS-GO (Y page 61).

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 63) and replace it if necessary(Y page 63).

If this does not work:X Unlock (Y page 68) or lock (Y page 68) the vehicle using themechanical key.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Unlock (Y page 68) or lock (Y page 68) the vehicle using themechanical key.

KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning.X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of theSmartKey.

X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote con-trol function:X Unlock (Y page 68) or lock (Y page 68) the vehicle using themechanical key.

X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

SmartKey 65

Openingandclosing

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The engine cannot bestarted using the Smart-Key.

the on-board voltage is too low.X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interiorlighting, and try to start the engine again.

If this does not work:X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 247).orX Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 248).orX Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine cannot bestarted using the Start/Stop button. The Smart-Key is in the vehicle.

The vehicle is locked.X Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again.

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 63) and replace it if necessary(Y page 63).

If this does not work:X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

You have lost a Smart-Key.

X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

You have lost themechanical key.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

Doors

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.

Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

When a door is opened, the side window on thatside opens slightly. When the door is closed, theside window closes again.

66 DoorsOp

eningandclosing

! The side windows will not open/close if thebattery is discharged or if the side windowshave iced up. It will then not be possible toclose the door. Do not attempt to force thedoor closed. You could otherwise damage thedoor or the side window.

Unlocking and opening doors fromthe insideYou can open a door from inside the vehicleeven if it has been locked. If the vehicle has beenlocked with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO,opening a door from the inside will trigger theanti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm(Y page 58).

X Pull door handle;.If the door is locked, locking knob: pops up.The door is unlocked and opens.

Centrally locking and unlocking thevehicle from the insideYou can centrally lock and unlock the vehiclefrom the inside. The switches are on the driver’sdoor.

X To unlock: press button:.X To lock: press button;.If the front-passenger door is closed, the vehi-cle locks.

Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not be lockedor unlocked.You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from theinside if the vehicle has been locked with theSmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.The doors can be opened from the inside.If the vehicle has been lockedwith the SmartKeyor with KEYLESS-GO, opening a door from theinside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.Switch off the alarm (Y page 58).If a locked door is opened from the inside, theprevious unlock status of the vehicle will betaken into consideration if:Rthe vehicle was locked using the locking but-ton for the central locking, orRif the vehicle was locked automaticallyThe vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previ-ously been fully unlocked. If only the driver'sdoor had been previously unlocked, only thedoor which has been opened from the inside isunlocked.

Automatic locking feature

X To deactivate: press and hold button: forapproximately five seconds until a tonesounds.

X To activate: press and hold button; forapproximately five seconds until a tonesounds.

If you press one of the two buttons and do nothear a tone, the relevant setting has alreadybeen selected.

Doors 67

Openingandclosing

Z

The vehicle is locked automatically when theignition is switched on and the wheels are turn-ing.You could therefore be locked out if:Rthe vehicle is being pushed.Rthe vehicle is being towed.Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer.

i You can activate and deactivate the auto-matic locking mechanism via the multimediasystem (see the Digital Operator's Manual).

Unlocking/locking the driver's doorusing the mechanical keyi If youwant to centrally lock the vehicle usingthe mechanical key, begin by pressing thelocking button for the interior locking mech-anism while the driver's door is open. Thenlock the driver's door using the mechanicalkey.

X Insert the mechanical key as far as it will gointo opening: in the protective cap.

X Pull and hold the door handle.X Pull the protective cap on the mechanical keyas straight as possible away from the vehicleuntil it releases.

X Release the door handle.

X To unlock: turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise as far as it will go to position1.

X To lock: turn themechanical key clockwise asfar as it will go to position1.

If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm sys-tem will be triggered. Switch off the alarm(Y page 58).

Cargo compartment

Important safety notes

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbonmonoxide. If the tailgateis open when the engine is running, particu-larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumescould enter the passenger compartment.There is a risk of poisoning.Turn off the engine before opening the tail-gate. Never drive with the tailgate open.

G WARNINGIf objects, luggage or loads are not secured ornot secured sufficiently, they could slip, tipover or be flung around and thereby hit vehicleoccupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-den change in direction.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping before thejourney.

68 Cargo compartmentOp

eningandclosing

! The tailgate swings upwards and out whenopening. Therefore, make sure that there issufficient space above the tailgate.

The opening dimensions of the tailgate can befound in the "Vehicle data" section(Y page 286).If the rear spoiler has been extended manuallythe height when opened is higher by thisamount. If in doubt, retract the rear spoiler againmanually before opening the tailgate(Y page 222).You can switch the cargo compartment lamp onand off manually on the overhead control panel(Y page 89).Do not leave the SmartKey in the cargo com-partment. You could otherwise lock yourselfout.You should preferably place luggage or loads inthe cargo compartment. Observe the loadingguidelines (Y page 209).

Opening/closing from outside

Opening

X Press theF button on the SmartKey.The tailgate opens slightly.

X Raise the tailgate.

Closing

X Pull the tailgate down using recess: and letit drop into the lock.

X Lock the vehicle if necessary with the&button on the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO(Y page 61).

Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe vehicle's exhaust systemmay be very hot.If you unlock the cargo compartment withKEYLESS-GO, you could burn yourself bytouching the exhaust system. There is a risk ofinjury. Always ensure that you only make thekicking movement within the detection rangeof sensors.

! If the SmartKey is within the rear detectionrange of KEYLESS-GO, the following situa-tions, for example, could lead to the uninten-tional opening of the tailgate:Rusing a car washRusing a power washerMake sure that the SmartKey is at least 10 ft(3 m) away from the vehicle.

General notesVehicles with KEYLESS-GO without carbonpackage: you can unlock the tailgate withoutusing your hands. This is useful if you have yourhands full. To do this, make a kicking movementunder the rear bumper with your foot.

Cargo compartment 69

Openingandclosing

Z

Observe the following points:RCarry your KEYLESS-GO key about your per-son. The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the reardetection range of the vehicle.RWhen making the kicking movement, makesure that you are standing firmly on theground and that there is sufficient clearanceto the rear of the vehicle. You could otherwiselose your balance e.g. on ice.

RAlways ensure that you only make the kickingmovement within the detection range of sen-sors:.RStand at least 12 in (30 cm) away from therear area while doing so.RDo not come into contact with the bumperwhile making the kicking movement. Other-wise, the sensors may not function correctly.RUnlocking with KEYLESS-GO does not func-tion when the engine is started.RDirt caused by road salt around sensors:may restrict functionality.Using the HANDS-FREE ACCESS with a pros-thetic leg may restrict functionality.RIf a KEYLESS-GO key is within the rear detec-tion range of KEYLESS-GO, the sensors couldbe triggered. Therefore, the tailgate cannot beunlocked unintentionally if, for example, you:- sit on the edge of the cargo compartment.- set something down or lift something upbehind the vehicle.

- polish the rear of the vehicle.Do not carry the KEYLESS-GO key about yourperson in these situations or in situations sim-ilar to these. This prevents the tailgate frombeing unlocked unintentionally.

Operation

X To unlock: kick into sensor detectionrange: below the bumper with your foot.The tailgate opens slightly.

X To open: raise the tailgate.X If the tailgate does not unlock after sev-eral attempts:wait at least ten seconds andthen kick under the bumper once again.

If you hold your foot under the bumper for toolong, the tailgate does not unlock. Repeat theleg movement more quickly if this occurs.

Unlocking from inside the vehicle

Important safety notes

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbonmonoxide. If the tailgateis open when the engine is running, particu-larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumescould enter the passenger compartment.There is a risk of poisoning.Turn off the engine before opening the tail-gate. Never drive with the tailgate open.

70 Cargo compartmentOp

eningandclosing

You can open the tailgate from the driver's seatwhen the vehicle is stationary and unlocked.X Press remote operating switch: for the tail-gate until the tailgate is unlocked.The tailgate opens slightly.

Tailgate emergency releaseUse the emergency release if the tailgate can nolonger be unlocked:Rusing the SmartKeyRusing HANDS-FREE ACCESSRusing the remote operating switch on theinstrument panel

X Climb into the cargo compartment via thevehicle interior.Unhook the cargo compartment cover, if nec-essary (Y page 211).

X Push carpet: down.X Pull the cable behind the carpet: until thetailgate unlocks.The tailgate opens slightly.

X Raise the tailgate.When you close the tailgate, it is also locked atthe same time.

Side windows

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhile opening the side windows, body partscould become trapped between the side win-dow and the door frame as the side windowmoves. There is a risk of injury.

Make sure that nobody touches the side win-dow during the opening procedure. If some-body becomes trapped, release the switch orpull the switch to close the sidewindow again.

G WARNINGWhile closing the side windows, body parts inthe closing area could become trapped. Thereis a risk of injury.When closing make sure that no parts of thebody are in the closing area. If somebodybecomes trapped, release the switch or pressthe switch to open the side window again.

G WARNINGIf children operate the side windows theycould become trapped, particularly if they areleft unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

Side windows reversing featureThe side windows are equipped with an auto-matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocksor restricts a side window from travelingupwards during the automatic closing process,the sidewindowopens again automatically. Dur-ing themanual closing process, the side windowonly opens again automatically after the corre-sponding switch is released. The automaticreversing feature is only an aid and does notrelieve you of the responsibility of paying atten-tion when closing a side window.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-gersRwhile resettingThis means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in these sit-uations. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure. If

Side windows 71

Openingandclosing

Z

someone becomes trapped, press the switchto open the side window again.

Opening and closing the side win-dowsThe switches for all side windows are located onthe driver's door. There is also a switch on thefront-passenger door for the corresponding sidewindow.The switch on the driver's door has priority.

: Left; RightX Switch on the power supply or switch on theignition with the Start/Stop button.

X To open manually: press and hold the cor-responding switch.

X To open fully: press the switch beyond thepoint of resistance and release it.Automatic operation is started.

X To close manually: pull the correspondingswitch and hold it.

X To close fully: pull the switch beyond thepoint of resistance and release it.Automatic operation is started.

X To interrupt automatic operation: press/pull the corresponding switch again.

If you press the switch beyond the point ofresistance and release, automatic operation isstarted in the corresponding direction. You canstop automatic operation by pressing/pullingthe switch again.You can still operate the side windowswhen youswitch off the power supply or the ignition. Thisfunction remains active for five minutes or untilyou open a door.

Convenience opening

General notesYou can ventilate the vehicle before you startdriving.If the SmartKey is in close proximity to the vehi-cle, the convenience opening function is availa-ble.To do so, open the side windows using theSmartKey.The "convenience opening" feature is also avail-able when the vehicle is unlocked.

Convenience openingX After unlocking the vehicle, press and holdthe% button on the SmartKey until theside windows begin to open.

orX When the vehicle is unlocked, press and holdthe% button until the side windows havereached the desired position.

X To interrupt convenience opening: releasethe% button.

Convenience closing feature

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen using the convenience closing feature,parts of the body could be trapped in the clos-ing area when a side window is being closed.There is a risk of injury.Observe the complete closing procedurewhen the convenience closing feature is oper-ating. Make sure that no body parts are inclose proximity during the closing procedure.

When you lock the vehicle, you can close thewindows at the same time.

72 Side windowsOp

eningandclosing

Using the SmartKeyX Press and hold the& button until the sidewindows are fully closed.

X Make sure that all the side windows areclosed.

X To interrupt convenience closing: releasethe& button.

Using KEYLESS-GOThe driver's door and the door at which the han-dle is used, must both be closed. The SmartKeymust be outside the vehicle. The gap betweenthe SmartKey and the corresponding door han-dle should not be greater than 3 ft (1 m).

X Touch recessed sensor surface: on thedoor handle until the side windows are fullyclosed.Make sure you only touch recessed sensorsurface:.

X Make sure that all the side windows areclosed.

X To interrupt convenience closing: releaserecessed sensor surface: on the door han-dle.

Resetting the side windowsIf a side window can no longer be closed fully,you must reset it.X Close all the doors.X Switch on the power supply or switch on theignition with the Start/Stop button.

X Pull the corresponding switch on the doorcontrol panel until the side window is com-pletely closed (Y page 72).

X Hold the switch for an additional second.

If the side window opens again slightly:X Immediately pull the corresponding switch onthe door control panel until the side window iscompletely closed (Y page 72).

X Hold the switch for an additional second.X If the respective side window remains closedafter the button is released, then it has beenset correctly. If this is not the case, repeat thesteps above.

Side windows 73

Openingandclosing

Z

Problems with the side windows

G WARNINGIf you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side windowcloses with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of thebody could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, releasethe switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

A side window cannot beclosed because it isblocked by objects, e.g.leaves in the windowguide.

X Remove the objects.X Close the side window.

A side window cannot beclosed and you cannotsee the cause.

If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens againslightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switchagain until the side window has closed.The side window is closed with increased force.

If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens againslightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switchagain until the side window has closed.The side window is closed without the automatic reversing feature.

Panorama roof

Operating the roller sunblind for thepanorama roof

The roller sunblind shields the vehicle interiorfrom sunlight.X To close: pull the roller sunblind in the direc-tion of the arrow using handle:.

X To open: slide the roller sunblind in the oppo-site direction to the arrow using handle:.

74 Panorama roofOp

eningandclosing

Correct driver's seat position

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

Observe the following when adjusting steeringwheel:, seat belt; and driver's seat=:Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag aspossible.Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position.Ryour thighs are slightly supported by the seatcushion.Ryour legs are not entirely stretched and youcan depress the pedals properly.Rthe back of your head is supported at eye levelby the center of the head restraint.Ryou can hold the steering wheel with yourarms slightly bent.Ryou can move your legs freely.

Ryou can see all the displays in the instrumentcluster clearly.Ryou should have a good overview of trafficconditions.Rthe seat belt is pulled snugly against the bodyand is routed across the center of your shoul-der and across your hips in the pelvic area.

Further related subjects:RManual seat adjustment (Y page 76)RElectrical seat adjustment (Y page 77)RFastening the seat belt correctly (Y page 39).RAdjusting the rear-view mirror and exteriormirrors (Y page 82).RStoring the seat, steering wheel and exteriormirror settings using the memory function(Y page 84).

Seats

Important safety notes

G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if they adjustthe seats, particularly when unattended.There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The seats can still be adjusted when there is noSmartKey in the ignition lock.

G WARNINGWhen you adjust a seat, you or other vehicleoccupants could become trapped, e.g. on theseat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.Make sure when adjusting a seat that no onehas any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

Observe the safety notes on "Air bags"(Y page 40) and "Children in the Vehicle"(Y page 49).

Seats 75

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

For safety reasons, seat fore-and-aft adjustmenton electrically adjustable seats is only possiblefor a maximum of two seconds when the vehicleis in motion. The seat fore-and-aft adjustmentcan then no longer be set.

G WARNINGIf you adjust the seat height carelessly, you orother vehicle occupants could be trapped andthereby injured. Children in particular couldaccidentally press the electrical seat adjust-ment buttons and become trapped. There is arisk of injury.While moving the seats, make sure that yourhands or other body parts do not get under thelever assembly of the seat adjustment sys-tem.

G WARNINGIf head restraints are not adjusted correctly,they cannot provide protection as intended.There is an increased risk of injury in the headand neck area, e.g. in the event of an accidentor when braking.Before driving off, make sure for every vehicleoccupant that the center of the head restraintsupports the back of the head at about eyelevel.

G WARNINGThe seat belt does not offer the intended levelof protection if you have not moved the back-rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-ing or in the event of an accident, you couldslide underneath the seat belt and sustainabdomen or neck injuries, for example. This

poses an increased risk of injury or even fatalinjury.Adjust the seat properly before beginningyour journey. Always ensure that the backrestis in an almost vertical position and that theshoulder section of your seat belt is routedacross the center of your shoulder.

! To avoid damage to the seats and the seatheating, observe the following information:Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. Ifliquid is spilled on the seats, dry them assoon as possible.Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do notswitch on the seat heating. The seat heat-ing should also not be used to dry the seats.Rclean the seat covers as recommended;see "Interior care".Rdo not transport heavy loads on the seats.Do not place sharp objects on the seatcushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. Theseats should only be occupied by passen-gers, if possible.Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, donot cover the seats with insulating materi-als, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers,child seats or booster seats.

! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell under or behind the seats whenmov-ing the seats back. There is a risk that theseats and/or the objects could be damaged.

Adjusting the seats manually

General notesThe manually adjustable seat is only available inCanada.

76 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Adjusting the seat fore-and-aft position

X Lift handle: and slide the seat forwards orbackwards.

X Release lever: again.Make sure that you hear the seat engage inposition.

Backrest angleX Relieve the pressure on the backrest.X Pull lever= up and adjust the backrest to thedesired angle.

X Release lever= again.The seat backrest must audibly engage.

Seat heightX Pull up or push down lever; repeatedly untilthe seat has reached the desired height.

Adjusting the seats electrically

: Seat cushion angle; Seat height= Backrest angle? Seat fore-and-aft adjustment

For safety reasons, seat fore-and-aft adjustmenton electrically adjustable seats is only possiblefor a maximum of two seconds when the vehicleis in motion. The seat fore-and-aft adjustmentcan then no longer be set.

i Further related subjects:RYou can store the seat settings using thememory function (Y page 84).RIf PRE-SAFE® is triggered, the front-passenger seat will be moved to a betterposition if it was previously in an unfavora-ble position (Y page 48).

Adjusting the head restraints

X To raise: pull the head restraint up to thedesired position.

X To lower: push the head restraint down to thedesired position.i The head restraint can only be adjusted onmanually and electrically adjustable seats,but not with AMG Performance Seats.

Adjusting the lumbar supportYou can adjust the contour of the seat backrestsindividually to provide optimum support for yourback.

Seats 77

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

: To raise the backrest contour; To soften the backrest contour= To lower the backrest contour? To harden the backrest contour

Adjusting the AMG Performance Seat

General notesTo adjust the contour of the seat and forimproved lateral support, you can individuallyadjust the front seats.The AMG Performance seat is designed for thestandard three-point seat belt. If you installanothermulti-point seat belt, e.g. sport or racingseat belts, the restraint system cannot providethe best level of protection.For further information about the seat belt(Y page 38)

Adjusting the side bolsters of the seatcushion and the seat backrest

Driver's seat

Side bolsters of the seat cushionX To narrow: press button:.X To broaden: press button;.Side bolsters of the seat backrestX To narrow: press button=.X To broaden: press button?.

Front-passenger seat

Side bolsters of the seat backrestX To narrow: press button:.X To broaden: press button;.i The side bolsters of the front-passengerseat cushion cannot be adjusted.

Switching the seat heating on/off

Switching on/off

G WARNINGRepeatedly switching on the seat heating cancause the seat cushion and backrest pads tobecome very hot. The health of persons withlimited temperature sensitivity or a limitedability to react to excessively high tempera-tures may be affected or they may even sufferburn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury.Therefore, do not switch the seat heating onrepeatedly.

78 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

The three red indicator lamps in the button indi-cate the heating level you have selected.The system automatically switches down fromlevel 3 to level 2 after approximately eightminutes.The system automatically switches down fromlevel 2 to level 1 after approximately tenminutes.The system automatically switches off approx-imately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1.X Select key position 2with the Start/Stop but-ton.

X To switch on: press button: repeatedlyuntil the desired heating level is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatheating may switch off.

Seats 79

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Problems with the seat heating

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The seat heating hasswitched off prematurelyor cannot be switchedon.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consum-ers are switched on.X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as therear window defroster or interior lighting.Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating can beswitched back on manually.

Steering wheel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGIf the steering wheel is unlocked while thevehicle is in motion, it could change positionunexpectedly. This could cause you to losecontrol of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.Before starting off, make sure the steeringwheel is locked. Never unlock the steeringwheel while the vehicle is in motion.

G WARNINGChildren could injure themselves if theyadjust the steering wheel. There is a risk ofinjury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The electrically adjustable steering wheel canstill be adjusted when there is no SmartKey inthe ignition lock.

Adjusting the steering wheel

: Adjusts the steering wheel position (fore-and-aft adjustment)

; Adjusts the steering wheel height

i Further related subjects:REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 80)RStoring settings (Y page 84)

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjuststhe steering wheel, you and other vehicleoccupants – particularly children – couldbecome trapped. There is a risk of injury.While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-ing adjustments, make sure that no one hasany body parts in the sweep of the steeringwheel.Move the steering wheel adjustment lever ifthere is a risk of entrapment by the steeringwheel. The adjustment process is stopped.

80 Steering wheelSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Press one of the memory function position but-tons. The adjustment process is stopped. Thisfunction is only available on vehicles with mem-ory function.

G WARNINGIf children activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT fea-ture, they can become trapped, particularlywhen unattended. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXITfeature is making adjustments, you could losecontrol of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.Always wait until the adjustment process iscomplete before driving off.

The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting inand out of your vehicle easier.You can activate and deactivate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature using the multimedia sys-tem (see the separate operating instructions forthe multimedia system).

Position of the steering wheel when theEASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is activeThe steering wheel swings upwards when you:Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockRopen the driver's door and the Stop button isin position 1

i The steering wheel only moves upwards if ithas not already reached the upper stop.

Position of the steering wheel for driv-ingThe steering wheel is moved to the last selectedposition when you:Rclose the driver's door andRpress the Start/Stop button onceWhen you close the driver's door with the igni-tion switched on, the steering wheel is alsoautomatically moved to the previously set posi-tion.

The last position of the steering wheel column isstored after each manual setting or when youstore the setting with the memory function(Y page 84).

Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT featureIf the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is trig-gered in an accident, the steering column willmove upwards when the driver's door is openedor the SmartKey is removed from the ignitionlock. This makes it easier to exit the vehicle andrescue the occupants.

Mirrors

Exterior mirrors

Important safety notes

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGThe exterior mirror on the front-passengerside reduces the size of the image. Visibleobjects are actually closer than they appear.This means that you could misjudge the dis-tance from road users traveling behind, e.g.when changing lane. There is a risk of an acci-dent.For this reason, always make sure of theactual distance from the road users travelingbehind by glancing over your shoulder.

Mirrors 81

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

X Select key position 1 or 2with the Start/Stopbutton.

X Exterior mirror on the front-passenger side:press button;.Exterior mirror on the driver's side: press but-ton:.The indicator lamp lights up in the button thathas been pressed.The indicator lamp goes out again after sometime. You can adjust the selectedmirror usingbutton= as long as the indicator lamp is lit.

X Press button= up, down, or to the left orright until you have adjusted the exterior mir-ror to the correct position. You should have agood overview of traffic conditions.

The convex exteriormirrors provide a larger fieldof vision.After the engine has been started, the exteriormirrors are automatically heated if the rear win-dow defroster is switched on and the outsidetemperature is low.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or outelectrically

X Select key position 1 or 2with the Start/Stopbutton.

X Briefly press button?.Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.i Make sure that the exterior mirrors arealways folded out fully while driving. Theycould otherwise vibrate.

i If you are driving faster than 30 mph(47 km/h), you can no longer fold in the exte-rior mirrors.

Resetting the exterior mirrorsIf the battery has been disconnected or com-pletely discharged, the exterior mirrors must bereset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise notfold in when you select the Automatic MirrorFolding function in the multimedia system.X Select key position 1 using the Start/Stopbutton.

X Briefly press button?.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or outautomaticallyWhen the Automatic Mirror Folding func-tion is activated in the multimedia system:Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically assoon as you lock the vehicle from the outside.Rthe exterior mirrors fold out automaticallyagain as soon as you unlock the vehicle.

i If the exterior mirrors have been folded inmanually, they do not fold out.

Exterior mirror pushed out of positionIf an exterior mirror has been pushed out ofposition, proceed as follows:X Press and hold button? until you hear a clickand the mirror engages audibly into position(Y page 82).The mirror housing is engaged again and youcan adjust the exterior mirrors as usual(Y page 82).

82 MirrorsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Automatic anti-glare mirrors

G WARNINGElectrolyte may escape if the glass in an auto-matic anti-glaremirror breaks. The electrolyteis harmful and causes irritation. It must notcome into contact with your skin, eyes, res-piratory organs or clothing or be swallowed.There is a risk of injury.If you come into contact with the electrolyte,observe the following:RRinse off the electrolyte from your skinimmediately with water.RImmediately rinse the electrolyte out ofyour eyes thoroughly with clean water.RIf the electrolyte is swallowed, immediatelyrinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do notinduce vomiting.RIf electrolyte comes into contact with yourskin or hair or is swallowed, seek medicalattention immediately.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with electrolyte.RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medicalattention immediately.

The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror onthe driver's side automatically go into anti-glaremode if the following conditions are met simul-taneously:Rthe ignition is switched onRincident light from headlamps strikes the sen-sor in the rear-view mirror

The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode ifreverse gear is engaged or if the interior lightingis switched on.

Parking position for the exterior mir-ror on the front-passenger side

Storing the parking positionYou can position the front-passenger side exte-rior mirror in such a way that you can see therear wheel on that side as soon as you engagereverse gear. You can store this position.

Using reverse gear

: Memory button M; Button for the driver's side exterior mirror= Button for the front-passenger side exterior

mirror? Adjustment buttonX Select key position 2with the Start/Stop but-ton.

X Press button=.X Start the engine.X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengersidemoves to the default setting parking posi-tion.

X Use button? to adjust the exterior mirror toa position that allows you to see the rearwheel and the curb.The parking position is stored.i If you shift the transmission to another posi-tion, the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side returns to the driving positionafter approximately ten seconds.

Using the memory buttonYou can store the parking position of the exte-rior mirror on the front-passenger side usingmemory buttonM:. The reverse gearmust notbe engaged.X Select key position 2with the Start/Stop but-ton.

X Press button=.X Use button? to adjust the exterior mirror toa position that allows you to see the rearwheel and the curb.

Mirrors 83

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

X Press memory button M: and one of thearrows on button? within three seconds.The parking position is stored if the exteriormirror does not move.

X If the mirror moves out of position, repeat thesteps.

Calling up a stored parking position set-tingX Select key position 2with the Start/Stop but-ton.

X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side using button=.

X Start the engine.X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the stored parking position.

The exterior mirror on the front-passenger sidemoves back to its original position:Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph(15 km/h)Rabout ten seconds after you have disengagedreverse gearRif you press button; for the exterior mirroron the driver's side

Memory function

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you use thememory function on the driver'sside while driving, you could lose control ofthe vehicle as a result of the adjustmentsbeing made. There is a risk of an accident.Only use the memory function on the driver'sside when the vehicle is stationary.

G WARNINGWhen thememory function adjusts the seat orsteering wheel, you and other vehicle occu-pants – particularly children – could becometrapped. There is a risk of injury.While the memory function is making adjust-ments, make sure that no one has any bodyparts in the sweep of the seat or steeringwheel. If somebody becomes trapped, imme-

diately release the memory function positionbutton. The adjustment process is stopped.

G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if they acti-vate the memory function, particularly whenunattended. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

Storing settingsThe memory function can be used at any time,e.g. even when the SmartKey isn't in the ignitionlock.With the memory function, you can store up tothree different settings, e.g. for three differentpeople.The following settings are stored as a singlememory preset:Rseat and backrest positionRdriver's side: position of the exterior mirrorson the driver's and front-passenger sides

X Select key position 2with the Start/Stop but-ton.

X Adjust the seat accordingly (Y page 77).X On the driver's side, adjust the steering wheel(Y page 80) and the exterior mirrors(Y page 82).

X Press memory button M and one of the stor-age position buttons 1, 2 or 3 within threeseconds.The settings are stored in the selected presetposition. A tone sounds when the settingshave been completed.

84 Memory functionSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Calling up a stored settingX Press and hold the corresponding storageposition button 1, 2 or 3 until:RSeatRSteering wheelRExterior mirrorsare in the stored position.i The steering wheel and seat adjustmentprocedure is interrupted as soon as yourelease the storage position button. Theadjustment of the mirror is still carried out.

Memory function 85

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Exterior lighting

General notesFor reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you drive with the lights switched oneven during the daytime. In some countries,operation of the headlamps varies due to legalrequirements and self-imposed obligations.

Setting the exterior lighting

Setting optionsExterior lighting can be set using:Rthe light switchRthe combination switch (Y page 87)

Light switch

Operation

1 W Left-hand standing lamps2 X Right-hand standing lamps3 T Parking lamps, license plate and

instrument cluster lighting4Ã Automatic headlampmode, controlled

by the light sensor5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsB R Rear fog lampIf you hear a warning tone when you leave thevehicle, the lights may still be switched on.X Turn the light switch to theà position.The exterior lighting (except the parking/stand-ing lamps) switches off automatically if you:Rswitch off the engine with the Start/Stop but-tonRopen the driver's door

Automatic headlamp modeG WARNINGWhen the light switch is set toÃ, the low-beam headlamps may not be switched onautomatically if there is fog, snow or othercauses of poor visibility due to the weatherconditions such as spray. There is a risk of anaccident.In such situations, turn the light switch toL.

The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid.The driver is responsible for the vehicle's light-ing at all times.Canada only:The daytime running lamps improve the visibilityof your vehicle during the day. The daytime run-ning lamps function is required by law in Can-ada. It cannot therefore be deactivated.When the engine is running and the vehicle isstationary: if you move the selector lever from adrive position to P, the daytime running lamps/low-beam headlamps go out after threeminutes.When the engine is running, the vehicle is sta-tionary and in bright ambient light: if you turn thelight switch to the T position, the daytimerunning lamps and parking lamps switch on.If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to theL position, themanual settingstake precedence over the daytime runninglamps.USA only:The daytime running lamps improve the visibilityof your vehicle during the day. To do this, thedaytime running lamps function must beswitched on using the on-board computer(Y page 161).If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to the T or L position, the manualsettings take precedence over the daytime run-ning lamps.Ã is the favored light switch setting. The lightsetting is automatically selected according tothe brightness of the ambient light (exception:poor visibility due to weather conditions such asfog, snow or spray):RIf the Start/Stop button is pressed once: theparking lamps are switched on or off auto-

86 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

matically depending on the brightness of theambient light.RWith the engine running: if you have activatedthe Daytime Running Lights function viathe on-board computer, the daytime runninglamps or the parking lamps and the low-beamheadlamps are switched on or off automati-cally depending on the brightness of the ambi-ent light.

X To switch on the automatic headlamps:turn the light switch to theà position.

Low-beam headlampsG WARNINGWhen the light switch is set toÃ, the low-beam headlamps may not be switched onautomatically if there is fog, snow or othercauses of poor visibility due to the weatherconditions such as spray. There is a risk of anaccident.In such situations, turn the light switch toL.

When the ignition is switched on and the lightswitch is in theL position, the parking lampsand low-beam headlamps are switched on evenif the light sensor does not sense dark condi-tions. This is a particularly useful function in theevent of rain and fog.X To switch on the low-beam headlamps:select key position 2with the Start/Stop but-ton or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to the L position.The green L indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up.

Rear fog lampThe rear fog lamp improves visibility of yourvehicle for the traffic behind in the event of thickfog. Please take note of the country-specificregulations for the use of rear fog lamps.X To switch on the rear fog lamp: select keyposition 2 with the Start/Stop button or startthe engine.

X Turn the light switch to the L orÃposition.

X Press the R button.The yellow R indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up.

X To switch off the rear fog lamp: press theR button.The yellow R indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster goes out.

Parking lamps! If the battery charge is very low, the parkinglamps or standing lamps are automaticallyswitched off to enable the next engine start.Always park your vehicle safely and suffi-ciently lit according to legal standards. Avoidusing the parking lamps T over a period ofseveral hours. If possible, switch on the right-hand X or left-hand W standing lamp.

X To switch on: turn the light switch to theT position.The green T indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up.

Standing lampsSwitching on the standing lamps ensures thecorresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated.X To switch on the standing lamps: switch offthe engine with the Start/Stop button.

X Turn the light switch to the W (left-handside of the vehicle) or X ((right-hand sideof the vehicle) position.

Combination switch

: High-beam headlamps; Turn signal, right= High-beam flasher? Turn signal, left

Exterior lighting 87

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

X To indicate briefly: press the combinationswitch briefly to the pressure point in thedirection of arrow; or?.The corresponding turn signal flashes threetimes.

X To indicate: press the combination switchbeyond the pressure point in the direction ofarrow; or?.

X To switch on the high-beam headlamps:select key position 2with the Start/Stop but-ton or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to the L orÃposition.

X Press the combination switch beyond thepressure point in the direction of arrow:.In theà position, the high-beam head-lamps are only switched onwhen it is dark andthe engine is running.The K indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up when the high-beam head-lamps are switched on.

X To switch off the high-beam headlamps:move the combination switch back to its nor-mal position.The K indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster goes out.

Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist: whenAdaptive Highbeam Assist is active, it controlsactivation and deactivation of the high-beamheadlamps (Y page 88).

Hazard warning lamps

X To switch on the hazard warning lamps:press button:.All turn signals flash. If you now switch on aturn signal using the combination switch, only

the turn signal lamp on the correspondingside of the vehicle will flash.

X To switch off the hazard warning lamps:press button:.

The hazard warning lamps automatically switchon if:Ran air bag is deployed orRthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a speedof above 45 mph (70 km/h) and comes to astandstill

The hazard warning lamps switch off automati-cally if the vehicle reaches a speed of above6 mph (10 km/h) again after a full brake appli-cation.

i The hazard warning lamps still operate if theignition is switched off.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist

General notesYou can use this function to set the headlampsto change between low beam and high beamautomatically. The system recognizes vehicleswith their lights on, either approaching from theopposite direction or traveling in front of yourvehicle, and consequently switches the head-lamps from high beam to low beam.The system automatically adapts the low-beamheadlamp range depending on the distance tothe other vehicle. Once the system no longerdetects any other vehicles, it reactivates thehigh-beam headlamps.The system's optical sensor is located behindthe windshield near the overhead control panel.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGAdaptive HighbeamAssist does not recognizeroad users:Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestriansRwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclistsRwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrierIn very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assistmay fail to recognize other road users thathave lights, or may recognize them too late. Inthis or similar situations, the automatic high-

88 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

beam headlamps will not be deactivated oractivated regardless. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Always carefully observe the traffic conditionsand switch off the high-beam headlamps ingood time.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take intoaccount road, weather or traffic conditions.Adaptive HighbeamAssist is only an aid. You areresponsible for adjusting the vehicle's lightingto the prevailing light, visibility and traffic con-ditions.In particular, the detection of obstacles can berestricted if there is:Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain orsnowRdirt on the sensors or the sensors areobscured

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assiston/offX To switch on: turn the light switch to theà position.

X Press the combination switch beyond thepressure point in the direction of arrow:.The _ indicator lamp in the multifunctiondisplay lights up when it is dark and the lightsensor activates the low-beam headlamps.If you are driving at speeds above approx-imately 16 mph (25 km/h):The headlamp range is set automaticallydepending on the distance between the vehi-cle and other road users.If you are driving at speeds above approx-imately 19 mph (30 km/h) and no other roadusers have been detected:The high-beam headlamps are switched onautomatically. The K indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster also lights up.If you are driving at speeds below approx-imately 16mph (25 km/h) or other road usershave been detected or the roads are ade-quately lit:The high-beam headlamps are switched offautomatically. The K indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out. The _ indi-

cator lamp in the multifunction displayremains lit.

X To switch off: move the combination switchback to its normal position or move the lightswitch to another position.The _ indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster goes out.

Headlamps fogged up on the insideCertain climatic and physical conditions maycause moisture to form in the headlamp. Thismoisture does not affect the functionality of theheadlamp.

Interior lighting

Overview

: u Activates/deactivates the cargo com-partment lighting

; | Switches the automatic interior light-ing control on or off

= p Switches the right-hand reading lampon/off

? c Activates/deactivates interior lightingA p Switches the left-hand reading lamp

on/off

Interior lighting control

General notesIn order to prevent the vehicle's battery fromdischarging, the interior lighting functions areautomatically deactivated after some timeexcept for when the Start/Stop button is inposition 2.

Interior lighting 89

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Automatic interior lighting controlX To switch on or off: press the | button.When the automatic interior lighting control isactivated, the button is flush with the over-head control panel.

The interior lighting automatically switches on ifyou:Runlock the vehicleRopen a doorRswitch off the engine with the Start/Stop but-ton

The interior lighting is activated for a short timewhen the engine is switched off with the Start/Stop button. This delayed switch-off can beadjusted via the multimedia system (see theseparate operating instructions).

Replacing bulbs

The front and rear light clusters of your vehicleare equipped with LED light bulbs. Do notreplace the bulbs yourself. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop which has the necessaryspecialist knowledge and tools to carry out thework required.Lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety.You must therefore make sure that these func-tion correctly at all times. Have the headlampsetting checked regularly.

Windshield wipers

Switching the windshield wiperson/off! Do not operate the windshield wipers whenthe windshield is dry, as this could damagethe wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has col-lected on thewindshield can scratch the glassif wiping takes place when the windshield isdry.If it is necessary to switch on the windshieldwipers in dry weather conditions, always usewasher fluid when operating the windshieldwipers.

! If the windshield wipers leave smears on thewindshield after the vehicle has been washedin an automatic car wash, wax or other resi-dues may be the reason for this. Clean the

windshield using washer fluid after washingthe vehicle in an automatic car wash.

! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due tooptical influences and the windshield becom-ing dirty in dry weather conditions, the wind-shield wipers may be activated inadvertently.This could then damage the windshield wiperblades or scratch the windshield.For this reason, you should always switch offthe windshield wipers in dry weather.

1 $ Windshield wiper off2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor set

to low sensitivity)3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor

set to high sensitivity)4 ° Continuous wipe, slow5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fastB í Single wipe

î Wipes with washer fluidX Switch on the ignition.X Turn the combination switch to the corre-sponding position.

In the Ä or Å position, the appropriatewiping frequency is set automatically accordingto the intensity of the rain. In the Å position,the rain sensor is more sensitive than inthe Ä position, causing the windshield wiperto wipe more frequently.If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield willno longer be wiped properly. This could preventyou from observing the traffic conditions.

90 Windshield wipersLightsandwindshieldwipers

Replacing the wiper blades

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the windshield wipers begin to move whileyou are changing the wiper blades, you couldbe trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andignition before changing the wiper blades.

! Never open the hood if a windshield wiperarm has been folded away from the wind-shield.Never fold a windshield wiper arm without awiper blade back onto the windshield.Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly whenyou change the wiper blade. If you release thewindshield wiper arm without a wiper bladeand it falls onto thewindshield, thewindshieldmay be damaged by the force of the impact.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe wiper blades changed at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

! To avoid damaging the wiper blades, makesure that you touch only the wiper arm of thewiper.

Replacing the wiper blades

Adjusting the wiper blades so that theyare verticalX Switch off the engine.X Remove your foot from the brake pedal.X Set thewindshield wiper to the° position.X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly untilthe windshield wiper starts.

X When the wiper arms have reached a verticalposition, press the Start/Stop button.

X Fold the wiper arm away from the windshield.

Removing the wiper blades

X Set the wiper blade at right angles to thewiper arm.

X Remove the wiper blade from the retainer onthe wiper arm in the direction of the arrow.

Installing the wiper bladesX Slide the new wiper blade into the retainer onthe wiper arm in the opposite direction to thearrow.

X Turn the wiper blade parallel to the wiper arm.X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield.

Windshield wipers 91

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Problems with the windshield wipers

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The windshield wipersare jammed.

Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield wipermovement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.X Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open thedriver's door.

X Remove the cause of the obstruction.X Switch the windshield wipers back on.

The windshield wipersfail completely.

The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist work-shop.

The windshield washerfluid from the spray noz-zles no longer hits thecenter of the windshield.

The spray nozzles are misaligned.X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist workshop.

The wiper arms are onthe windshield.

The wiper arms have been moved by an external force.X Select key position 2 with the Start/Stop button.The wiper arms move back down automatically.

92 Windshield wipersLightsandwindshieldwipers

Overview of climate control systems

General notesObserve the settings recommended on the fol-lowing pages. The windows could otherwise fogup.To prevent the windows from fogging up:Rswitch off climate control only brieflyRswitch on air-recirculation mode only brieflyRswitch on the cooling with air dehumidifica-tion functionRswitch on the defrost windshield functionbriefly, if required

Climate control regulates the temperature andair humidity in the vehicle interior. The interiorfilter cleans the air, thus improving the interiorclimate.The cooling with air dehumidification function isonly available when the engine is running. Opti-mum climate control is only achieved with theside windows closed.

i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period duringwarm weather, e.g. using the convenienceopening feature (Y page 72). This will speedup the cooling process and the desired inte-rior temperature will be reached morequickly.

i The integrated filter filters out most parti-cles of dust and soot and completely filtersout pollen. It also reduces gaseous pollutantsand odors. A clogged filter reduces theamount of air supplied to the vehicle interior.For this reason, you should always observethe interval for replacing the filter, which isspecified in the Maintenance Booklet. As itdepends on environmental conditions, e.g.heavy air pollution, the interval may beshorter than stated in the Maintenance Book-let.

i It is possible that the blower may be activa-ted automatically 60minutes after the enginehas been switched off depending on variousfactors, e.g. the outside temperature. Thevehicle is then ventilated for 30minutes to drythe climate control system.

Overview of climate control systems 93

Climatecontrol

Control panel for dual-zone climate control

: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 96); Sets the air distribution (Y page 96)= Sets the airflow (Y page 97)

Switches off climate control (Y page 95)? Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 96)A Defrosts the windshield (Y page 97)B Calls up the climate control menu of the multimedia system (Y page 204)C Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 97)D Activates/deactivates synchronization (Y page 97)E Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode manually (Y page 99)F Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 95)G Sets the temperature, right (Y page 96)

Optimum use of 3-zone automatic cli-mate control

3-zone automatic climate controlThe following contains instructions and recom-mendations to enable you to get the most out ofyour 3-zone automatic climate control.RActivate climate control using theÃrocker switch. The indicator lamp above theà rocker switch lights up. The "Coolingwith air dehumidification" function is not acti-vated automatically in automatic mode. Ifnecessary, activate this function(Y page 95).RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).

ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" functionbriefly until the windshield is clear again.ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. ifthere are unpleasant outside odors or when ina tunnel. Thewindows could otherwise fog up,since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle inair-recirculation mode.

ECO start/stop functionDuring automatic engine switch-off, the climatecontrol system only operates at a reduced capa-city. If you require the full climate control output,you can switch off the ECO start/stop functionby pressing the ECO button (Y page 106).

94 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Operating the climate control sys-tems

Switching climate control on/off

General notesWhen the climate control is switched off, the airsupply and air circulation are also switched off.The windows could fog up. Therefore, switch offclimate control only brieflySwitch on climate control primarily using theà rocker switch (Y page 96).

Switching on/offX Select key position 2with the Start/Stop but-ton (Y page 103).

X To switch on: set the airflow to level 1 orhigher using theH rocker switch.

X To switch off: set the airflow to level 0 usingtheH rocker switch.

Activating/deactivating cooling withair dehumidification

General notesIf you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumid-ification" function, the air inside the vehicle willnot be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will alsonot be dehumidified. The windows can fog upmore quickly. Therefore, deactivate the coolingwith air-dehumidification function only briefly.The "Cooling with air dehumidification" functionis only available when the engine is running. Theair inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidifiedaccording to the temperature selected.Condensation may drip from the underside ofthe vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This isnormal and not a sign that there is a malfunc-tion.

Switching on/offX Press the¿ rocker switch up or down.The indicator lamp above the¿ rockerswitch lights up or goes out.

Operating the climate control systems 95

Climatecontrol

Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The indicator lamp overthe¿ rocker switchflashes three times orremains off. The coolingwith air dehumidificationfunction cannot be acti-vated via the multimediasystem any longer(Y page 205).

Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a mal-function.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Setting climate control to automatic

General notesIn automaticmode, the set temperature ismain-tained automatically at a constant level. Thesystemautomatically regulates the temperatureof the dispensed air, the airflow and the air dis-tribution.The "Cooling with air dehumidification" functionis activated automatically in automatic mode.

Automatic controlX Select key position 2with the Start/Stop but-ton (Y page 103).

X Set the desired temperature using thewrocker switch.

X To activate: press rocker switchà up ordown.The indicator lamp above theà rockerswitch lights up.

X To switch to manual operation: press theH rocker switch up or down.

orX Press the upper or lower section of the_rocker switch.

In automatic mode, if you adjust the airflow orair distribution manually, the indicator lampabove theà rocker switch goes out. Thefunction which has not been changed manually,however, continues to be controlled automati-cally. When the manually set function switchesback to automatic mode, the indicator lampabove theà rocker switch lights up again.

Setting the temperatureDifferent temperatures can be set for the driv-er's and front-passenger sides.X Select key position 2with the Start/Stop but-ton (Y page 103).

X To increase or reduce: press thewrocker switch up or down.

Only change the temperature setting in smallincrements. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

Setting the air distribution

Air distribution settings¯ Directs air through the defroster ventsP Directs air through the center and side air

ventsO Directs air through the footwell air ventsS Directs air through the center, side and

footwell vents_ Directs air through the defroster, center,

side and footwell ventsb Directs air through the defroster, center

and side air ventsa Directs air through the defroster and

footwell vents

SettingX Select key position 2with the Start/Stop but-ton (Y page 103).

X Press the_ rocker switch up or down.The various air distribution settings appear inthe multimedia system.

96 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Setting the airflowX Select key position 2with the Start/Stop but-ton (Y page 103).

X To increase or reduce: press theHrocker switch up or down.

Switching the synchronization func-tion on/off

General notesClimate control can be set centrally using thesynchronization function. The temperature set-ting is adopted for the front-passenger side.

Switching on/offX Press the0 rocker switch up or down.The indicator lamp above the0 rockerswitch lights up or goes out.

The synchronization function deactivates if thesettings for the front-passenger side arechanged.

Defrosting the windshield

General notesYou can use this function to defrost the wind-shield or to clear a fogged up windshield or frontside windows on the inside.Switch off the "Windshield defrosting" functionas soon as the windshield is clear again.

Switching on/offX Select key position 2with the Start/Stop but-ton (Y page 103).

X To switch on: press the¬ rocker switchup or down.The indicator lamp above the¬ rockerswitch lights up. The current climate controlsettings are deactivated.The climate control system switches to thefollowing functions:Rhigh airflowRhigh temperature

Rair distribution to the windshield and frontside windowsRair-recirculation mode offi If necessary, the "Cooling with air dehumid-ification" function is activated. In this case,the indicator lamp above the¿ rockerswitch remains switched off.

X To switch off: press the¬ rocker switchup or down.The indicator lamp above the¬ rockerswitch goes out. The previously selected set-tings are restored. Air-recirculation moderemains deactivated.

Defrosting the windows

Windows fogged up on the insideX Activate the "Cooling with air dehumidifica-tion" function with the¿ rocker switch.

X Switch on automatic mode using theÃrocker switch.

X If thewindows continue to fog up, activate the"Windshield defrosting" function using the¬ rocker switch.i You should only select this setting until thewindshield is clear again.

Windows fogged up on the outsideX Activate the windshield wipers.X Switch on automatic mode using theÃrocker switch.i If you clean the windows regularly, they donot fog up so quickly.

Rear window defroster

General notesThe rear window defroster has a high currentdraw. You should therefore switch it off as soonas the rear window is clear. Otherwise, the rearwindow defroster switches off automaticallyafter several minutes.If the battery voltage is too low, the rear windowdefroster may switch off.

Operating the climate control systems 97

Climatecontrol

Activating or deactivatingX Select key position 2with the Start/Stop but-ton (Y page 103).

X Press the¤ rocker switch up or down.The indicator lamp above the¤ rockerswitch lights up or goes out.

98 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Problems with the rear window defroster

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The rear windowdefroster has deactiva-ted prematurely or can-not be activated.

The battery has not been sufficiently charged.X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps,interior lighting or the seat heating.When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window defrostercan be activated again.

Activating/deactivating air-recircula-tion mode

General notesYou can also temporarily deactivate the flow offresh air manually if unpleasant odors are enter-ing the vehicle from outside. The air alreadyinside the vehicle will then be recirculated.If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the win-dows can fog up more quickly, in particular atlow temperatures. Only use air-recirculationmode briefly to prevent the windows from fog-ging up.

Activating or deactivatingX Select key position 2with the Start/Stop but-ton (Y page 103).

X To activate: press theg rocker switch upor down.The indicator lamp above theg rockerswitch lights up.

Air-recirculation mode switches on automati-cally:Rat high outside temperaturesRin a tunnel (vehicles with a navigation systemonly)

The indicator lamp above theg rockerswitch is not lit when automatic air-recirculationmode is activated. Outside air is added afterabout 30 minutes.X To deactivate: press theg rocker switchup or down.The indicator lamp above theg rockerswitch goes out.

Air-recirculation mode deactivates automati-cally:Rafter approximately five minutes at outsidetemperatures below approximately 41 ‡(5 †)Rafter approximately five minutes if coolingwith air dehumidification is deactivatedRafter approximately 30 minutes at outsidetemperatures above approximately 41 ‡(5 †) if the "Cooling with air dehumidifica-tion" function is activated

Air vents

Important safety notes

G WARNINGVery hot or very cold air can flow from the airvents. This could result in burns or frostbite inthe immediate vicinity of the air vents. Thereis a risk of injury.Make sure that all vehicle occupants alwaysmaintain a sufficient distance to the air out-lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow toanother area of the vehicle interior.

In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh airthrough the air vents into the vehicle interior,please observe the following notes:Rkeep the air inlet between the windshield andthe hood free of blockages, such as ice, snowor leaves.Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles inthe vehicle interior.

Air vents 99

Climatecontrol

Z

Setting the air vents

Example: Side window defroster vent; Side air vent, left= Control for left side air ventX To open or close: turn thumbwheel= to theleft or right as far as it will go.

X To adjust the air direction: hold side airvent; in the center and move it up or downor to the left or right.

100 Air ventsClimatecontrol

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle

Important safety notesThe sensor system of some driving and drivingsafety systems adjusts automatically while acertain distance is being driven after the vehiclehas been delivered or after repairs. Full systemeffectiveness is not reached until the end of thisteach-in procedure.New and replaced brake pads and discs onlyreach their optimum braking effect after severalhundred kilometers of driving. Compensate forthis by applying greater force to the brake pedal.

The first 1000 miles (1500 km)The more you look after the engine when it isnew, the more satisfied you will be with its per-formance in the future.RYou should therefore drive at varying vehicleand engine speeds for the first 1000 miles(1500 km).RIdeally, for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km),drive in program C.RDo not drive faster than 85 mph (140 km/h)for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km).ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximumengine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly.RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throttle,during this period.RDo not exceedÔ of the maximum permittedengine speed for each gear.RShift up into manual mode M and temporarymanual drive program in good time.RDo not carry out a RACE START.RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to brakethe vehicle.RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator pedalbeyond the point of resistance (kickdown).

After 1000 miles (1500 km), you can increasethe engine speed gradually and accelerate thevehicle to full speed.You should also observe these notes on break-ing in if the engine or parts of the drive train onyour vehicle have been replaced.Always observe the respective speed limits.

Driving

Important safety notes

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicle isjeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

G WARNINGUnsuitable footwear can hinder correct usageof the pedals, e.g.:Rshoes with thick solesRshoes with high heelsRslippersThere is a risk of an accident.Wear suitable footwear to ensure correctusage of the pedals.

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf the parking brake has not been fullyreleased when driving, the parking brake can:Roverheat and cause a fireRlose its hold function.There is a risk of fire and an accident. Releasethe parking brake fully before driving off.

Driving 101

Drivingandparking

Z

! Do not warm up the engine with the vehiclestationary. Drive off immediately. Avoid highengine speeds and driving at full throttle untilthe engine has reached its operating temper-ature.Only shift the automatic transmission to thedesired drive position when the vehicle is sta-tionary.Where possible, avoid spinning the drivewheels when pulling away on slippery roads.You could otherwise damage the drive train.

! During a cold start with low engine oil tem-peratures (below 32 ‡) (0 †), the maximumengine speed is restricted in order to protectthe engine. To protect the engine and main-tain smooth engine operation, avoid driving atfull throttle when the engine is cold.

SmartKey positions

Start/Stop button

General notesAll vehicles are equipped with a Start/Stop but-ton.The Start/Stop button is located in the centerconsole and is illuminated when the vehicle isunlocked.The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.Pressing the Start/Stop button several times insuccession corresponds to the different keypositions in the ignition lock. This is only thecase if you are not depressing the brake pedal.If you depress the brake pedal and press theStart/Stop button, the engine starts immedi-ately.A check which periodically establishes a radioconnection between the vehicle and the Smart-Key determines whether a valid SmartKey is inthe vehicle. This occurs, for example, whenstarting the engine.If there is a SmartKey in the ignition lock, thistakes precedence over the KEYLESS-GO startfunction.To start the vehicle without actively using theSmartKey:Rthe SmartKey must be in the vehicle.Rthe vehicle must not be locked with theSmartKey or KEYLESS-GO (Y page 61).

Do not keep the SmartKey:Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phoneor another SmartKey.Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil.Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case.This can affect the functionality of the Smart-Key.If you lock the vehicle with the SmartKey'sremote control or with KEYLESS-GO, after ashort time:Ryou will not be able to switch on the ignitionwith the Start/Stop button.Ryouwill not be able to start the enginewith theStart/Stop button until the vehicle isunlocked again.

If you lock the vehicle centrally using the buttonon the driver's door (Y page 67), you can con-tinue to start the engine with the Start/Stopbutton.The engine can be switched off while the vehicleis in motion by pressing and holding the Start/Stop button for three seconds. This functionoperates independently of the ECO start/stopautomatic engine switch-off function.

Key positions with the Start/Stop button

As soon as the ignition is switched on, all theindicator lamps in the instrument cluster lightup. Further information on situations where anindicator lamp either fails to go out after startingthe engine or lights up while driving(Y page 191).If Start/Stop button: has not yet beenpressed, this corresponds to the SmartKeybeing removed from the ignition.

102 DrivingDrivingandparking

X To switch on the power supply: pressStart/Stop button: once.The power supply is switched on. You can nowactivate the windshield wipers, for example.

The power supply is switched off again if:Rthe driver's door is opened andRyou press Start/Stop button: twicewhen inthis position

X To switch on the ignition: press Start/Stopbutton: twice.The ignition is switched on.If you press Start/Stop button: once whenin this position, the ignition is switched offagain.

; Start/Stop button USA= Start/Stop button Canada

SmartKeyYou can also start the vehicle with the SmartKeyin the ignition lock.The ignition lock is located in the rear stowagespace of the center console.

g To remove the SmartKey1 Power supply for some consumers, such as

the windshield wipers

2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)and drive position

3 To start the engine

i The SmartKey can be turned in the ignitionlock even if it is not the correct SmartKey forthe vehicle. The ignition is not switched on.The engine cannot be started.

Starting the engine

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.

G WARNINGFlammable materials introduced throughenvironmental influence or by animals canignite if in contact with the exhaust system or

Driving 103

Drivingandparking

Z

parts of the engine that heat up. There is a riskof fire.Carry out regular checks to make sure thatthere are no flammable foreign materials inthe engine compartment or in the exhaustsystem.

General notesThe catalytic converter is preheated for up to30 seconds after a cold start. The sound of theengine may change during this time.

AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sportstransmissionX Shift the transmission to position P(Y page 109).The transmission position display in the mul-tifunction display shows P (Y page 110).

You can start the engine in transmission posi-tion P and N.

Starting procedure with the Start/StopbuttonThe Start/Stop button can be used to start thevehiclemanuallywithout inserting the SmartKeyinto the ignition lock. You merely need to carrythe SmartKey on your person. This mode forstarting the engine operates independently ofthe ECO start/stop automatic engine start func-tion.You can start the engine if a valid SmartKey is inthe vehicle. Switch off the engine and alwaystake the SmartKey with you when leaving thevehicle, even if you only leave it for a short time.Pay attention to the important safety notes.X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Press the Start/Stop button once(Y page 102).The engine starts.

Starting procedure with the SmartKeyX Turn the SmartKey to position3 in the ignitionlock (Ypage103) and release it as soon as theengine is running.

If the engine will not start:X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.X Reinsert the SmartKey into the ignition lockafter a short waiting period.

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 103).The indicator lamps in the instrument clusterlight up (Y page 189).

X Turn the SmartKey to position3 in the ignitionlock (Ypage103) and release it as soon as theengine is running.

Pulling away

General notes

G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D or R,the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There isa risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

Depress the accelerator carefully when pullingaway.The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulledaway. The locking knobs in the doors drop down.You can open the doors from the inside at anytime.You can also deactivate the automatic lockingfeature (Y page 67).It is only possible to shift the transmission fromposition P to the desired position, if:Rthe engine is running andRyou depress the brake pedalIf you do not depress the brake pedal, the E-SELECT lever can still be moved but the parkinglock remains engaged.Information on the automatic release of theelectric parking brake (Y page 122).

Hill start assistHill start assist helps you when pulling away for-wards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It holdsthe vehicle for a short time after you haveremoved your foot from the brake pedal. This

104 DrivingDrivingandparking

gives you enough time to move your foot fromthe brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and todepress it before the vehicle begins to roll.

G WARNINGAfter a short time, hill start assist will no lon-ger brake your vehicle and it could roll away.There is a risk of an accident and injury.Therefore, quickly move your foot from thebrake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Neverleave the vehicle when it is held by hill startassist.

Hill start assist is not active if:Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on adownhill gradient.Rthe transmission is in position N.Rthe electric parking brake is applied.RESP® is malfunctioning.

ECO start/stop function

IntroductionThe ECO start/stop function switches theengine off automatically if the vehicle is stoppedunder certain conditions.The engine starts automatically when the driverwants to pull away again. The ECO start/stopfunction thereby helps you to reduce the fuelconsumption and emissions of your vehicle.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the engine is switched off automatically andyou exit the vehicle, the engine is restartedautomatically. The vehicle may begin moving.There is a risk of accident and injury.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe ignition and secure the vehicle againstrolling away.

General notes

: ECO start/stop displayIf the engine has been switched off automati-cally by the ECO start/stop function, theèECO symbol is shown in the multifunction dis-play.The ECO start/stop function is only available indrive program C.The ECO start/stop function is activated when-ever you switch on the engine using the Smart-Key or the Start/Stop button. This is the case if:Rthe ignition was switched off for more thanfour hours orRthe ECO start/stop function had been activa-ted before the engine was switched off

Automatic engine switch-offThe ECO start/stop function switches theengine off automatically if:Rthe ECO start/stop function is activated(Y page 106) andRyou brake the vehicle to a standstill in trans-mission position D

The ECO start/stop function is operationalwhen:Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is litgreen.Rthe outside temperature is within the rangethat is suitable for the system.Rthe engine and the transmission are at a suf-ficient temperature for the ECO start/stopfunction.Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interiorhas been reached.Rthe battery is sufficiently charged.Rthe system detects that the windshield is notfogged upwhen the air-conditioning system isswitched on.Rthe hood is closed.Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver'sseat belt is fastened.

Driving 105

Drivingandparking

Z

All of the vehicle's systems remain active whenthe engine is stopped automatically.The HOLD function can also be activated if theengine has been switched off automatically. It isthen not necessary to continue applying thebrakes during the automatic stop phase. Whenyou depress the accelerator pedal, the enginestarts automatically and the braking effect ofthe HOLD function is deactivated.

Automatic engine startThe engine starts automatically if:Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function bypressing the ECO buttonRswitch to drive program RACE, S+ or S(Y page 108)Ryou switch to manual mode M (Y page 112)Rin transmission position D, the brake pedal isreleased and the HOLD function is not activeRyou depress the accelerator pedalRyou engage reverse gear RRyou move the transmission out of position PRyou unfasten your seat belt or open the driv-er's doorRthe vehicle starts to rollRthe brake system requires thisRthe temperature in the vehicle interior devi-ates from the set rangeRthe system detects moisture on the wind-shield when the air-conditioning system isswitched onRthe battery's condition of charge is too lowShifting the transmission to position P does notstart the engine.

Deactivating or activating the ECOstart/stop function

X To deactivate: press ECO button:.Indicator lamp; goes out.

X To activate: press ECO button:.Indicator lamp; lights up.

If indicator lamp; is off, the ECO start/stopfunction has been deactivated manually or asthe result of a malfunction. The engine will thennot be switched off automatically when the vehi-cle stops.The ECO start/stop function is deactivated, if:Rswitch to drive program RACE, S+ or S(Y page 108)Ryou switch to manual mode M (Y page 112)

AMG sports exhaust systemYou can choose between different AMG sportsexhaust system volumes using the position ofthe exhaust flap.Each time you start the engine with the Smart-Key or the Start/Stop button, the quietest set-ting is activated.

Setting the volume:X Press button:.If you select the loudest setting, indicatorlamp; lights up.

You can also adjust the position of the exhaustflap using the:RDYNAMIC SELECT controller (Y page 108)RMultimedia system

106 DrivingDrivingandparking

Problems with the engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The engine does notstart.

The HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated.X Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 136) or DISTRONIC PLUS(Y page 128).

X Try to start the engine again (Y page 103).

The engine does notstart. The starter motorcan be heard.

RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.Before attempting to start the engine again:X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps inthe instrument cluster go out.

orX Turn the SmartKey back to position 0 in the ignition lock.X Try to start the engine again (Y page 103). Avoid excessively longand frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain thebattery.

If the engine does not start after several attempts:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does notstart. You cannot hearthe starter motor.

The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak ordischarged.X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 248).If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.X Try to start the engine again (Y page 103).If the engine still does not start:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine is not runningsmoothly and is misfir-ing.

There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanicalcomponent of the engine management system.X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converterand damage it.

X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist work-shop.

The coolant temperaturegauge shows a valueabove 248 ‡ (120 †).

The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is nolonger being cooled sufficiently.X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant tocool down.

X Check the coolant level (Y page 231). Observe the warning notesas you do so and add coolant if necessary.

Driving 107

Drivingandparking

Z

DYNAMIC SELECT controller

General informationSelect the drive program using the DYNAMICSELECT controller.Available drive programs:

C Comfort Comfort-oriented, optimum-economy engine and trans-mission settings

S Sport Sporty engine and transmis-sion settings

S+ SportPlus Especially sporty engine andtransmission settings

Race Maximum sportiness andengine and transmissionsettings suitable for theracetrack

I Individual Individual settings

Depending on the drive program selected thefollowing vehicle characteristics will change:Rthe drive (engine management)Rthe transmission managementRESP® (Y page 55)Rthe suspension (Y page 138)Rthe position of the exhaust flap(Y page 106)Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop function(Y page 105)Rthe availability of gliding mode(Y page 112)

Further information for automatic drive programcharacteristics (Y page 113).Additionally, in drive program I you can config-ure the respective vehicle characteristics usingthe multimedia system. You can find informa-tion about this in the Digital Operator's Manual.Each time you start the engine with the Smart-Key or the Start/Stop button, drive programC isactivated. For further information about startingthe engine, see (Y page 103).

Selecting the drive program

X Turn DYNAMIC SELECT controller: until thedesired drive program is selected.The selected drive program appears in themultifunction display. After five seconds thedisplay goes out and the status icon of theselected drive program appears.The drive program indicator on DYNAMICSELECT controller: lights up in red.In addition, the current drive programsettingsare displayed in the multimedia system dis-play.

Additional settings

: Manual mode (Y page 115); ECO start/stop function (Y page 105)= Position of the exhaust flap (Y page 106)? Suspension (Y page 138)A ESP® (Y page 55)When you press buttons: -A the corre-sponding setting is selected. The DYNAMICSELECT controller setting is overwritten.These settings will also be maintained for man-ual mode and ESP® if you switch to drive pro-

108 DYNAMIC SELECT controllerDrivingandparking

gram RACE, S+, S or C using the DYNAMICSELECT controller.If you switch to drive program I, all stored char-acteristics will be accepted. This is also the caseif you have previously pressed one of buttons:-A. If you then change the drive program usingthe DYNAMIC SELECT controller, the standardsetting for the drive program is selected.

AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sportstransmission

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D or R,the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There isa risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches to neu-tral positionNwhen you switch off the engine.The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of anaccident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking positionP. Prevent the parked vehi-cle from rolling away by applying the parkingbrake.

E-SELECT selector lever

General notes! If the engine speed is too high or if the vehi-cle is rolling, do not shift the transmissiondirectly from D to R, from R to D or directly toP.Do not open the driver's door while the vehi-cle is inmotion. At low speeds in transmissionposition D or R, park position P is otherwiseengaged automatically.The transmission could be damaged.

! If you wish to select a transmission positionor to disengage park position P, the enginemust be running.

The E-SELECT lever always returns to its originalposition.The current transmission position P, R, N or Dappears in the transmission position display inthe multifunction display.

Overview of transmission positions

j Park position with parking lockk Reverse geari Neutralh Drive

Engaging park position P

X When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal.

X Press button:.To shift directly from P to R:X Start the engine (Y page 104).X Depress the brake pedal and push the E-SELECT lever forwards past the first point ofresistance.

AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sports transmission 109

Drivingandparking

Z

To shift directly from P to D:X Start the engine (Y page 104).X Depress the brake pedal and push the E-SELECT lever backwards past the first point ofresistance.

Park position P is disengaged if you:Rdepress the brake pedal andRpush the E-SELECT lever forwards or back tothe first point of resistance

The transmission shifts to neutral N.

Engaging park position P automaticallyPark position P is engaged automatically in thefollowing circumstances:Rif you switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's or front-passenger door.Rif you remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock.Rif you open the door while traveling at lowspeed in transmission position D or R.

Under certain conditions, the automatic trans-mission shifts automatically to transmissionposition P if the HOLD function or DISTRONICPLUS is activated. Observe the information onthe HOLD function (Y page 137) and onDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 132).

Engaging reverse gear RX Start the engine (Y page 104).X When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal.

X Push the E-SELECT lever forwards past thefirst point of resistance.

Shifting to neutral NX Start the engine (Y page 104).X When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal.

X Push the E-SELECT lever forwards or back tothe first point of resistance.

If you move the E-SELECT lever to N beforeswitching off the engine, the transmissionremains in N for approximately 30 minutes. Ifyou open the driver's or front-passenger doorduring this period, the transmission automati-cally shifts to P.

The transmission remains in N if:Rthe SmartKey is in the ignition lock andRyou use the E‑SELECT lever to shift the trans-mission to N before switching the engine off

This still applies if you open the driver's or front-passenger door.You can find further information under "Carwash" (Y page 234).

Shifting to transmission position DX Start the engine (Y page 104).X When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal.

X Push the E-SELECT lever back past the firstpoint of resistance.

Transmission position and drive pro-gram displayThe current transmission position and drive pro-gram appear in the multifunction display.

: Drive program; Transmission positionAdditionally, displays next to the E‑SELECT levershow the current transmission position.The displays light up if you:Rswitch on the power supply with the Start/Stop button (Y page 102) orRinsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock(Y page 103).

The displays go out if you:Rswitch off the power supply with the Start/Stop button (Y page 102) orRremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock(Y page 103).

If the transmission position display in the mul-tifunction display is not working, check on thedisplay next to the E-SELECT lever whether thedesired transmission position is engaged.

110 AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sports transmissionDrivingandparking

Transmission positions

B Park positionThis prevents the vehicle from rollingaway when stopped.Only shift the transmission into posi-tion P when the vehicle is stationary(Y page 109). The parking lockshould not be used as a brake whenparking. Always apply the electronicparking brake in addition to the park-ing lock in order to secure the vehi-cle.The automatic transmission shifts toP automatically if you:Rremove the SmartKeyRswitch off the engine when in R orD and open the driver's door orfront-passenger doorRopen the driver's door while trav-eling at low speed in transmissionposition D or R

If the vehicle electronics aremalfunc-tioning, the transmission may belocked in position P. Have the vehicleelectronics checked immediately at aqualified specialist workshop.

C Reverse gearOnly shift the transmission into posi-tion R when the vehicle is stationary.

A NeutralDo not shift the transmission to Nwhile driving. Otherwise, the auto-matic transmission could be dam-aged.No power is transmitted from theengine to the drive wheels.Releasing the brakes will allow you tomove the vehicle freely, e.g. to pushit or tow it.If ESP® is deactivated or faulty: shiftthe transmission to position N if thevehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g.on icy roads.If you switch off the engine using theSmartKey or the Start/Stop button,the automatic transmission shifts toneutral N automatically.

! Rolling in neutral N can damagethe drive train.

7 DriveThe automatic transmission changesgear automatically in the automaticdrive programs (Y page 113). Allforward gears are available.

Driving tips

Changing gearThe automatic transmission shifts to the indi-vidual gears automatically when it is in trans-mission position D. This automatic gear shiftingbehavior is determined by:Rthe selected drive program (Y page 108)Rthe position of the accelerator pedalRthe road speed

Accelerator pedal positionYour style of driving influences how the auto-matic transmission shifts gear:Rlittle throttle: early upshiftsRmore throttle: late upshiftsA dynamic driving style with high longitudinaland lateral acceleration delays the shift pointsto higher engine speeds.

AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sports transmission 111

Drivingandparking

Z

Double-clutch functionWhen shifting down, the double-clutch functionis active regardless of the currently selecteddrive program. The double-clutch functionreduces load change reactions and is conduciveto a sporty driving style. The sound generated bythe double-clutch function depends on the driveprogram selected.

KickdownUse kickdown for maximum acceleration.X In the automatic drive programs, depress theaccelerator pedal beyond the pressure point.Depending on the engine speed and the selec-ted drive program, the automatic transmis-sion shifts to the lowest gear permissible togive optimal acceleration.

X Ease off the accelerator pedal once thedesired speed is reached.The automatic transmission shifts back up.

Kickdown is not available in manual mode M.

Rocking the vehicle freeRocking the vehicle free by shifting back andforth between transmission positions D and Rcan help to free a vehicle that has become stuckin mud or snow.The vehicle's transmission managementrestricts shifting between transmission posi-tions D and R to speeds up to a maximum of5 mph (9 km/h).To shift back and forth between transmissionpositions D and R, move the E-SELECT lever upand down past the point of resistance.

Gliding mode

Gliding mode is characterized by the following:Rthe combustion engine is disconnected fromthe drive train.Rthe engine speed corresponds to the idlingspeed.Rstatus icon C goes out and status icon: isdisplayed in the multifunction display(Y page 110).

In drive program C, you can deactivate and acti-vate gliding mode using the ECO button(Y page 106).Gliding mode can be activated under the follow-ing conditions:Rthe speed is within a suitable range.Rthe course of the road is suitable, e.g. thereare no steep up or downhill gradients.Ryou are no longer depressing the acceleratorpedal.

Gliding mode is deactivated under the followingconditions:Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.Ryou depress the brake pedal.Ryou switch the transmission position usingthe E‑SELECT lever (Y page 109).Ryou switch to drive program RACE, S+ or S(Y page 108).Ryou switch to manual mode M (Y page 112).Ryou leave the suitable speed range.

i If you have selected the "Comfort" settingfor the drive (engine management) in driveprogram I, you can also activate glidingmode.You can find information about this in the Dig-ital Operator's Manual.

M button

112 AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sports transmissionDrivingandparking

X Press M button:.Indicator lamp; lights up. The letter Mappears in the multifunction display. Manualmode M is activated.

Further information on manual mode M(Y page 115).In addition to manual mode M, you can alsoactivate temporary manual drive program(Y page 114).

M Manual Permanent manual gear-shifting

Each time you start the engine using the Smart-Key or the Start/Stop button, drive programC isactivated. For further information about startingthe engine, see (Y page 103).

Steering wheel paddle shifters

Using steering wheel paddle shifters: and;you can:Ractivate the temporary manual drive programand change gear yourself in automatic driveprograms (Y page 114)Rchange gear yourself in manual mode M(Y page 115)Ractivate RACE START (Y page 138)

Automatic drive program

Drive program C (Comfort)Drive program C is characterized by the follow-ing:Rthe vehicle delivers comfortable, economicalhandling characteristics.Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently inforward and reverse gears, unless the accel-erator pedal is depressed fully.Rthe vehicle having improved driving stability,for example on slippery road surfaces.Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from theautomatic transmission shifting up sooner.The vehicle is driven in the low engine speedrange and the wheels are less likely to spin.Rgliding mode is available.Rthe ECO start/stop function is available.

Drive program S (Sport)Drive program S is characterized by the follow-ing:Rthe vehicle exhibits sporty driving character-istics.Rthe automatic transmission shifting up later.the fuel consumption possibly being higher asa result of the later automatic transmissionshift points.Rthe suspension exhibits stiff springing anddamping settings.Rgliding mode is not available.Rthe ECO start/stop function is not available.Rif a period of dynamic driving is followed by anextended phase with a constant acceleratorpedal position, the vehicle shifts up to ahigher gear. This optimizes fuel consumption.

Drive program S+ (Sport Plus)Drive program S+ is characterized by the fol-lowing:Rthe vehicle exhibits particularly sporty drivingcharacteristics.Rthe automatic transmission shifting up later.the fuel consumption possibly being higher asa result of the later automatic transmissionshift points.Rthe suspension exhibits particularly hardspringing and damping settings.

AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sports transmission 113

Drivingandparking

Z

Rgliding mode is not available.Rthe ECO start/stop function is not available.Rif a period of dynamic driving is followed by anextended phase with a constant acceleratorpedal position, the vehicle shifts up to ahigher gear. This optimizes fuel consumption.

Drive program I (Individual)In drive program I the following properties of thedrive program can be selected:Rthe drive (engine management)Rthe transmission managementRESP® (Y page 55)Rthe suspension (Y page 138)Rthe position of the exhaust flap(Y page 106)

Information about configuring drive program Iwith the multimedia system can be found in theDigital Operator's Manual.

Temporary manual drive program

General notesIn this drive program, you can briefly changegear yourself by using the steering wheel paddleshifters. The transmissionmust be in positionD.You can activate the temporary manual driveprogram in the automatic drive program. Theswitching times correspond to the previouslyactive automatic drive program.In addition to temporary manual drive programyou can also activate manual mode M(Y page 115).

Activating

X Shift the transmission to position D.X Pull the left or right steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 113).Temporarymanual drive program is activated.The last active drive program: and selectedgear; appear in the multifunction display.

Shifting gearsIf you pull on the left or right steering wheelpaddle shifter, the automatic transmissionswitches to temporarymanual drive program fora limited amount of time. Depending on whichsteering wheel paddle shifter is pulled, the auto-matic transmission immediately shifts into thenext gear down or up, if permitted.X To shift up: pull the right-hand steeringwheelpaddle shifter (Y page 113).The automatic transmission shifts up to thenext gear.If themaximum engine speed on the currentlyengaged gear is reached and you continue toaccelerate, the automatic transmission auto-matically shifts up in order to prevent enginedamage.The automatic transmissionwill not shift up tothe next gear when the engine speed is verylow.

X To shift down: pull on the left-hand steeringwheel paddle shifter (Y page 113).The automatic transmission shifts down tothe next gear.If the engine exceeds the maximum enginespeed when shifting down, the automatictransmission protects against engine damageby not shifting down.Automatic down shifting occurs when coast-ing.When using kickdown, the automatic trans-mission automatically shifts to a lower gear.

DeactivatingIf you have activated temporary manual driveprogram, it will remain active for a certainamount of time. Under certain conditions theminimum amount of time is extended, e.g. in thecase of lateral acceleration, during an overrunphase or when driving on steep terrain.When temporary manual drive program is deac-tivated, the automatic transmission shifts intothe automatic drive program that was last selec-ted.

114 AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sports transmissionDrivingandparking

You can also deactivate temporary manual driveprogram yourself:X Pull on the right-hand steering wheel paddleshifter and hold it in place (Y page 113).

orX Use the DYNAMIC SELECT controller tochange the drive program (Y page 108).Temporary manual drive program is deactiva-ted. The automatic transmission switchesinto the automatic drive program thatwas lastselected.

Manual mode

General informationInmanualmodeM, you can permanently changegear yourself by using the steering wheel paddleshifters. The transmissionmust be in positionD.The switching times correspond to the previ-ously active automatic drive program.The transmission only shifts down automaticallyat low engine speeds depending on the respec-tive gear.In addition to manual mode M, you can alsoactivate temporary manual drive program(Y page 114).

ActivatingIn manual mode M, you can change gear your-self using the steering wheel paddle shifters ifthe transmission is in position D. You can seethe currently selected drive program and whichgear is engaged in the multifunction display.X Press the M button (Y page 112).M is shown in the multifunction display andthe indicator lamp on the M button lights up.

Shift recommendation

The gearshift recommendations assist you inadopting an economical driving style. The rec-

ommended gear is shown in the multifunctiondisplay.X Shift to recommended gear; according togearshift recommendation: when shown inthe multifunction display of the instrumentcluster.

Display for shift blocked

If the engine speed becomes too high or too lowas a result of shifting gear, you cannot shift gearusing the steering wheel paddle shifters. If youthen pull the left-hand or right-hand steeringwheel paddle shifter, segments: light up redbriefly.

DownshiftingX Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 113).The automatic transmission shifts down tothe next gear if this is permissible.

X Maximum acceleration: pull the left-handsteering wheel paddle shifter until the trans-mission selects the optimum gear for the cur-rent speed.

If you slow down or stop without shifting down,the automatic transmission automatically shiftsdown.

Switching offX Press the M button (Y page 112).The indicator lamp in the button goes out.

RACE drive programThe RACE drive program is designed for maxi-mum performance in terms of shift points andengine speeds. The engine and transmissionshould be at normal operating temperature forthe RACE drive program (Y page 162). Use theRACE drive program on a closed-off race circuit.

AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sports transmission 115

Drivingandparking

Z

The RACE drive program is characterized by thefollowing:RThe vehicle exhibits driving characteristicssuitable for the racetrack.RAll vehicle systems are set for maximumsportiness.RFor optimum performance, the transmissionshifts up later and shifts down sooner.RThe multifunction display shows the manualgearshift program without upshift indicator(Y page 114).RThe gearshift recommendation gives youinformation for slowly warming up the driveassemblies and for adopting a fuel-efficientdriving style (Y page 115). You can follow thegearshift recommendations at all times andshift gear accordingly using the steeringwheel paddle shifters. On the basis of thegearshift recommendation, using the steeringwheel paddle shifters, you can optimize thedrive train and engine operating mode at anytime.RIf you have selected a gear manually, this willbe maintained until the vehicle speed increa-ses or decreases dramatically.RIf you do not follow the gearshift recommen-dations, the automatic shift points may resultin high fuel consumption.RThe suspension exhibits particularly hardspringing and damping settings.RThe transmission shift and response times aresignificantly shorter with more aggressivegear changes. This is particularly the casewhen shifting up. The shift strategy is thusdesigned to interact dynamically with thehigh-revving engineRGliding mode is not available.RThe ECO start/stop function is not available.

116 AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sports transmissionDrivingandparking

Problems with the transmission

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The transmission hasproblems shifting gear.

There is a malfunction in the transmission.The transmission no longer shifts into the next gear.X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshopimmediately.

The acceleration abilityis deteriorating.The transmission no lon-ger shifts into all of thegears.

A sub geartrain has failed.The smoothness of the gear change is restricted.X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshopimmediately.

Refueling

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-sion.You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistance with-out delay.

RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-ing.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.

G WARNINGElectrostatic buildup can create sparks andignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire andexplosion.Always touch the vehicle body before openingthe fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pumpnozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup isthereby discharged.

Do not get into the vehicle again during the refu-eling process. Otherwise, electrostatic chargecould build up again.

! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with agasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignitionif you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.Even small amounts of the wrong fuel couldresult in damage to the fuel system and theengine. Notify a qualified specialist workshopand have the fuel tank and fuel lines drainedcompletely.

! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage thefuel system.

! Take care not to spill any fuel on paintedsurfaces. You could otherwise damage thepaintwork.

Refueling 117

Drivingandparking

Z

! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can.Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injection sys-tem could be blocked by particles from thefuel can.

If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray outwhen the fuel pump nozzle is removed.For further information on fuel and fuel quality(Y page 281).

Refueling

General informationPay attention to the important safety notes(Y page 117).If you unlock/lock the vehicle from the outside,the fuel filler flap also unlocks/locks.The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed8 in the instrument cluster. The arrow nextto the filling pump indicates the side of the vehi-cle.

opening the fuel filler flap

: To open the fuel filler flap; To insert the fuel filler cap= Tire pressure table? Instruction label for fuel type to be refueledX Switch off the engine.X Open the driver's door.The on-board electronics now have status 0.This is the same as the SmartKey having beenremoved.

or, if the SmartKey is inserted in the ignitionlock:X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction ofarrow:.The fuel filler flap swings up.

X Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise andremove it.

X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder on theinside of fuel filler flap;.

X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuelpump nozzle into the tank, hook in place andrefuel.

X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzleswitches off.

Do not add any more fuel after the pump stopsfilling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may leakout.

Closing the fuel filler flapX Replace the cap on the filler neck and turnclockwise until it engages audibly.

X Close the fuel filler flap.Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehi-cle.If you are driving with the fuel filler cap open, the8 reserve fuel warning lamp flashes. A mes-sage appears in the multifunction display(Y page 180).

118 RefuelingDrivingandparking

Problems with fuel and the fuel tank

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Fuel is leaking from thevehicle.

G WARNINGThe fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.Risk of explosion or fire.X Apply the electric parking brake.X Switch off the engine.X Open the driver's door.The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as theSmartKey having been removed.

or, if the SmartKey is inserted in the ignition lock:X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The fuel filler flap cannotbe opened.

The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 60).

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 62).

The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigsmay ignite if they come into contactwithhot parts of the exhaust system or exhaustgas flow. There is a risk of fire.Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate-rials come into contact with parts of the vehi-cle which are hot. Take particular care not topark on dry grassland or harvested grainfields.

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

! If the engine speed is too high or if the vehi-cle is rolling, do not shift the transmissiondirectly from D to R, from R to D or directly toP.Do not open the driver's door while the vehi-cle is inmotion. At low speeds in transmission

Parking 119

Drivingandparking

Z

position D or R, park position P is otherwiseengaged automatically.The transmission could be damaged.

! Always secure the vehicle correctly againstrolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its driv-etrain could be damaged.

To ensure that the vehicle is secured againstrolling away unintentionally:Rthe electric parking brake must be applied.Rthe transmission must be in position P.Rthe SmartKey in the ignition lock must beturned to position 0 and removed from theignition lock, or the Start/Stop button mustbe pressed.Rthe front wheels must be turned towards thecurb on steep uphill or downhill gradients.Rthe empty vehicle must be secured at thefront axle with a wheel chock or similar, forexample, on uphill or downhill gradients.Ra laden vehicle must also be secured at therear axle with a wheel chock or similar, forexample, on uphill or downhill gradients.

Switching off the engine

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches to neu-tral positionNwhen you switch off the engine.The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of anaccident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking positionP. Prevent the parked vehi-cle from rolling away by applying the parkingbrake.

AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sportstransmission! Do not remove the SmartKey while the vehi-cle is in motion. Otherwise, at low speeds,parking lock Pwill be activated automatically.Do not open the driver's door while the vehi-cle is in motion. At low speeds, transmissionposition P is engaged automatically.This could cause damage to the transmissionand the parking lock.

X Apply the electric parking brake.X Shift the transmission to P with the button inthe center console.

Using the Start/Stop buttonX Press the Start/Stop button (Y page 102)The engine stops and all the indicator lamps inthe instrument cluster go out.When the driver's door is closed, this corre-sponds to key position 1. When the driver'sdoor is open, this corresponds to key position0: "Key removed".If you switch the engine off with the trans-mission in position R or D, the transmissionautomatically shifts to N.If you move the E-SELECT lever to N beforeswitching off the engine, the transmissionremains in N for approximately 30 minutes.If you open the driver's or front-passengerdoor during this period, the transmissionautomatically shifts to P.The engine can be switched off in an emer-gency while the vehicle is in motion by press-ing and holding the Start/Stop button forthree seconds. This function operates inde-pendently of the ECO start/stop automaticengine switch-off function.

Using the SmartKeyX Turn the SmartKey to position0 in the ignitionlock and remove it.The immobilizer is activated.If you move the E-SELECT lever to N beforeswitching off the engine, the transmissionremains in N for approximately 30 minutes. Ifyou open the driver's or front-passenger doorduring this period, the transmission automat-ically shifts to P.The transmission remains in N if:Rthe SmartKey is in the ignition lock andRyou use the E‑SELECT lever to shift thetransmission to N before switching theengine off

This still applies if you open the driver's orfront-passenger door.Further information on transmission positionN when operating with a SmartKey is availa-ble under "Car wash" (Y page 234).

120 ParkingDrivingandparking

Electric parking brake

General notes

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The function of the electric parking brake isdependent on the on-board voltage. If the on-board voltage is low or there is a malfunction inthe system, it may not be possible to apply thereleased parking brake.X If this is the case, only park the vehicle onlevel ground and secure it to prevent it rollingaway.

X Shift the automatic transmission to positionP.

It may not be possible to release an appliedparking brake if the on-board voltage is low orthere is a malfunction in the system. Contact aqualified specialist workshop.The electric parking brake performs a functiontest at regular intervals while the engine isswitched off. The sounds that can be heardwhilethis is occurring are normal.

Applying or releasing manually

X To apply: push handle:.When the electric parking brake is applied,the redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp lights up in the instru-ment cluster.The electric parking brake can also be appliedwhen the SmartKey is in position 0.

X To release: pull handle:.The redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp in the instrument clustergoes out.

The electric parking brake can only be releasedif:Rthe ignition was switched on using the Start/Stop button orRthe SmartKey is in position 1 or 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 103)

Applying automaticallyThe electric parking brake is automaticallyapplied when the transmission is in position Pand:Rthe engine is switched off orRthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and thedriver's door is opened

To prevent the electric parking brake from beingautomatically applied, pull handle:.The electric parking brake is also engaged auto-matically if:RDISTRONIC PLUS brings the vehicle to astandstill orRthe HOLD function is keeping the vehicle sta-tionary

Parking 121

Drivingandparking

Z

In addition, at least one of the following condi-tions must be fulfilled:Rthere is a system malfunctionRthe power supply is insufficientRthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy periodThe redF (USA only) or! (Canada only)indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lightsup.The electric parking brake is not automaticallyengaged if the engine is switched off by the ECOstart/stop function.

Releasing automaticallyYour vehicle's electric parking brake is auto-matically released if all of the following condi-tions are met:Rthe engine is running.Rthe transmission is in position D or R.Rthe seat belt has been fastened.Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.If the transmission is in position R, the tailgatemust be closed.If your seat belt is not fastened, the followingconditions must be fulfilled to automaticallyrelease the electric parking brake:Rthe driver's door is closed.Ryou have shifted out of transmission positionP or you have previously driven faster than2 mph (3 km/h).

Ensure that you do not depress the acceleratorpedal unintentionally. Otherwise the parkingbrake will be released and the vehicle will startto move.

Emergency brakingThe vehicle can also be braked during an emer-gency by using the electric parking brake.X While driving, push handle: of the electricparking brake (Y page 121).The vehicle is braked as long as you keephandle: of the electric parking brakepressed. The longer electric parking brakehandle: is depressed, the greater the brak-ing force.

During braking:Ra warning tone soundsRthe Please Release Parking Brake mes-sage appearsRthe redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp in the instrument clusterflashes

When the vehicle has been braked to a stand-still, the electric parking brake is engaged.

Parking the vehicle for a long period

General notesIf you leave the vehicle parked for longer thanfour weeks, the battery may be damaged byexhaustive discharging.If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than sixweeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as aresult of lack of use.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seekadvice.

i You can obtain information about tricklechargers from a qualified specialist work-shop.

Trickle charging the on-board electricalsystem battery

The battery may drain if the vehicle is left sta-tionary for long periods. In this case, Mercedes-Benz recommends attaching the trickle chargerto the 12 V socket in the cargo compartment. Atrickle charger can be obtained from an author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center, for example.X Switch the ignition off.X Open the tailgate.

122 ParkingDrivingandparking

X Connect the cable provided in the cargo com-partment to the trickle charger.

X Connect the trickle charger to 12V socket:.Consult themanufacturer's operating instruc-tions on how to do so.

The tailgate can be closed, even if a tricklecharger is connected. Make sure that the con-nector for both the connector cables is outsideof the vehicle.The connector can then separate if the vehicle ismoved, even if you forget to disconnect the con-nector cables. This prevents damaging thecables and the trickle charger.A trickle charger connected to 12 V socket:only maintains the current charge level of thevehicle's electrical system battery. If the vehi-cle's electrical system battery is discharged, itneeds to be charged with a battery charger.

Driving tips

General driving tips

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf you operate mobile communication equip-ment while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate this equipment when the vehicleis stationary.

Observe the legal requirements for the countryin which you are driving. Some jurisdictions pro-hibit the driver from using a mobile phone whiledriving a vehicle.If you make a call while driving, always usehands-free mode. Only operate the telephone

when the traffic situation permits. If you areunsure, pull over to a safe location and stopbefore operating the telephone.Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers adistance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per sec-ond.

Drive sensibly – save fuelObserve the following tips to save fuel:X The tires should always be inflated to the rec-ommended tire pressure.

X Remove unnecessary loads.X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.X Have all maintenance work carried out asindicated by the service intervals in the Main-tenance Booklet or by the service interval dis-play.

Fuel consumption also increaseswhen driving incold weather, in stop-start traffic and in hilly ter-rain.

Drinking and driving

G WARNINGDrinking and driving and/or taking drugs anddriving are very dangerous combinations.Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs canaffect your reflexes, perceptions and judg-ment.The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci-dent is greatly increased when you drink ortake drugs and drive.Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allowanyone to drive who has been drinking or tak-ing drugs.

Emission control

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.

Driving tips 123

Drivingandparking

Z

Certain engine systems are designed to keepthe level of poisonous components in exhaustfumes within legal limits.These systems only work at peak efficiency ifthey are serviced exactly in accordance with themanufacturer's specifications. Always havework on the engine carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this purpose. In particular, workrelevant to safety or on safety-related systemsmust be carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.The engine settings must not be changed underany circumstances. Furthermore, all specificservice work must be carried out at regularintervals and in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz service requirements. Details can be foundin the Maintenance Booklet.

Brakes

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional engine brak-ing on a slippery road surface.

Downhill gradients! On long and steep gradients, you mustreduce the load on the brakes by shifting to alower gear in good time. This allows you totake advantage of the engine's braking effect.This helps you to avoid overheating thebrakes and wearing them out excessively.When you take advantage of engine braking, adrive wheel may not turn for some time, e.g.on a slippery road surface. This could causedamage to the drive train. This type of damageis not covered by the Mercedes-Benz war-ranty.

This also applies if cruise control, DISTRONICPLUS or SPEEDTRONIC are activated.

Heavy and light loads

G WARNINGIf you rest your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving, the braking system can overheat. Thisincreases the stopping distance and can evencause the braking system to fail. There is arisk of an accident.Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Neverdepress the brake pedal and the acceleratorpedal at the same time.

! Depressing the brake pedal constantlyresults in excessive and premature wear tothe brake pads.

If the brakes have been subjected to a heavyload, do not stop the vehicle immediately. Driveon for a short while. This allows the airflow tocool the brakes more quickly.

Wet roadsIf you have driven for a long time in heavy rainwithout braking, there may be a delayed reac-tion from the brakes when braking for the firsttime. This may also occur after the vehicle hasbeen washed or driven through deep water.You have to depress the brake pedal morefirmly. Maintain a greater distance from thevehicle in front.After driving on a wet road or having the vehiclewashed, brake firmly while paying attention tothe traffic conditions. This will warm up thebrake discs, thereby drying them more quicklyand protecting them against corrosion.

Limited braking performance on salt-treated roadsIf you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt resi-due may form on the brake discs and brakepads. This can result in a significantly longerbraking distance.RIn order to prevent any salt build-up, apply thebrakes occasionally while paying attention tothe traffic conditions.RCarefully depress the brake pedal and thebeginning and end of a journey.RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicleahead.

124 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

Servicing the brakes! The brake fluid level may be too low, if:Rif the red brake warning lamp lights up inthe instrument cluster andRyou hear a warning tone while the engine isrunning

Observe additional warning messages in themultifunction display.The brake fluid level may be too low due tobrake pad wear or leaking brake lines.Have the brake system checked immediately.Consult a qualified specialist workshop toarrange this.

! A function or performance test should onlybe carried out on a 2-axle dynamometer. Ifyou wish to operate the vehicle on such adynamometer, please consult a qualified spe-cialist workshop in advance. You could oth-erwise damage the drive train or the brakesystem.

! The ESP® system operates automatically.The engine and the ignition must therefore beswitched off (the SmartKey must be in posi-tion 0 or 1 in the ignition lock or the Start/Stop button must be in position 0 or 1) if theelectric parking brake is tested on a brakedynamometer.Braking triggered automatically by ESP® maycause severe damage to the brake system.

All checks and maintenance work on the brakesystem must be carried out at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.Have brake pads installed and brake fluidreplaced at a qualified specialist workshop.If the brake system has only been subject tomoderate loads, you should test the functional-ity of your brakes at regular intervals.Information on BAS (Brake Assist) (Y page 52).For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends only installing the following brake disksand brake pads/linings:Rbrake disks that have been approved byMercedes-BenzRbrake pads/linings that have been approvedbyMercedes-Benz or that are of an equivalentstandard of quality

Other brake disks or brake pads/linings cancompromise the safety of your vehicle.

Always replace all brake disks and brake pads/linings on an axle at the same time. Alwaysinstall new brake pads/linings when replacingbrake disks.The vehicle is equipped with lightweight brakedisks to which the wheel assembly with rim andthreaded connection is matched.The use of brake disks other than thoseapproved by Mercedes-Benz can change thetrack width and is subject to approval, if appli-cable.Shock-type loads when handling the brakediscs, such as when changing wheels, can leadto a reduction in comfort when driving with light-weight brake discs. Avoid shock-type loads onthe lightweight brake disks, particularly on thebrake plate.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only usebrake fluid that has been specially approved foryour vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which corre-sponds to an equivalent quality standard. Brakefluid which has not been approved forMercedes-Benz vehicles or which is not of anequivalent quality could affect your vehicle'soperating safety.

AMG high-performance and ceramicbrakesThe AMG brake systems are designed for heavyloads. This may lead to noise when braking. Thiswill depend on:RSpeedRBraking forceREnvironmental conditions, such as tempera-ture and humidity

The wear of individual components of the brakesystem, such as the brake pads/linings or brakediscs, depends on the individual driving styleand operating conditions.For this reason, it is impossible to state a mile-age thatwill be valid under all circumstances. Anaggressive driving style will lead to high wear.You can obtain more information on this from aqualified specialist workshop.New and replaced brake pads and discs onlyreach their optimum braking effect after severalhundred kilometers of driving. Compensate forthis by applying greater force to the brake pedal.Keep this in mind, and adapt your driving andbraking accordingly during this break-in period.Excessive heavy braking results in correspond-ingly high brake wear. Observe the brake wear

Driving tips 125

Drivingandparking

Z

warning lamp in the instrument cluster and noteany brake status messages in the multifunctiondisplay. Especially for high performance driving,it is important to maintain and have the brakesystem checked regularly.

Driving on wet roads

HydroplaningIf water has accumulated to a certain depth onthe road surface, there is a danger of hydro-planing occurring, even if:Ryou drive at low speedsRthe tires have adequate tread depthFor this reason, in the event of heavy rain or inconditions in which hydroplaning may occur,you must drive in the following manner:Rlower your speedRavoid rutsRavoid sudden steering movementsRbrake carefully

Driving on flooded roads! Do not drive through flooded areas. Checkthe depth of any water before driving throughit. Drive slowly through standing water. Oth-erwise, watermay enter the vehicle interior orthe engine compartment. This can damagethe electronic components in the engine orthe automatic transmission. Water can alsobe drawn in by the engine's air suction nozzlesand this can cause engine damage.

Winter driving

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional engine brak-ing on a slippery road surface.

G DANGERIf the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequateventilation is not possible, poisonous gasessuch as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter thevehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehiclebecomes trapped in snow. There is a risk offatal injury.If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heatingrunning, make sure the exhaust pipe and areaaround the vehicle are clear of snow. Toensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open awindow on the side of the vehicle that is notfacing into the wind.

Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop at the onset of winter.Drive particularly carefully on slippery road sur-faces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering andbraking maneuvers. Do not use cruise control.If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot bestopped when moving at low speed:X Shift the transmission to position N.The outside temperature indicator is notdesigned to serve as an ice-warning device andis therefore unsuitable for that purpose.Changes in the outside temperature are dis-played after a short delay.Indicated temperatures just above the freezingpoint do not guarantee that the road surface isfree of ice. The roadmay still be icy, especially inwooded areas or on bridges. The vehicle couldskid if you fail to adapt your driving style. Alwaysadapt your driving style and drive at a speed tosuit the prevailing weather conditions.You should pay special attention to road condi-tions when temperatures are around freezingpoint.For more information on driving with snowchains, see (Y page 256).For more information on driving with summertires, see (Y page 256).Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" sec-tion (Y page 256).

126 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

Driving systems

Cruise control

General notesCruise control maintains a constant road speedfor you. It brakes automatically in order to avoidexceeding the set speed. Change into a lowergear in good time on long and steep downhillgradients. This is especially important if thevehicle is laden. By doing so, you will make useof the braking effect of the engine. This relievesthe load on the brake system and prevents thebrakes from overheating and wearing tooquickly.Use cruise control only if road and traffic con-ditions make it appropriate to maintain a steadyspeed for a prolonged period. You can store anyroad speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).

Cruise control lever

: To activate or increase speed; To activate or reduce speed= To deactivate cruise control? To activate at the current speed/last stored

speedWhen you activate cruise control, the storedspeed is shown in the multifunction display forfive seconds. In addition, theé symbolappears in the multifunction display. In thespeedometer, the segments between the storedspeed and the maximum speed light up.

Storing and maintaining the currentspeed

You can store the current speed if you are driv-ing faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.X Briefly press the cruise control lever up: ordown;.

X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.Cruise control is activated. The vehicle auto-matically maintains the stored speed.

i Cruise control may be unable to maintainthe stored speed on uphill gradients. Thestored speed is resumed when the gradientevens out. Cruise control maintains thestored speed on downhill gradients by auto-matically applying the brakes.

Storing, maintaining and calling up aspeed

G WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it is lowerthan the current speed, the vehicle deceler-ates. If you do not know the stored speed, thevehicle could decelerate unexpectedly. Thereis a risk of an accident.Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-tions before calling up the stored speed. If youdo not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.

Driving systems 127

Drivingandparking

Z

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou:.

X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.The first time cruise control is activated, itstores the current speed or regulates thespeed of the vehicle to the previously storedspeed.

Setting a speed

Keep in mind that it may take a brief momentuntil the vehicle has accelerated or braked tothe speed set.X Press the cruise control lever up: for ahigher speed or down; for a lower speed.

X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-ments (1 km/h increments): briefly pressthe cruise control lever up: or down; tothe pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever is pressedup: or down; the last speed stored isincreased or reduced.

X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-ments (10 km/h increments): briefly pressthe cruise control lever up: or down; tothe pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever is pressedup: or down; the last speed stored isincreased or reduced.

i Cruise control is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. If you acceler-ate to overtake, cruise control adjusts thevehicle's speed to the last speed stored afteryou have finished overtaking.

Deactivating cruise control

There are several ways to deactivate cruise con-trol:X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-wards:.

orX Brake.Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:Ryou engage the electric parking brakeRyou are driving at less than 20mph (30 km/h)RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®Ryou shift the transmission to position N whiledriving

If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear awarning tone. You will see the Cruise Con‐trol Offmessage in the multifunction displayfor approximately five seconds.

i When you switch off the engine, the lastspeed stored is cleared.

DISTRONIC PLUS

General notesDISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and auto-matically helps you maintain the distance to thevehicle detected in front. Vehicles are detectedwith the aid of the radar sensor system.DISTRONIC PLUS brakes automatically so thatthe set speed is not exceeded.

128 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Change into a lower gear in good time on longand steep downhill gradients. This is especiallyimportant if the vehicle is laden. By doing so, youwill make use of the braking effect of the engine.This relieves the load on the brake system andprevents the brakes from overheating and wear-ing too quickly.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a risk ofa collision, you will be warned visually andacoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot prevent acollision without your intervention. An intermit-tent warning tone will then sound and the dis-tance warning lamp will light up in the instru-ment cluster. Brake immediately in order toincrease the distance to the vehicle in front ortake evasive action provided it is safe to do so.DISTRONIC PLUS operates in range between0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h).Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving onroads with steep gradients.As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves, itcan resemble the radar detectors of the respon-sible authorities. You can refer to the relevantchapter in the Operator's Manual if questionsare asked about this.

i USA only: This device has been approved bythe FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". Theradar sensor is intended for use in an auto-motive radar system only. Removal, tamper-ing, or altering of the device will void any war-ranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Donot tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to this devicecould void the user's authority to operate theequipment.

i Canada only: This device complies withRSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful inter-ference, and2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Removal, tampering, or altering of the devicewill void any warranties, and is not permitted.Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to this devicecould void the user's authority to operate theequipment.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS does not react to:Rpeople or animalsRstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop-ped or parked vehiclesRoncoming and crossing trafficAs a result, DISTRONIC PLUSmay neither givewarnings nor intervene in such situations.There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly iden-tify other road users and complex traffic sit-uations.In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may:Rgive an unnecessary warning and thenbrake the vehicleRneither give a warning nor interveneRaccelerate or brake unexpectedlyThere is a risk of an accident.Continue to drive carefully and be ready tobrake, in particular when warned to do so byDISTRONIC PLUS.

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with upto 50% of themaximumpossible deceleration.If this braking force is insufficient, DISTRONICPLUS warns you visually and audibly. There isa risk of an accident.In such cases, apply the brakes yourself andtry to take evasive action.

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function isactivated, the vehicle brakes automatically incertain situations.To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function inthe following or other similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

Driving systems 129

Drivingandparking

Z

If you fail to adapt your driving style, DISTRONICPLUS can neither reduce the risk of accident noroverride the laws of physics. DISTRONIC PLUScannot take into account the road, traffic andweather conditions. DISTRONIC PLUS is only anaid. You are responsible for the distance to thevehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking ingood time and for staying in your lane.Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS:Rin road and traffic conditions which do notallow you to maintain a constant speed e.g. inheavy traffic or on winding roadsRon slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-erating could cause the drive wheels to losetraction and the vehicle could then skidRwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,heavy rain or snow

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow vehi-cles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or vehi-cles driving on a different line.In particular, the detection of obstacles can beimpaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is snow or heavy rainRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, for exam-ple, in parking garages

If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a vehiclein front, DISTRONIC PLUS may unexpectedlyaccelerate the vehicle to the stored speed.This speed may:Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter lane oran exit laneRbe so high in the right lane that you pass vehi-cles driving on the left (left-hand drive coun-tries)Rbe so high in the left lane that you pass vehi-cles driving on the right (right-hand drivecountries)

If there is a change of drivers, advise the newdriver of the speed stored.

Cruise control lever

: To activate or increase speed; To activate or reduce speed= To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS? To activate at the current speed/last stored

speedA To set the specified minimum distance

Activating DISTRONIC PLUS

Activation conditionsIn order to activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the fol-lowing conditions must be fulfilled:Rthe engine must be started. It may take up totwo minutes after pulling away beforeDISTRONIC PLUS is operational.Rthe electric parking brake must be released.RESP® must be active, but not intervening.RActive Parking Assist must not be activated.Rthe transmission must be in position D.Rthe driver's door must be closed when youshift from P to D or your seat belt must befastened.Rthe front-passenger door and rear doorsmustbe closed.

130 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Activating

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou;, up: or down= .DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.

X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-ments (1 km/h increments): briefly pressthe cruise control lever up: to the pressurepoint for a higher speed, or down= for alower speed.Every time the cruise control lever is pressedup or down, the last speed stored is increasedor reduced.

orX To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-ments (10 km/h increments): briefly pressthe cruise control lever up: past the pres-sure point for a higher speed, or down= fora lower speed.Every time the cruise control lever is pressedup or down, the last speed stored is increasedor reduced.

X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of thevehicle in front, but only up to the desiredstored speed.

i If you do not fully release the acceleratorpedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS Passive mes-sage appears in themultifunction display. Theset distance to a slower-moving vehicle infront will then not be maintained. You will bedriving at the speed you determine by theposition of the accelerator pedal.

You can also activate DISTRONIC PLUS whenstationary. The lowest speed that can be set is20 mph (30 km/h).X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou; or press it up: or down=.DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.

Activating at the current speed/laststored speedG WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it differsfrom the current speed, the vehicle acceler-ates or decelerates. If you do not know thestored speed, the vehicle could accelerate orbrake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-tions before calling up the stored speed. If youdo not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou:.

X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first time itis activated, the current speed is stored. Oth-erwise, it sets the vehicle cruise speed to thepreviously stored value.

Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

Pulling away and driving

Driving systems 131

Drivingandparking

Z

X If you want to pull away with DISTRONICPLUS: remove your foot from the brake pedal.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou:.

orX Accelerate briefly.Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speedto that of the vehicle in front. If no vehicle isdetected in front, your vehicle accelerates tothe set speed.

i The vehicle can also pull away when it isfacing an unidentified obstacle or is driving ona different line from another vehicle. The vehi-cle then brakes automatically. There is a riskof an accident. Be ready to brake at all times.

If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUSoperates in the same way as cruise control.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle infront has slowed down, it brakes your vehicle. Inthis way, the distance you have selected ismain-tained.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-movingvehicle in front, it increases the driving speed.However, the vehicle is only accelerated up tothe speed you have stored.

Selecting the drive programDISTRONIC PLUS supports a sporty driving stylewhen you have selected the S or S+ drive pro-gram (see the vehicle Operator's Manual).Acceleration behind the vehicle in front or to theset speed is then noticeably more dynamic.When you select the C drive program, the vehi-cle accelerates more gently. This setting is rec-ommended in stop-and-start traffic.

Changing lanesIf you change to the passing lane, DISTRONICPLUS supports you when:Ryou are driving faster than 45 mph (70 km/h)Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signalRDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger ofcollision

If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle isaccelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted ifchanging lanes takes too long or if the distancebetween your vehicle and the vehicle in frontbecomes too small.

i When you change lanes, DISTRONIC PLUSmonitors the left lane on left-hand-drive vehi-

cles or the right lane on right-hand-drive vehi-cles.

StoppingG WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, even if it is brakedonly by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supply.RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivatedwith the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehi-cle occupant or from outside the vehicle.Rthe electrical system in the engine com-partment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnected.Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed,e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

There is a risk of an accident.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offDISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.

For further information on deactivatingDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 133).If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle infront is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until it isstationary.Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains sta-tionary and you do not need to depress thebrake.

i After a time, the electric parking brakesecures the vehicle and relieves the servicebrake.

i Depending on the specified minimum dis-tance, your vehicle will come to a standstill ata sufficient distance behind the vehicle infront. The specified minimum distance is setusing the control on the cruise control lever.

The electric parking brake secures the vehicleautomatically if DISTRONIC PLUS is activatedwhen the vehicle is stationary and:Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and thedriver's door is open.Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-matically switched off by the ECO start/stopfunction.

132 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Ra system malfunction occurs.Rthe power supply is not sufficient.If a malfunction occurs, the transmission mayalso shift into position P automatically.

Setting a speed

X Press the cruise control lever up: for ahigher speed or down; for a lower speed.

X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-ments (1 km/h increments): briefly pressthe cruise control lever up: or down; tothe pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever is pressedup: or down; the last speed stored isincreased or reduced.

X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-ments (10 km/h increments): briefly pressthe cruise control lever up: or down; tothe pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever is pressedup: or down;, the last speed stored isincreased or reduced.

i If you accelerate to overtake, DISTRONICPLUS adjusts the vehicle's speed to the lastspeed stored after you have finished overtak-ing.

Sets a specified minimum distanceYou can set the specified minimum distance forDISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time spanbetween one and two seconds. With this func-tion, you can set the minimum distance thatDISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in front,dependent on vehicle speed. You can see thisdistance in the multifunction display(Y page 134).

i Make sure that you maintain the minimumdistance to the vehicle in front as required by

law. Adjust the distance to the vehicle in frontif necessary.

X To increase: turn control; in direction=.DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greaterdistance between your vehicle and the vehiclein front.

X To decrease: turn control; in direction:.DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorterdistance between your vehicle and the vehiclein front.

Deactivates DISTRONIC PLUS

There are several ways to deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS:X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-wards:.

orX Brake, unless the vehicle is stationaryIf you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, you will seethe DISTRONIC PLUS Off message in the mul-tifunction display for approximately five sec-onds.

i The last speed stored remains stored untilyou switch off the engine.

i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal.

Driving systems 133

Drivingandparking

Z

DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactivatedif:Ryou engage the electric parking brake or if thevehicle is automatically securedwith the elec-tric parking brakeRESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N positionRyou pull the cruise control lever towards youin order to pull away and the front-passengerdoor or one of the rear doors is openRthe vehicle has skiddedRyou activate Active Parking AssistIf DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will heara warning tone. You will see the DISTRONICPLUS Offmessage in the multifunction displayfor approximately five seconds.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Displays in the speedometer

If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front,segments between the speed of the vehicle infront: and stored speed; light up.

i For design reasons, the speed displayed inthe speedometer may differ slightly from thespeed set for DISTRONIC PLUS.

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deacti-vatedOn the on-board computer, you can select theassistance graphics display.

: Vehicle in front, if detected; Distance indicator, current distance to the

vehicle in front= Specified minimum distance to the vehicle

in front; adjustable? Own vehicleX Select the Assistance Graphic functionusing the on-board computer (Y page 159).

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activa-ted

: DISTRONIC PLUS active (text only appearswhen the cruise control lever is actuated)

; Vehicle in front, if detected= Specified minimum distance to the vehicle

in front; adjustable? Own vehicleX Select the Assistance Graphic functionusing the on-board computer (Y page 159).

You will see the stored speed for about five sec-onds when you activate DISTRONIC PLUS.

134 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

General notesPay particular attention in the following trafficsituations:RCornering, going into and coming out of abendRVehicles traveling on a different lineROther vehicles changing lanesRNarrow vehiclesRObstructions and stationary vehiclesRCrossing vehiclesIn such situations, brake if necessary.DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated.

Cornering, going into and coming out of abend

The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehi-cles when cornering is limited. Your vehicle maybrake unexpectedly or late.

Vehicles traveling on a different line

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles trav-eling on a different line. The distance to thevehicle in front will be too short.

Other vehicles changing lanes

DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehiclecutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle will betoo short.

Narrow vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the vehi-cle in front on the edge of the road, because ofits narrow width. The distance to the vehicle infront will be too short.

Obstructions and stationary vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obstaclesor stationary vehicles. If, for example, the detec-ted vehicle turns a corner and reveals an obsta-

Driving systems 135

Drivingandparking

Z

cle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONIC PLUS willnot brake for these.

Crossing vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detect vehi-cles that are crossing your lane. ActivatingDISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights with crossingtraffic, for example, could cause your vehicle topull away unintentionally.

HOLD

General notesThe HOLD function can assist the driver in thefollowing situations:Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep slopesRwhen maneuvering on steep slopesRwhen waiting in trafficThe vehicle is kept stationary without the driverhaving to depress the brake pedal.The braking effect is canceled and the HOLDfunction deactivated when you depress theaccelerator pedal to pull away.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, it can still roll awaydespite being braked by the HOLD function if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supply.Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated bypressing the accelerator pedal or the brakepedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

Rthe electrical system in the engine com-partment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnectedThere is a risk of an accident.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe HOLD function and secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function isactivated, the vehicle brakes automatically incertain situations.To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function inthe following or other similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

Deactivating the HOLD function (Y page 137).

Activation conditionsYou can activate the HOLD function if:Rthe vehicle is stationaryRthe engine is running or if it has been auto-matically switched off by the ECO start/stopfunctionRthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt isfastenedRthe electric parking brake is releasedRthe transmission is in position D, R or N

Activating the HOLD function

136 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

X Make sure that the activation conditions aremet.

X Depress the brake pedal.X Quickly depress the brake pedal furtheruntil: HOLD appears in the multifunctiondisplay.The HOLD function is activated. You canrelease the brake pedal.

i If depressing the brake pedal the first timedoes not activate the HOLD function, waitbriefly and then try again.

Deactivating the HOLD functionThe HOLD function is deactivated automaticallyif:Ryou accelerate and the transmission is inposition D or R.Ryou shift the transmission to position P.Ryou apply the brakes again with a certainamount of pressure until HOLD disappearsfrom the multifunction display.Ryou secure the vehicle using the electric park-ing brake.

i After a time, the electric parking brakesecures the vehicle and relieves the servicebrake.

The electric parking brake secures the vehicleautomatically if the HOLD function is activatedwhen the vehicle is stationary and:Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and thedriver's door is open.Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-matically switched off by the ECO start/stopfunction.Ra system malfunction occurs.Rthe power supply is not sufficient.If the electric parking brake is not operational, ahorn will sound at regular intervals. The HOLDfunction must then be deactivated.If a malfunction occurs, then the transmissionmay be shifted into position P automatically.The Brake Immediately message may alsoappear in the multifunction display.X Immediately depress the brake firmly until thewarning message in the multifunction displaygoes out.

The HOLD function is deactivated. The hornsounds at regular intervals if you have switched

off the engine, released the seat belt andopened the driver's doorwith theHOLD functionactivated. The sounding of the horn alerts you tothe fact that the HOLD function is still activated.If you attempt to lock the vehicle, the tonebecomes louder. The vehicle cannot be lockeduntil you have deactivated the HOLD function.

i After switching off the engine, it can only bestarted again once you have deactivated theHOLD function.

RACE START

Important safety notesi RACE START must not be used on normalroads. RACE START must only be activatedand used on dedicated road circuits, outsideof public road use.

RACE START enables optimal acceleration froma standing start. For this, a suitably high-griproad surface is required, along with the tires andvehicle being in proper operating condition.

G WARNINGIf you use RACE START, individual tires maystart to spin and the vehicle could skid.Depending on the selected ESP® mode, thereis an increased risk of skidding and having anaccident. Make sure that no persons, animalsor obstacles are within range of the vehicle.

i Observe the safety notes on driving safetysystems (Y page 52).Be sure to read the safety notes and informa-tion on ESP® (Y page 55).

Conditions for activationYou can activate RACE START if:Rthe doors are closed.Rthe engine is running and the engine andtransmission are at operating temperature.This is the case when the oil temperaturegauge in the multifunction display is shown inwhite (Y page 162).RESP® is functioning correctly. (Y page 56)Rthe steering wheel is in the straight-aheadposition.

Driving systems 137

Drivingandparking

Z

Rthe vehicle is stationary and the brake pedal isdepressed sufficiently (left foot).Rthe transmission is in position D.Rdrive program S, S+ or RACE is selected(Y page 108).

Activating RACE STARTi When manual mode (Y page 115) is active,the transmission automatically shifts up toRACE START in the drive program. This func-tion supports maximum acceleration withRACE START. After going through an acceler-ating process once from a stationary position,this function is automatically deactivated.

X Depress the brake pedal with your left footand keep it depressed.

X Pull and hold both steeringwheel paddle shift-ers.

X The RACE START Confirm: Paddle UPCancel: Paddle DOWN message appears inthe multifunction display.

X Release both steering wheel paddle shifters.i If the activation conditions are no longer ful-filled, RACE START is canceled. The RACESTART Not Possible See Operator'sManualmessage appears in themultifunctiondisplay.

X To cancel: pull the left steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 113).

orX To confirm: pull the right steering wheel pad-dle shifter (Y page 113).The RACE START Available Depress gaspedal.message appears in themultifunctiondisplay.i If you do not depress the accelerator pedalwithin a few seconds, RACE START is can-celed. The RACE START Canceled messageappears in the multifunction display.

X Fully depress the accelerator pedal.The engine speed is increased.The RACE START Release brake to startmessage appears in themultifunction display.i If you do not release the brake pedal withina short time, RACE START will be canceled.

The RACE START Canceled messageappears in the multifunction display.

X Take your foot off the brake, but keep theaccelerator pedal depressed.The vehicle pulls away at maximum acceler-ation.The RACE START Activemessage appears inthe multifunction display.

RACE START is deactivated when the vehiclereaches a speed of approximately 30 mph (Can-ada: 50 km/h).RACE START is deactivated immediately if yourelease the accelerator pedal during RACESTART or if any of the activation conditions areno longer fulfilled. The RACE START Not Pos‐sible See Operator's Manual or RACESTART Canceled message appears in the mul-tifunction display.

i If RACE START is used repeatedly within ashort period of time, it is only available againafter the vehicle has been driven a certaindistance.

AMG adaptive sport suspension sys-tem

General notesThe electronically controlled damping systemworks continuously. This improves drivingsafety and ride comfort.The damping is tuned individually to each wheeland depends on:Ryour driving style, e.g. sportyRthe road surface condition, e.g. bumpsRyour individual selection of Sport, Sport + orComfort

The suspension setting is adjusted using thecorresponding button in the center console.

i The mode can also be set using theDYNAMIC SELECT controller (Y page 108).

Each time you start the engine with the Smart-Key or the Start/Stop button, Comfort mode isactivated. For further information about startingthe engine, see (Y page 103).

138 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Sport mode

The firmer setting of the suspension tuning inSport mode ensures even better contact withthe road. Select this mode when employing asporty driving style, e.g. on winding countryroads.X Press button: once.Indicator lamp= lights up. You have selectedSport mode.The AMG Suspension System SPORT mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

Sport + modeThe very firm setting of the suspension setting inSport + mode ensures the best possible contactwith the road. Select this mode only when driv-ing on race circuits.If indicator lamps; and= are off:X Press button: twice.Indicator lamps; and= light up. You haveselected Sport + mode.The AMG Suspension System SPORT +mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

If indicator lamp= lights up:X Press button: once.Second indicator lamp; lights up. You haveselected Sport + mode.The AMG Suspension System SPORT +mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

Comfort modeIn Comfort mode, the driving characteristics ofyour vehicle are more comfortable. Select thismode if you favor a more comfortable drivingstyle, but also when driving fast on straightroads, e.g. highways.

X Press button: repeatedly until indicatorlamps; and= go out.You have selected Comfort mode.The AMG Suspension System COMFORTmes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

PARKTRONIC

Important safety notesPARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid withultrasonic sensors. It monitors the area aroundyour vehicle using six sensors in the frontbumper and four sensors in the rear bumper.PARKTRONIC indicates visually and audibly thedistance between your vehicle and an object.PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a replace-ment for your attention to your immediate sur-roundings. You are always responsible for safemaneuvering, parking and exiting a parkingspace. When maneuvering, parking or pullingout of a parking space, make sure that there areno persons, animals or objects in the area inwhich you are maneuvering.

! When parking, pay particular attention toobjects above or below the sensors, such asflower pots or trailer drawbars. PARKTRONICdoes not detect such objects when they are inthe immediate vicinity of the vehicle. Youcould damage the vehicle or the objects.The sensors may not detect snow and otherobjects that absorb ultrasonic waves.Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic carwash, the compressed-air brakes on a truckor a pneumatic drill could cause PARKTRONICto malfunction.PARKTRONIC may not function correctly onuneven terrain.

PARKTRONIC is activated automatically whenyou:Rswitch on the ignitionRshift the transmission to position D, R or NPARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lowerspeeds.

Driving systems 139

Drivingandparking

Z

Range of the sensors

General notesPARKTRONIC does not take objects into con-sideration that are:Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people, ani-mals or objects.Rabove the detection range, e.g. overhangingloads, truck overhangs or loading ramps.

: Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side(example)

The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or slush.They can otherwise not function correctly. Cleanthe sensors regularly, taking care not to scratchor damage them (Y page 237).

Front sensors

Center Approx. 40 in (approx.100 cm)

Corners Approx. 24 in (approx.60 cm)

Rear sensors

Center Approx. 48 in (approx.120 cm)

Corners Approx. 32 in (approx.80 cm)

Minimum distance

Center Approx. 8 in (approx. 20 cm)

Corners Approx. 6 in (approx. 15 cm)

If there is an obstacle within this range, the rel-evant warning displays light up and a warningtone sounds. If the distance falls below the min-imum, the distance may no longer be shown.

Warning displays

: Segments on the left-hand side of the vehi-cle

; Segments on the right-hand side of the vehi-cle

= Segments showing operational readinessThe warning displays show the distancebetween the sensors and the obstacle. Thewarning display for the front area is in the instru-ment cluster. The warning display for the reararea is located on the headliner in the rear com-partment.The warning display for each side of the vehicleis divided into five yellow and two red segments.PARKTRONIC is operational if operational read-iness indicator= lights up.The selected transmission position and thedirection in which the vehicle is rolling deter-

140 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

mine which warning display is active when theengine is running.

Transmission posi-tion

Warning display

D Front area activated

R, N or the vehicle isrolling backwards

Rear and front areasactivated

P No areas activated

One or more segments light up as the vehicleapproaches an obstacle, depending on the vehi-cle's distance from the obstacle.From the:Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear an inter-mittent warning tone for approximately twoseconds.Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear awarning tone for approximately two seconds.This indicates that you have now reached theminimum distance.

Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC

: Indicator lamp; Deactivates/activates PARKTRONICIf indicator lamp: lights up, PARKTRONIC isdeactivated.

i PARKTRONIC is automatically activatedwhen you set the Start/Stop button to keyposition 2.

Driving systems 141

Drivingandparking

Z

Problems with PARKTRONIC

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Only the red segments inthe PARKTRONIC warn-ing displays are lit. Youalso hear a warning tonefor approximately twoseconds.PARKTRONIC is thendeactivated and the indi-cator lamp on thePARKTRONIC buttonlights up.

PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Only the red segments inthe PARKTRONIC warn-ing displays are lit.PARKTRONIC is thendeactivated.

The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 237).X Switch the ignition back on.

The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or ultra-sound waves.X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.

Rear view camera

General notes

Rear view camera: is located in the rearbumper, underneath the tailgate.Rear view camera: is an optical parking andmaneuvering aid. It shows the area behind yourvehicle with guide lines in the multimedia sys-tem display.The area behind the vehicle is displayed as amirror image, as in the rear view mirror.

i The text shown in the multimedia systemdisplay depends on the language setting. Thefollowing are examples of rear view cameramessages in the multimedia system display.

Important safety notesThe rear view camera is only an aid. It is not areplacement for your attention to your immedi-ate surroundings. You are always responsiblefor safemaneuvering and parking.Whenmaneu-vering or parking, make sure that there are nopersons, animals or objects in the area in whichyou are maneuvering.Under the following circumstances, the rearview camera will not function, or will function ina limited manner:Rin heavy rain, snow or fogRat night or in very dark placesRif the camera is exposed to very bright lightRif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LEDlighting (the display may flicker)Rif the camera lens fogs up, e.g. when drivinginto a heated garage in winter, causing a rapidchange in temperatureRif the camera lens is dirty or obstructedObserve the notes on cleaning(Y page 238)Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In thisevent, have the camera position and settingchecked at a qualified specialist workshop

142 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

The field of vision and other functions of the rearview camera may be restricted due to additionalaccessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g.license plate holder, bicycle rack).The guide lines in themultimedia system displayshow the distances to your vehicle. The distan-ces only apply to road level.

Activating/deactivating the rear viewcameraX To activate: ensure that key position 2 hasbeen selected with the Start/Stop button.

X Make sure that the Activation by R gearfunction is selected in the multimedia system(see the Digital Operator's Manual).

X Engage reverse gear.The area behind the vehicle is shown withguide lines in the multimedia system display.The image from the rear view camera is avail-able throughout the maneuvering process.

To deactivate: the rear view camera deacti-vates if you shift the transmission to P or afterdriving forwards a short distance.

Messages in themultimedia systemdis-playThe rear view cameramay show a distorted viewof obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all.The rear view camera does not show objects inthe following positions:Rvery close to the rear bumperRunder the rear bumper

! Objects not at ground level may appear tobe further away than they actually are, e.g.:Rthe bumper of a parked vehicleRthe drawbar of a trailerRthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitchRthe rear section of an HGVRa slanted postUse the guidelines only for orientation.Approach objects no further than the bottom-most guideline.

: Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of thevehicle

; White guide line without turning the steeringwheel, vehicle width including the exteriormirrors (static)

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

? Yellow lanemarking tires at current steeringwheel angle (dynamic)

A Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi-cle

B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)C BumperD Red guide line at a distance of approximately

12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicleThe guide lines are shown when the transmis-sion is in position R.The distance specifications only apply toobjects that are at ground level.

Driving systems 143

Drivingandparking

Z

: Front warning display; Additional PARKTRONIC measurement

operational readiness indicator= Rear warning displayVehicles with PARKTRONIC: whenPARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 140), addi-tional measurement operational readiness indi-cator; appears in the multimedia system dis-play. If the PARKTRONIC warning displays areactive or light up, warning displays: and=are also active or light up correspondingly in themultimedia system display.

"Reverse parking" function

Backing up straight into a parking spacewithout turning the steering wheel

: White guide line without turning the steeringwheel, vehicle width including the exteriormirrors (static)

; Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

= Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi-cle

? Red guide line at a distance of approximately12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle

X Make sure that the rear view camera isswitched on (Y page 143).The lane and the guide lines are shown.

X With the help of white guide line:, checkwhether the vehicle will fit into the parkingspace.

X Using white guide line: as a guide, carefullyback up until you reach the end position.Red guide line? is then at the end of parkingspace. The vehicle is almost parallel in theparking space.

Reverse perpendicular parking with thesteering wheel at an angle

: Parking space marking; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width

including the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

X Drive past the parking space and bring thevehicle to a standstill.

X Make sure that the rear view camera isswitched on (Y page 143).The lane and the guide lines are shown.

X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn thesteering wheel in the direction of the parkingspace until yellow guide line; reaches park-ing space marking:.

X Keep the steering wheel in that position andback up carefully.

144 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

: Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly infront of the parking space.The white lane should be as close to parallelwith the parking space marking as possible.

: White guide line at current steering wheelangle

; Parking space markingX Turn the steering wheel to the center positionwhile the vehicle is stationary.

: Red guide line at a distance of approximately12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle

; White guide line without turning the steeringwheel

= End of parking spaceX Back up carefully until you have reached thefinal position.Red guide line: is then at the end of parkingspace=. The vehicle is almost parallel in theparking space.

Wide-angle function

: Symbol for the wide-angle view function; PARKTRONIC warning displaysYou can also use the rear view camera to selecta wide-angle view.When PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 140),a symbol for your own vehicle appears in thedisplay of the multimedia system. If thePARKTRONIC warning displays are active, warn-ing displays; light up in themultimedia systemdisplay in yellow or red respectively.

Driving systems 145

Drivingandparking

Z

ATTENTION ASSIST

General notesATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,monotonous journeys, such as on highways. It isactive in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 125 mph(200 km/h) range. If ATTENTION ASSISTdetects typical indicators of fatigue or increas-ing lapses in concentration on the part of thedriver, it suggests taking a break.

Important safety notesATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the driver. Itmight not always recognize fatigue or increasinginattentiveness in time or fail to recognize themat all. The system is not a substitute for a well-rested and attentive driver.The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST isrestricted and warnings may be delayed or notoccur at all:Rif the length of the journey is less than approx-imately 30 minutesRif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surfaceis uneven or if there are potholesRif there is a strong side windRif you have adopted a sporty driving style withhigh cornering speeds or high rates of accel-erationRif you are predominantly driving slower than37 mph (60 km/h) or faster than 125 mph(200 km/h)Rif the time has been set incorrectlyRin active driving situations, such as when youchange lanes or change your speed

The ATTENTION ASSIST tiredness assessmentis deleted and restarted when continuing thejourney, if:Ryou switch off the engineRyou take off your seat belt and open the driv-er's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or totake a break

Displaying the attention level

You can have current status information dis-played in the assistance menu (Y page 160) ofthe on-board computer.X Select the Assistance display for AttentionAssist using the on-board computer(Y page 159).

The following information is displayed:Rlength of the journey since the last break.Rthe attention level determined by ATTENTIONASSIST (Attention Level), displayed in abar display in five levels from high to lowRIf ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculatethe attention level and cannot issue a warn-ing, the System Suspended messageappears. The bar display then changes thedisplay, e.g. if you are driving at a speed below37 mph (60 km/h) or above 124 mph(200 km/h).

Activating ATTENTION ASSISTX Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-board computer (Y page 160).The system determines the attention level ofthe driver depending on the setting selected:

Selection Standard: the sensitivity with whichthe system determines the attention level is setto normal.Selection Sensitive: the sensitivity is sethigher. The attention level detected by AttentionAssist is adapted accordingly and the driver iswarned earlier.When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, theé symbol appears in the multifunction dis-play in the assistance graphic display.WhenATTENTIONASSIST has been deactivated,it is automatically reactivated after the enginehas been stopped. The sensitivity selected cor-

146 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

responds to the last selection activated (stand-ard/sensitive).

Warning in the multifunction displayIf fatigue or increasing lapses in concentrationare detected, a warning appears in the multi-function display: ATTENTION ASSIST Take aBreak!.In addition to the message shown in the multi-function display, you will then hear a warningtone.X If necessary, take a break.X Confirm the message by pressing theabutton on the steering wheel.

On long journeys, take regular breaks in goodtime to allow yourself to rest. If you do not takea break and ATTENTION ASSIST still detectsincreasing lapses in concentration, you will bewarned again after 15 minutes at the earliest.This will only happen if ATTENTION ASSIST stilldetects typical indicators of fatigue or increas-ing lapses in concentration.If a warning is output in the multifunction dis-play, a service station search is performed inCOMAND. You can select a service station andnavigation to this service station will then begin.This function can be activated and deactivatedin COMAND.

Lane Tracking package

General notesThe Lane Tracking package consists of BlindSpot Assist (Y page 147) and Lane KeepingAssist (Y page 149).

Blind Spot Assist

General notesBlind Spot Assist monitors the areas on eitherside of the vehicle that are not visible to thedriver with two lateral, rear-facing radar sen-sors. A warning display in the exterior mirrorsdraws your attention to vehicles detected in themonitored area. If you then switch on the cor-responding turn signal to change lanes, you willalso receive a visual and audible collision warn-ing.Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed ofapproximately 20 mph (30 km/h).

Important safety notesG WARNINGBlind Spot Assist does not react to:Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,placing them in the blind spot areaRvehicles which approach with a large speeddifferential and overtake your vehicle

As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not givewarnings in such situations. There is a risk ofan accident.Always observe the traffic conditions care-fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.

Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail todetect some vehicles and is no substitute forattentive driving. Always ensure that there issufficient distance to the side for other roadusers and obstacles.

i USA only:This device has been approved by the FCC asa "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensoris intended for use in an automotive radarsystem only. Removing, tampering with, oraltering the device will void any warranties,and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tam-per with, alter, or use in any non-approvedway.Any unauthorized modification to this devicecould void the user’s authority to operate theequipment.

Radar sensorsThe radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist are inte-grated into the rear bumper. Make sure that thebumpers are free from dirt, ice or slush. Thesensors must not be covered, for example bycycle racks or overhanging loads. Following asevere impact or in the event of damage to thebumpers, have the function of the radar sensorschecked at a qualified specialist workshop.Blind Spot Assist may no longer work properly.

Monitoring areaIn particular, the detection of obstacles can beimpaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavyrain, snow or spray

Driving systems 147

Drivingandparking

Z

Rthere are narrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles orbicyclesRthe road has very wide lanesRthe road has narrow lanesRyou are not driving in the middle of the laneRthere are barriers or similar lane bordersVehicles in the monitoring range are then notindicated.

Example: SedanBlind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 10 ft(3 m) behind your vehicle and directly next toyour vehicle, as shown in the diagram.If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in thelane beyond the lane next to your vehiclemay beindicated, especially if the vehicles are not driv-ing in the middle of their lane. This may be thecase if there are vehicles driving at the inneredge of their lanes.Due to the nature of the system:Rwarnings may be issued in error when drivingclose to crash barriers or similar solid laneborders.Rthe warning is canceled when driving for anextended period next to long vehicles, such astrucks.

Warning display

: Warning displayBlind Spot Assist is not active at speeds belowapproximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles inthe monitoring range are then not indicated.When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicatorlamp: in the exterior mirrors lights up yellowat speeds of up to 20mph (30 km/h). At speedsabove 20 mph (30 km/h), the indicator lampgoes out and Blind Spot Assist is operational.If a vehicle is detected within the blind spotmonitoring range at speeds above 20 mph(30 km/h), warning lamp: on the correspond-ing side lights up red. This warning is alwaysemitted when a vehicle enters the blind spotmonitoring range from behind or from the side.When you overtake a vehicle, the warning onlyoccurs if the difference in speed is less than7 mph (12 km/h).If you select the reverse gear, Blind Spot Assistis not operational.The brightness of the warning lamps is auto-matically adapted to the brightness of the sur-roundings.

Collision warningIf a vehicle is detected in themonitoring range ofBlind Spot Assist and you switch on the corre-sponding turn signal, a double warning tonesounds. Red warning lamp: flashes. If the turnsignal remains on, detected vehicles are indica-ted by the flashing of red warning lamp:.There are no further warning tones.

148 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Switching on Blind Spot AssistX Make sure that Blind Spot Assist(Y page 160) is activated in the on-boardcomputer.

X Select key position 2with the Start/Stop but-ton.Warning lamps: in the exterior mirrors lightup red for approximately 1.5 seconds andthen turn yellow.

Lane Keeping Assist

General notes

LaneKeepingAssistmonitors the area in front ofyour vehicle by means of multifunction cam-era: which is attached behind the top of thewindshield. Active Lane Keeping Assist detectslane markings on the road and can warn youbefore you leave your lane unintentionally.This function is available in the range between40mph and 120mph (60 km/h and 200 km/h).A warning may be given if a front wheel passesover a lanemarking. It will warn you bymeans ofintermittent vibration in the steering wheel forup to 1.5 seconds.

Important safety notesG WARNINGLane Keeping Assist may not always clearlyrecognize lane markings.In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may:Rgive an unnecessary warningRnot give a warningThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and stay in lane, in particular ifwarned by Lane Keeping Assist.

G WARNINGThe Lane Keeping Assist warning does notreturn the vehicle to the original lane. There isa risk of an accident.You should always steer, brake or accelerateyourself, in particular if warned by Lane Keep-ing Assist.

If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane Keep-ing Assist can neither reduce the risk of an acci-dent nor override the laws of physics. LaneKeeping Assist cannot take into account theroad, traffic and weather conditions. Lane Keep-ing Assist is merely an aid. You are responsiblefor the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehi-cle speed, for braking in good time and for stay-ing in your lane.The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep the vehi-cle in the lane.The systemmay be impaired ormay not functionif:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficientillumination of the road, or due to snow, rain,fog or sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, thesun or reflections (e.g. when the road surfaceis wet)Rthewindshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged orcovered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin-ity of the cameraRthere are no, several or unclear lanemarkingsfor a lane, e.g. in areas with road constructionworkRthe lanemarkings are worn away, dark or cov-ered up, e.g. by dirt or snowRthe distance to the vehicle in front is too smalland the lane markings thus cannot be detec-tedRthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanesbranch off, cross one another or mergeRthe road is narrow and windingRthere are strong shadows cast on the road

Switching on Lane Keeping AssistX Activate Lane Keeping Assist using the on-board computer; to do so, select Standard orAdaptive (Y page 161).If you drive at speeds above 40 mph(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,the lines in the assistance graphics display

Driving systems 149

Drivingandparking

Z

(Y page 159) are shown in green. Lane Keep-ing Assist is ready for use.

StandardWhen Standard is selected, no warning vibra-tion occurs if:Ryou have switched on the turn signal. In thisevent, the warnings are suppressed for a cer-tain period of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, such asABS, BAS or ESP®.

AdaptiveWhen Adaptive is selected, no warning vibra-tion occurs if:Ryou have switched on the turn signal. In thisevent, the warnings are suppressed for a cer-tain period of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS,BAS or ESP®.Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.Ryou brake hard.Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid anobstacle or change lanes quickly.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.In order that you are warned only when neces-sary and in good time if you cross the lanemark-ing, the system recognizes certain conditionsand warns you accordingly.The warning vibration occurs earlier if:Ryou approach the outer lane marking on abend.Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a highway.Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.The warning vibration occurs later if:Rthe road has narrow lanesRyou cut the corner on a bend

150 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you operate information systems and com-munication equipment integrated in the vehi-cle while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate the equip-ment when the vehicle is stationary.

Youmust observe the legal requirements for thecountry in which you are currently driving whenoperating the on-board computer.

G WARNINGIf the instrument cluster has failed or mal-functioned, you may not recognize functionrestrictions in systems relevant to safety. Theoperating safety of your vehicle may beimpaired. There is a risk of an accident.Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checkedat a qualified specialist workshop immedi-ately.

The on-board computer only showsmessages orwarnings from certain systems in the multifunc-tion display. You should therefore make sureyour vehicle is operating safely at all times.If the operating safety of your vehicle isimpaired, pull over as soon as it is safe to do so.Contact a qualified specialist workshop.For an overview, see the instrument panel illus-tration (Y page 30).

Displays and operation

Speedometer with segmentsThe segments in the speedometer indicatewhich speed range is available.RCruise control activated (Y page 127):The segments light up from the stored speedto the type-tested maximum speed.RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 128):

One or two segments in the set speed rangelight up.RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in frontthat is driving at a slower speed than thestored speed:The segments between the speed of the vehi-cle in front and the stored speed light up.

Tachometer! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as thiscould damage the engine.

The red band in the tachometer indicates theengine's overrevving range.The fuel supply is interrupted to protect theengine when the red band is reached.

Outside temperature displayYou should pay special attention to road condi-tions when temperatures are around freezingpoint.Bear in mind that the outside temperature dis-play indicates the temperature measured anddoes not record the road temperature.The outside temperature display is in the multi-function display (Y page 153).Changes in the outside temperature are dis-played after a short delay.

Coolant temperature display

G WARNINGOpening the hood when the engine is over-heated or when there is a fire in the enginecompartment could expose you to hot gasesor other service products. There is a risk ofinjury.Let an overheated engine cool down beforeopening the hood. If there is a fire in theengine compartment, keep the hood closedand contact the fire department.

! A display message is shown if the coolanttemperature is too high.If the coolant temperature is over 248 ‡(120 †), do not continue driving. The enginewill otherwise be damaged.

Displays and operation 151

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

The coolant temperature display is in the lowersection of the tachometer (Y page 30).Under normal operating conditions and with thespecified coolant level, the coolant temperaturemay rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

Operating the on-board computer

: Multifunction display; Right control panel= Left control panelX To activate the on-board computer: set theStart/Stop button to key position 1.

You can control the multifunction display andthe settings in the on-board computer using thebuttons on the multifunction steering wheel.Left control panel

ò ROpens the menu list

9

:

Press briefly:RScrolls in listsRSelects a menu or functionRIn the Radio or Media menu:opens the track or station list andselects a station, an audio track ora video sceneRIn the Telephone menu: switchesto the phone book and selects aname or a telephone number

9

:

Press and hold:RScrolls quickly through all listsRIn the Radio or Media menu:selects a station, audio track orvideo scene using rapid scrollingRIn the Telephone menu: startsrapid scrolling if the phone book isopen

a RIn all menus: confirms the selectedentry in the listRIn the Radio or Media menu:opens the list of available radiosources or mediaRIn the Telephone menu: switchesto the phone book and starts dial-ing the selected number

ñ RSwitches off the Voice ControlSystem (see the separate operat-ing instructions)

% Press briefly:RBackRIn the Radio or Mediamenu: dese-lects the track or station list or listof available radio sources ormediaRHides display messagesRExits the telephone book/redialmemory

% Press and hold:RCalls up the standard display in theTrip menu

Right control panel

~ RRejects or ends a callRExits the telephone book/redialmemory

6 RMakes or accepts a callRSwitches to the redial memory

WX

RAdjusts the volume

8 RMute

ó RSwitches on the Voice Control Sys-tem (see the separate operatinginstructions)

152 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

Multifunction display

: Transmission position (Y page 111); Time= outside temperature (Y page 151)? DisplayA Additional speedometer (Y page 162)Display panel? shows the selected menu orsubmenu and display messages.Themultifunction display shows the unit in addi-tional speedometerA inverse to the speedom-eter unit in the instrument cluster.X To open the menu list: press theò but-ton on the steering wheel.Display panel? appears in the menu list.

Possible displays in the multifunction dis-play:R= PARKTRONIC (Y page 139)RCRUISE Cruise control (Y page 127)R_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist (Y page 88)Rè ECO start/stop function (Y page 105)Rë HOLD function (Y page 136)

Menus and submenus

Menu overviewPress theò button on the steering wheel toopen the menu list.Operating the on-board computer (Y page 152).Depending on the vehicle equipment, you canselect the following menu:RTrip menu (Y page 153)RNavi menu (navigation instructions)(Y page 154)RRadio menu (Y page 156)RMedia menu (Y page 157)

RTelephone menu (Y page 158)RAssistance Graphic menu (Y page 159)RService menu (Y page 160)RSettings menu (Y page 160)RAMG menu (Y page 162)

Trip menu

Standard display

X Press and hold the% button on the steer-ing wheel until the Tripmenu with trip odom-eter: and odometer; appears.

Calling up the range

X Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Trip menu.

X Press: or9 to select the approximateRange.The approximate range that can be covereddepends on the fuel level and your currentdriving style. If there is only a small amount offuel left in the fuel tank, a vehicle being refu-

Menus and submenus 153

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

eledC appears instead of approximaterange.

Trip computer "From Start" or "FromReset"

: Distance; Driving time= Average speed? Average fuel consumptionX Pressò on the steering wheel to open themenu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Trip menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press: or9 to select From Start orFrom Reset.The values in the From Start submenu are cal-culated from the start of a journey, while thevalues in the From Reset submenu are calcu-lated from the last time the submenu was reset(Y page 154).In the following cases the trip computer is auto-matically reset From Start:Rthe ignition has been switched off for morethan four hours.R999 hours have been exceeded.R9,999 miles have been exceeded.The From Reset trip computer is automaticallyreset if the value exceeds 9,999 hours or99,999 miles.

Digital speedometerX Pressò on the steering wheel to open themenu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Trip menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press the: or9 button to select thedigital speedometer.

Resetting valuesX Pressò on the steering wheel to open themenu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Trip menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press the: or9 button to select thefunction that you wish to reset.

X Press thea button.X Press: to select Yes and pressa toconfirm.

You can reset the values of the following func-tions:RTrip odometerR"From Start" trip computerR"From Reset" trip computer

Navigation system menu

Displaying navigation instructionsIn the Navi menu, the multifunction displayshows navigation instructions. You can find fur-ther information on navigation instructions inthe separate operating instructions.X Switch on the multimedia system (see sepa-rate operating instructions).

X Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Navi menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

154 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

Route guidance not active

: Direction of travel; Current road

Route guidance active

No change of direction announced

: Distance to the next destination; Estimated arrival time= Distance to the next change of direction? Current road

Change of direction announced with alane recommendation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to the change of direction= Change-of-direction symbol? Recommended lane and new lane during a

change of direction (white)A Possible laneB Lane not recommended (dark gray)On multilane roads, new lane recommendationscan be displayed for the next change of directionif the digital map supports this data. During thechange of direction, new lanes may be added.Lane not recommendedB: you will not be ableto complete the next change of direction if youstay in this lane.Possible laneA: you will only be able to com-plete the next change of direction in this lane.Recommended lane?: in this lane you will beable to complete the next change of directionand the one after that.

Menus and submenus 155

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

Change of direction without lane recom-mendation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= Change-of-direction symbolWhen a change of direction is to be made, youwill see symbol= for the change of directionand distance graphic;. The distance indicatorshortens towards the top of the display as youapproach the point of the announced change ofdirection. The change of direction starts oncethe distance display reaches zero.

Change of direction with lane recommen-dation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= Change-of-direction symbol? Lane recommendation

Other status indicators of the naviga-tion system

: Additional informationOther possible additional information:RNew Route... or Calculating Route...A new route is calculated.RRoad Not MappedThe vehicle position is inside the area of thedigitalmap but the road is not recognized, e.g.newly built streets, car parks or private land.RNo RouteNo route could be calculated to the selecteddestination.RO

You have reached the destination or an inter-mediate destination.

Radio menu

: Frequency range; Station frequency with memory position= Name of artist? Name of trackThe multifunction display shows station; withstation frequency or station name. The preset

156 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

position is only displayed alongwith station; ifthis has been stored.You can store TV channels; in the multimediasystem.X Switch on the multimedia system (see sepa-rate operating instructions).

X Pressò on the steering wheel to open themenu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Radio menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.Currently set station; appears in the multi-function display.

X To open the station list: press: or9briefly.

X To select a station in the station list:press: or9 briefly.

X To select a station in the station list usingrapid scroll: press and hold: or9.

X To select the frequency range or stationmemory: pressa briefly.

X Press: or9 to select the frequencyrange or station memory.

X Pressa to confirm your selection.

i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like anormal radio.Further information on radio operation can befound in the multimedia system (see the sep-arate operating instructions).

Media menu

Changing the media sourceYou can change the media source and playbackmode (audio or video) at any time in the Mediamenu.X Switch on the multimedia system (see sepa-rate operating instructions).

X Pressò on the steering wheel to open themenu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Media menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X To open/close the media sources list:pressa briefly.The list shows the following media sources,for example:

RDisc (CD/DVD) (DVD COMAND only)RSD card (COMAND)RMedia Register (COMAND)RUSB storage deviceRBluetooth® capable audio device

Please observe further information on mediasupport and media operation in the multimediasystem (see separate operating instructions).

Operating an audio player or audiomedia

: Media source, e.g. name of USB memorystick

; Current title= Name of artist? Name of albumA Folder nameAudio data from various audio devices or mediacan be played, depending on the equipmentinstalled in the vehicle.X Switch on the multimedia system (see sepa-rate operating instructions).

X Useò on the steering wheel to call up thelist of menus.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Media menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X To select audio player or data carrier:pressa briefly, to open the list of mediasources.

X Press: or9 to select the correspond-ing audio player or media.

X Pressa to confirm.X To open the track list: press: or9briefly.

Menus and submenus 157

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

X To select to next or previous track in thetrack list: press: or9 briefly.

X To select a track from the track list usingrapid scrolling: press and hold: or9until the desired track is reached.If you press and hold the button, the speed ofrapid scroll increases after a short time. Notall audio drives or data carriers support thisfunction.

If the corresponding track information is storedon the audio drive or audio media, the multi-function display may display the following:Rtrack numberRtrack nameRartistRalbum

Video DVD operation

X Switch on the multimedia system (see sepa-rate operating instructions).

X Useò on the steering wheel to call up thelist of menus.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Media menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X To select DVD single drive or data carrier:pressa briefly, to open the list of mediasources.

X Press: or9 to select the correspond-ing DVD single drive or disc.

X Pressa to confirm.X To open the scene list: press: or9briefly.

X To select the next or previous scene in thescene list: press: or9 briefly.

X To select a scene from the scene list usingrapid scrolling: press and hold: or9until desired scene: is reached.

X Pressa to confirm your selection.

Telephone menu

Introduction

G WARNINGIf you operate information systems and com-munication equipment integrated in the vehi-cle while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate the equip-ment when the vehicle is stationary.

When telephoning, you must observe the legalrequirements for the country in which you arecurrently driving.X Switch on the mobile phone (see the manu-facturer’s operating instructions).

X Switch on the multimedia system (see sepa-rate operating instructions).

X Establish a Bluetooth® connection to themul-timedia system; see the separate operatinginstructions.

X Press theòbutton on the steering wheelto call up the list of menus.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Telephone menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

You will see one of the following display mes-sages in the multifunction display:RPhone READY or the name of the networkprovider: the mobile phone has found a net-work and is ready to receive.RPhone No Service: there is no networkavailable or the mobile phone is searching fora network.

158 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

Accepting a callIf someone calls you when you are in the Tele‐phone menu, a display message appears in themultifunction display.You can accept a call at any time, even if you arenot in the Telephone menu.X Press the6 button on the steering wheelto accept an incoming call.

Rejecting or ending a callYou can end or reject a call at any time even ifyou are not in the Telephone menu.X Press the~ button on the steering wheelto reject or end a call.

Selecting an entry in the phone bookX Pressò on the steering wheel to open themenu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Telephone menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press the:,9 ora button toswitch to the phone book.

X Press: or9 to select the names oneafter the other.

orX To start rapid scrolling: press and hold:or9 for longer than one second.The names in the phone book are displayedquickly one after the other.If you press and hold the: or9 buttonfor longer than five seconds, the nameappears with the next or previous letter initialletter in the alphabet.Rapid scrolling stops when you release thebutton or reach the end of the list.

X If only one telephone number is stored fora name: press the6 ora button tostart dialing.

orX If there is more than one number for aparticular name: press the6 orabutton to display the numbers.

X Press the: or9 button to select thenumber you want to dial.

X Press the6 orabutton to start dialing.

orX To exit the telephone book: press the~or% button.

RedialingThe on-board computer saves the last names ornumbers dialed in the redial memory.X Pressò on the steering wheel to open themenu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Telephone menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press the6 button to switch to the redialmemory.

X Press the: or9 button to select thedesired name or number.

X Press the6 orabutton to start dialing.orX To exit the redial memory: press the~or% button.

Assistance graphic menu

X Useò on the steering wheel to call up thelist of menus.

X Press the: or9 button on the steeringwheel to select the Assistance Graphicmenu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.The multifunction display shows theDISTRONIC PLUS distance display in theassistance graphic.The assistance graphic displays the status ofand information from the following drivingsystems or driving safety systems:

Menus and submenus 159

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 128)RDistance warning function of COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST PLUS (Y page 53)RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 147)RATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 146)RLane Keeping Assist (Y page 149)

X Press: to display the ATTENTION ASSISTassessment.

Service menuDepending on the equipment installed in thevehicle, you have the following options in theService menu:RCalling up display messages in messagememory (Y page 166)RChecking the tire pressure electronically(Y page 261)RCalling up the service due date(Y page 233)RChecking the engine oil level using the on-board computer (Y page 230)

Settings menu

IntroductionDepending on the equipment installed in thevehicle, you have the following options in theSettings menu:RChanging assistance settings (Y page 160)RChanging the light settings (Y page 161)RChanging the instrument cluster settings(Y page 161)RRestoring the factory settings (Y page 162)

Assistance submenu

Activating/deactivating COLLISION PRE-VENTION ASSIST PLUSX Pressò on the steering wheel to open themenu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press: or9 to select the DriveAs‐sist submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press9 or: to select CollisionPrevention.X Pressa to confirm.The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: press thea but-ton again.When COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUSis deactivated, theæ symbol appears inthe multifunction display in the AssistanceGraphic menu.

For further information about COLLISION PRE-VENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (Y page 53).

Activating/deactivating Blind Spot AssistX Pressò on the steering wheel to open themenu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press: or9 to select the DriveAs‐sist submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press: or9 to select Blind SpotAssist.X Pressa to confirm.The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: press thea but-ton again.When Blind Spot Assist is activated, grayradar waves propagating backwards appearnext to the vehicle in the AssistanceGraphic menu in the multifunction display.

For further information about Blind Spot Assist,see (Y page 147).

Setting ATTENTION ASSISTX Pressò on the steering wheel to open themenu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press: or9 to select the DriveAs‐sist submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press: or9 to select ATTENTIONASSIST.X Pressa to confirm.

160 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

X Press: or9 to select Off, Standardor Sensitive.

X Pressa to confirm the selection.When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, theé symbol appears in the AssistanceGraphic menu in the multifunction display.

For further information about ATTENTIONASSIST, see (Y page 146).

Setting Lane Keeping AssistX Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.

X Press the: or9 button on the steeringwheel to select the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press: or9 to select the DriveAs‐sist submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press: or9 to select Lane KeepingAssist.X Pressa to confirm.Press: or9 to select Off, Standardor Adaptive.

X To change the setting: pressa again.For further information about Lane KeepingAssist, see (Y page 149).

Light submenu

Switching the daytime running lamps on/offThis function is not available in Canada.X Pressò on the steering wheel to open themenu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press: or9 to select the Lightssubmenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Using: or9, select the DaytimeRunning Lights function.If the Daytime Running Lights function hasbeen switched on, the cone of light and theW symbol in the multifunction display areshown in white.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Further information about Daytime RunningLights(Y page 86).

Instrument cluster submenu

Setting the brightness of the display/switchYou can use the Brightness function to set thebrightness of the multifunction display and theswitches in the vehicle in increments.X Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press: or9 to select the Instru‐ment Cluster submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Using: or9, select the Brightnessfunction.

X Pressa to confirm.You can see the selected setting Levelwith avalue between 0 and 10. Level 0 correspondsto a dim light and level 10 corresponds to abright light.

X Press the: or9 button to change thebrightness. The brightness is set simultane-ously with the selection.

X Press thea or% button to save thesetting.

Selecting the distance unitThe Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: func-tion allows you to choose whether certain dis-plays appear in kilometers or miles in the mul-tifunction display.X Useò on the steering wheel to call up thelist of menus.

X Press the: or9 button on the steeringwheel to select the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press the: or9 button to select theInstrument Cluster submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theDisplay Unit Speed-/Odometer function.You will see the selected setting: km or Miles.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Menus and submenus 161

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

The selected unit of measurement for distanceapplies to:RDigital speedometer in the Trip menuROdometer and the trip odometerRTrip computerRRangeRNavigation instructions in the Navi menuRCruise controlRDISTRONIC PLUSRASSYST PLUS service interval display

Switching the additional speedometeron/offIf the additional speedometer is switched on,the speed is shown in the status bar in the mul-tifunction display instead of the outside tem-perature.The speed display is inverse to the speedome-ter.X Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press: or9 to select the Instru‐ment Cluster submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Using: or9, select the AdditionalSpeedometer [km/h] function.The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: press thea but-ton again.

Restoring the factory settingsX Pressò on the steering wheel to open themenu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press: or9 to select the FactorySettings submenu.X Pressa to confirm.The Reset All Settings? functionappears.

X Press: or9 to select No or Yes.X Pressa to confirm the selection.If you have selected Yes, the multifunctiondisplay shows a confirmation message.

For safety reasons, the Daytime RunningLights function in the Lights submenu is onlyreset when the vehicle is stationary.

AMG menu

WARMUP

: Digital speedometer; Gear indicator= Charge-air pressure? Engine oil temperatureA Transmission fluid temperatureX Useò on the steering wheel to call up thelist of menus.

X Press the: or9 button on the steeringwheel to select the AMG menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.Engine and transmission oil tempera-tures: when the engine and transmission areat normal operating temperature, oil temper-atures? andA are displayed in white in themultifunction display.If the multifunction display shows oil temper-ature? orA in blue, the engine or thetransmission are not yet at normal operatingtemperature. Avoid driving at full engine out-put during this time.

162 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

G-Meter

The G-Meter shows you the forces that are exer-ted on the driver during the journey, both later-ally and in the direction of travel.The maximum values are indicated in red in theguideline system.X Pressò on the steering wheel to open themenu list.

X Press the: or9 button on the steeringwheel to select the AMG menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press the9 button repeatedly until the G-Meter appears.The maximum values of the G-Meter aresaved.

X To reset the G-Meter: pressa again.X Using: or9 select Yes on the steer-ing wheel.

X Pressa to confirm.The maximum values of the G-Meter aredeleted.

If the ignition remains switched off for longerthan four hours, the G-Meter will be automati-cally reset.

SETUP

: Drive Comfort/Sport/Sport +/ Race; Chassis Comfort/Sport/Sport += Transmission D/M? Exhaust system Comfort/Sport +A ESP® On/Off or SPORT handling modeSportSETUP displays the following information andfunctions:Rthe gear indicatorRthe digital speedometerRthe drive system settingRthe suspension modeRthe transmission positionRthe exhaust flap positionRthe ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) statusX Useò on the steering wheel to call up thelist of menus.

X Press the: or9 button on the steeringwheel to select the AMG menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press the9 button repeatedly until SETUPis displayed.

Further information on the upshift indicator andgear indicator (Y page 115).

Menus and submenus 163

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

RACETIMER

Displaying and starting RACETIMER

: Lap; RACETIMERThe RACETIMER is only intended for use on aclosed race circuit. Do not use the function onpublic roads.You can start theRACETIMERwhen the engine isrunning or if you select key position 2 with theStart/Stop button.X Useò on the steering wheel to call up thelist of menus.

X Press the: or9 button on the steeringwheel to select the AMG menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press the: or9 button repeatedlyuntil the RACETIMER is shown.

X To start: press thea button to start theRACETIMER.

Starting a new lap

: Lap; RACETIMER= Quickest lap time

X Press the: or9 button to select NewLap.X Pressa to confirm.A maximum of 32 laps may be stored.

Stopping the RACETIMER

X Press the: or9 button to select Stop.X Pressa to confirm.If you stop the vehicle and select key position 1with the Start/Stop button, the RACETIMERinterrupts timing. If you select key position 3with the Start/Stop button and then pressaStart to confirm, timing is continued.Continuing the RACETIMER

X Press the: or9 button to select Con‐tinue.X Pressa to confirm.

164 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

Resetting the RACETIMER

X Press the: or9 button to select Stop.The RACETIMER is stopped.

X Press the: or9 button to selectReset.X Pressa to confirm.All laps are deleted.

Lap statistics

: Lap; Lap time= Average lap speed? Lap lengthThis function is only available if you have storedat least two laps and have stopped the RACE-TIMER.X Useò on the steering wheel to call up thelist of menus.

X Press the: or9 button on the steeringwheel to select the AMG menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press: or9 to select Lap List.

X Pressa to confirm.The lap statistics are displayed.

X Press the9 or: button to select a dif-ferent lap evaluation.The fastest lap is indicated by flashing sym-bol:.

Menus and submenus 165

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

Display messages

Introduction

General notesDisplay messages appear in the multifunction display.Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's Manualand may therefore differ from the multifunction display.Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in thisOperator's Manual.With certain display messages, you will also hear a warning tone.You can hide the display messages. The display messages are then stored in the message memory.Rectify the cause of a display message as soon as possible.When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:RHOLD function (Y page 136)RParking (Y page 119)

Hiding display messagesX Press thea or% button on the steering wheel.The multifunction display hides the display message.

High-priority display messages are shown in red in the multifunction display. Some high-prioritydisplay messages cannot be hidden.The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messageshave been remedied.

Message memoryThe on-board computer saves certain display messages in themessage memory. You can call upthe display messages:X Useò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus.X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Service menu.X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.X Press the: or9 button to select the message memory.If there are no display messages, the No Messages display appears in the multifunction displayIf there are display messages, the number of messages stored is shown.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to scroll through the display messages.

166 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

!÷Currently Unavaila‐ble See Operator'sManual

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) and ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram) are temporarily not available.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be faulty.In addition, the ÷ and ! warning lamps light up in the instru-ment cluster.For example, the on-board voltage may be insufficient.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brakehard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steeringmovements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned aboveare available again.

If the multifunction display still shows the display message:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

!÷Inoperative SeeOperator's Manual

ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be faulty.The$ (USA only) orJ (Canada only), ÷ and ! warninglamps in the instrument cluster may also light up.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brakehard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Display messages 167

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

÷Inoperative SeeOperator's Manual

ESP® is malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be faulty.The ÷ warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

÷Currently Unavaila‐ble See Operator'sManual

ESP® is temporarily unavailable.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be faulty.The ÷ warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brakehard, for example.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steeringmovements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned aboveare available again.

If the multifunction display still shows the display message:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

168 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

T!÷Inoperative SeeOperator's Manual

EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS and ESP® are malfunc-tioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be faulty.In addition, the ÷ and ! warning lamps light up in the instru-ment cluster and a warning tone sounds.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lockif you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

JBrake Immediately

A malfunction has occurred while the HOLD function or DISTRONICPLUS is active.A tone may also sound at regular intervals. If you attempt to lock thevehicle, the tone becomes louder.You cannot start the engine.X Paying attention to the traffic situation, immediately depress thebrake pedal firmly and hold until the display message disappears.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 119).

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Turn On the Igni‐tion to Release theParking Brake

The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp lightsup.You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the ignitionwas switched off.X Switch on the ignition.

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Please Release Park‐ing Brake

The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashesand a warning tone sounds. A condition for automatic release of theelectric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 121).You are driving with the electric parking brake applied.X Release the electric parking brake manually.

The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashesand a warning tone sounds.You are using the electric parking brake for emergency braking(Y page 121).

Display messages 169

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Parking Brake SeeOperator's Manual

The yellow! warning lamp lights up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To apply:X Switch the ignition off.X Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow! warning lamp and the redF (USA only) or!(Canada only) indicator lamp light up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To release:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Release the electric parking brake manually.orX Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 121).If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:X Do not drive on.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashesand the yellow! warning lamp lights up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To release:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Release the electric parking brake manually.To apply:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Apply the electric parking brake manually.If the redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp con-tinues to flash:X Do not drive on.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 273).X Shift the transmission to position P.X Turn the front wheels towards the curb.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

170 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The yellow! warning lamp lights up. The redF (USA only)or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten secondsafter the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It thengoes out or remains lit.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Apply the electric parking brake.If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake:X Shift the transmission to position P.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake manually:X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 121).If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply orrelease the electric parking brake, the redF (USA only) or!(Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible to applythe electric parking brake manually.X Shift the selector lever to P, as the electric parking brake is notapplied automatically.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake manually:X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 121).

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Parking Brake Inop‐erative

The yellow! warning lamp lights up. The redF (USA only)or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten secondsafter the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It thengoes out or remains lit.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of over-voltage or undervoltage.X Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. bycharging the battery or restarting the engine.

X Engage or release the electric parking brake.If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parking brake:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Engage or release the electric parking brake.If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.If the electric parking brake still cannot be applied:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 171

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The yellow! warning lamp lights up and the redF (USA only)or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

$(USA

only)J(Canadaonly)Check Brake FluidLevel

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.In addition, the$ (USA only) orJ (Canada only) warning lamplights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.

G WARNINGThe braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 119).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.

#Check Brake Pad Wear

The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.USAonly: the red$ brake systemwarning lamp also lights upwhilethe engine is running.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

GInoperative

One or more main features of the mbrace system are malfunctioning.X Have the mbrace system checked immediately at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Collision Preven‐tion Assist PlusCurrently Unavaila‐ble See Operator'sManual

COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS is temporarily not operational.Possible causes are:Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations orother sources of electromagnetic radiation.Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.Rthe on-board voltage is too low.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display messagedisappears.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 119).X Restart the engine.

172 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Collision Preven‐tion Assist PlusInoperativeCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily inoperative dueto a malfunction. Adaptive Brake Assist may also have failed.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

PRE-SAFE Inopera‐tive See Operator'sManualImportant functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupantsafety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Radar Sensors DirtySee Operator's Man‐ualAt least one of the following driving systems or driving safety systemsis temporarily restricted or inoperative:RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUSPossible causes are:Rthe sensors in the radiator trim and/or in the bumpers are dirtyRthe function of the driving system or driving safety system isimpaired due to heavy rain or snow

A warning tone also sounds.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display messagedisappears. All driving systems or driving safety systems are operativeagain.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 119).X Switch off the engine.X Clean the sensors in the following locations (Y page 237):Rin the radiator trimRin the front bumperRin the rear bumper, particularly in the middle of the rear bumper

X Restart the engine.The display message disappears.

6SRS Malfunction Ser‐vice Required

The restraint system is faulty. The 6 warning lamp also lights up inthe instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devicesmay either be triggeredunintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 35).

Display messages 173

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

6Front Left Malfunc‐tion ServiceRequired orFrontRight MalfunctionService Required

The restraint system hasmalfunctioned at the front on the left or right.The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devicesmay either be triggeredunintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

6Left Side CurtainAirbag MalfunctionService RequiredorRight Side Cur‐tain Airbag Malfunc‐tion ServiceRequired

There is amalfunction in the left-hand or right-handwindow curtain airbag. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggered unin-tentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

174 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Front Passenger Air‐bag Disabled SeeOperator's ManualThe front-passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag aredeactivated during the journey, although:Ran adultorRa person of the corresponding stature is on the front-passenger seatIf additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may interpretthe occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.

G WARNINGThe front-passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag arenot triggered in the event of an accident.There is an increased risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 119).X Switch the ignition off.X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle.X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door andswitch on the ignition.

X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the centerconsole and the multifunction display and check the following:Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF andPASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simulta-neously for approximately six secondsRthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light upand remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on,OCS (Occupant Classification System) has disabled the front-passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag(Y page 43)Rthe display messages Front Passenger Airbag EnabledSee Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Dis‐abled See Operator's Manual must not appear in the multi-function display.

X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary systemchecks have been completed.

X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multi-function display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occu-pied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indicatorlamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occu-pant.If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.For further information about theOccupant Classification System, see(Y page 43).

Display messages 175

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Front Passenger Air‐bag Enabled SeeOperator's ManualThe front-passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag areenabled during the journey, although:Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system'sweight threshold is located on the front-passenger seatorRthe front-passenger seat is unoccupiedThe systemmay detect objects or forces applying additional weight onthe seat.

G WARNINGThe front-passenger front air bag and the front-passenger knee bagmay be triggered unintentionally.There is an increased risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 119).X Switch the ignition off.X Open the front-passenger door.X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front-passenger seat.

X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to theweight.The system may otherwise detect the additional weight and inter-pret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is.

X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door andswitch on the ignition.

X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the centerconsole and the multifunction display and check the following:Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF andPASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simulta-neously for approximately six secondsRthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light upand remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on,OCS has deactivated the front-passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag (Y page 43)Rthe display messages Front Passenger Airbag EnabledSee Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Dis‐abled See Operator's Manual must not appear in the multi-function display.

X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary systemchecks have been completed.

X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multi-function display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occu-pied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indicatorlamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occu-pant.

176 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM SolutionsIf the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.For further information about theOccupant Classification System, see(Y page 43).

Lights

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

bCheck Left Low Beam(example)

The corresponding bulb is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

i LED light sources: the display message for the correspondinglamp only appears when all the LEDs in the lamp have failed.

bMalfunction SeeOperator’s Manual

The exterior lighting is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bAuto Lamp FunctionInoperative

The light sensor is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bSwitch Off Lights

The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A warningtone also sounds.X Turn the light switch to theà or L position.

Adaptive HighbeamAssist Inoperative Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Adaptive HighbeamAssist CurrentlyUnavailable SeeOperator's Manual

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.X Clean the windshield.If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the Adap‐tive Highbeam Assist Now Available display message is shown.Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.

Display messages 177

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Engine

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

+Check Coolant LevelSee Operator's Man‐ual

The coolant level is too low.

! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the enginecooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.

X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so(Y page 231).

X If coolant needs to be addedmore often than usual, have the enginecoolant system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

? The fan motor is faulty.X At coolant temperatures below 248‡ (120†), drive to the nearestqualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in moun-tainous terrain and stop-and-go traffic.

?Coolant Too HotStop Vehicle TurnEngine Off

The coolant is too hot.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGDo not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause somefluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catchfire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burnswhichcan occur just by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-ing attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 119).X Wait until the engine has cooled down.X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked,e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

X Donot start the engine again until the displaymessage goes out andthe coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †). Otherwise, theengine could be damaged.

X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist work-shop immediately.

Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolantlevel, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

178 Display messagesOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

#See Operator's Man‐ual

The battery is not being charged.A warning tone also sounds.Possible causes are:Ra defective alternatorRa torn poly-V-beltRa malfunction in the electronics

! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-ing attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 119).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

#Stop Vehicle SeeOperator's Manual

The battery is no longer being charged and the condition of charge istoo low.A warning tone also sounds.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-ing attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 119).X Observe the instructions in the# See Operator's Manualdisplay message.

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

#Start Engine SeeOperator's Manual

The engine is off and the battery condition of charge is too low.X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as therear window defroster and interior lighting.

X Leave the engine running for a fewminutes or drive a long distance.The battery is being charged.

4Check Engine OilLevel (Add 1 quart)

The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will oth-erwise be damaged.

X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 228).X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 230).X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if engineoil needs to be added more often than usual.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from a qualifiedspecialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

4Engine Oil LevelLow Stop VehicleTurn Engine Off

The engine oil level is too low. There is a risk of engine damage.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-ing attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 119).X Check the engine oil level (Y page 228).X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 230).

Display messages 179

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

4Engine Oil ReduceOil Level

You have added toomuch engine oil. The engine or catalytic convertermay be damaged.X Siphon off excess engine oil until it is at the specified level. Observethe legal requirements.

4Engine Oil LevelCannot Be Measured

The measuring system is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

8Fuel Level Low

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

C There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.

8Gas Cap Loose

The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:X Close the fuel filler cap.If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

ÀATTENTION ASSIST:Take a Break!

Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue ora lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone alsosounds.X If necessary, take a break.During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you getenough rest.

ÀATTENTION ASSISTInoperative

ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

¨Malfunction

There is a malfunction in the chassis. The vehicle's handling charac-teristics may be affected.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

180 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Lane Keeping AssistCurrently Unavaila‐ble See Operator'sManual

Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.Rthere have been no lane markings for an extended period.Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display messagedisappears.Lane Keeping Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 119).X Clean the windshield.

Lane Keeping AssistInoperative Lane Keeping Assist is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Blind Spot AssistCurrently Unavaila‐ble See Operator'sManual

Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperaturerange.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations orother sources of electromagnetic radiation.

When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display messagedisappears.Blind Spot Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 119).X Restart the engine.

Blind Spot AssistInoperative Blind Spot Assist is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ëOff

The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding.A warning tone also sounds.X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 136).

The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmlydepressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled.A warning tone also sounds.X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function(Y page 136).

Display messages 181

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

DISTRONIC PLUS Off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 128).If it was not deactivated by the driver, a warning tone also sounds.

DISTRONIC PLUS NowAvailable DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been temporarilyunavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 128).

DISTRONIC PLUS Cur‐rently UnavailableSee Operator's Man‐ual

DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations orother sources of electromagnetic radiation.Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.Rthe on-board voltage is too low.A warning tone also sounds.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display messagedisappears.DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 119).X Restart the engine.

DISTRONIC PLUS Inop‐erative DISTRONIC PLUS is defective.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

DISTRONIC PLUS Sus‐pended You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is nolonger controlling the speed of the vehicle.X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUS- - - mph An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 128).

DISTRONIC PLUS andSPEEDTRONIC Inoper‐ativeDISTRONIC PLUS and SPEEDTRONIC are faulty. A warning tone alsosounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise Control Inop‐erative Cruise control is malfunctioning.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

182 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Cruise Control- - - mphRA condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled.You have tried to store a speed below 20mph (30 km/h), for exam-ple.RESP® is deactivated. The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit.X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and storethe speed.

orX Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 127).orX Reactivate ESP® (Y page 56).

Cruise Control Off Cruise control has been deactivated.If a warning tone also sounds, cruise control has deactivated auto-matically (Y page 127).

Tires

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Please Correct TirePressure The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tirepressure difference between the wheels is too great.X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 260).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 262).

Check Tires The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. Thewheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGTire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may begreatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 119).X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flattire (Y page 242).

X Check the tire pressure (Y page 260).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

Display messages 183

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Warning Tire Mal‐function The tire pressure in one ormore tires has dropped suddenly. Thewheelposition is shown in the multifunction display.

G WARNINGDriving with a flat tire poses a risk of the following hazards:Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.Ryou could lose control of the vehicle.Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-upand possibly a fire.

There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 119).X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flattire (Y page 242).

Tire Press. MonitorCurrently Unavaila‐bleBecause there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, nosignals from the tire pressure sensors are detected. The tire pressuremonitor is temporarily malfunctioning.X Drive on.The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as theproblem has been resolved.

TirePress. Sen‐sor(s) Missing There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or severalwheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in the mul-tifunction display.X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified special-ist workshop.

Tire Pressure Moni‐tor Inoperative NoWheel SensorsThe wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor. Thetire pressure monitor is deactivated.X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving fora few minutes.

Tire Press. MonitorInoperative The tire pressure monitor is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

184 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Vehicle

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Shift to 'P' or 'N'to Start Engine You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in posi-tion R or D.X Shift the selector lever to position P or N.

Apply Brake toShift from 'P' You have attempted to shift the selector lever to position D, R or Nwithout depressing the brake pedal.X Depress the brake pedal.

To Deselect P or N,Depress Brake andStart EngineWith the engine switched off, you have attempted to shift the selectorlever out of position P or N into another transmission position.X Depress the brake pedal.X Start the engine.

Transmission Not inP Risk of VehicleRolling AwayThe driver's door is open or not fully closed and the transmission is inposition R, N or D.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGThe vehicle may roll away.There is a risk of an accident.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 119).X Close the driver's door completely.

Only Shift to 'P'when Vehicle is Sta‐tionaryThe vehicle is moving.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Shift the transmission to position P.

Service Required DoNot Shift GearsVisit DealerYou cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction.A warning tone also sounds.If transmission position D is selected:X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the trans-mission from position D.

If transmission position R, N or P is selected:X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 273).X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

Reversing Not Possi‐ble Service Required The sub geartrain with the even gears has failed. You can no longerengage reverse gear. The smoothness of the gear change is restricted.The transmission is in emergency mode.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 185

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Transmission Mal‐function Stop A malfunction has occurred in the mechanical transmission compo-nents.A warning tone also sounds. The gearbox automatically shifts to posi-tion N.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Shift the selector lever to position P.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 119).X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

Depress Brake toStart Engine You cannot start the engine. The engine was switched off in positionDor R.X Depress the brake pedal and start the engine.

Only Shift to 'P'when Vehicle is Sta‐tionaryThe vehicle is moving.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Shift the transmission to position P.

jParking Lock Mal‐funct. Apply Park‐ing Brake

Transmission position P cannot be selected.X Make sure that the electric parking brake is applied.X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away before you leave it(Y page 273).

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

dTransmission OilCooling Malfunction

The transmission coolant pump is faulty. The transmission may over-heat.X In the on-board computer, select the AMG menu and check thetransmission oil temperature (Y page 162).

X Avoid excessive loading, e.g. due to dynamic driving.X If the transmission oil temperature is less than 248 ‡ (120†), youcan continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.

dTrans. Oil Overhea‐ted Drive on withCare

The transmission oil has overheated.Manual mode M and temporary manual drive program are no longeravailable. Only the Comfort setting is available for the transmission.The engine output is reduced according to the degree of overheating.X Allow the transmission oil to cool by adopting a defensive drivingstyle.

Electronic RearAxle DifferentialLock InoperativeThe electronic rear axle differential lock is inoperative.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Electronic RearAxle DifferentialLock CurrentlyUnavailable

The electronic rear axle differential lock motor has overheated.X Allow electronic rear axle differential lock to cool by adopting adefensive driving style.

186 Display messagesOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

N The tailgate is open.

G WARNINGWhen the engine is running, exhaust gases can enter the vehicle inte-rior if the tailgate is open.There is a risk of poisoning.X Close the tailgate.

M The hood is open. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGThe open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 119).X Close the hood.

C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.X Close all the doors.

Rear Spoiler Con‐trol System Inoper‐ativeThe rear spoiler cannot be fully retracted and may extend again.If the retraction of the rear spoiler is blocked, e.g. by ice:X Make sure that the cause of the block is eliminated.X Switch off the engine and lock the vehicle.X Start the vehicle after waiting a few minutes.The rear spoiler returns to the original position.

If this problem persists or the cause cannot be identified:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Rear Spoiler Inoper‐ative Limit 125 mph The rear spoiler cannot be fully extended and extends as far as pos-sible.The speed of the vehicle is limited to 125 mph (200 km/h).If the extension/retraction of the rear spoiler is blocked, e.g. by ice:X Make sure that the cause of the block is eliminated.X Switch off the engine and lock the vehicle.X Start the vehicle after waiting a few minutes.The rear spoiler returns to the original position.

If this problem persists or the cause cannot be identified:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 187

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

ÐPower Steering Mal‐function See Opera‐tor's Manual

The power steering is malfunctioning.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGYou will need to use more force to steer.There is a risk of an accident.X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact thenearest qualified specialist workshop.

Phone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiverrange.X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appearsin the multifunction display.

¥Check Washer Fluid

The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped belowthe minimum.X Add washer fluid (Y page 232).

SmartKey

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

ÂKey Does Not Belongto Vehicle

You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.X Use the correct SmartKey.

ÂTake Your Key fromIgnition

The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.X Remove the SmartKey.

ÂObtain a New Key

The SmartKey needs to be replaced.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ÂReplace Key Battery

The SmartKey battery is discharged.X Change the batteries (Y page 63).

ÂDon't Forget YourKey

The SmartKey is not in the ignition lock. You have opened the driver'sdoor with the engine switched off.This display message is displayed for amaximum of 60 seconds and issimply a reminder.X Take the SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle.

188 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

ÂKey Not Detected(white display message)

The SmartKey is currently undetected.X Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle.If the SmartKey still cannot be detected:X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desiredposition.

ÂKey Not Detected(red display message)

The SmartKey is not in the vehicle.A warning tone also sounds.If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle cen-trally or start the engine.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 119).X Locate the SmartKey.X Pressa on the steering wheel to confirm the display message.

Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, theSmartKey is not detected whilst the engine is running.A warning tone also sounds.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 119).X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and bring into key mode.

ÂInsert Key

The SmartKey is continually undetected.The SmartKey detection function has a temporary malfunction or isfaulty. A warning tone also sounds.X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desiredposition.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

General notesSome systems carry out a self-diagnosis when the ignition is switched on. Therefore, some indicatorand warning lamps may light up or flash temporarily. This behavior is non-critical. These indicatorand warning lamps only indicate a malfunction if they light up or flash after starting the engine orwhilst driving.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 189

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Safety

Seat belts

Warning/indicatorlamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences andM Solutions

ü N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for 6 seconds.The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten theirseat belts.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 39).

ü N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up. In addition, awarning tone sounds for up to 6 seconds.The driver's seat belt is not fastened.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 39).The warning tone ceases.

ü N The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts, as soon as thedriver's or the front-passenger door is closed.The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 39).The warning lamp goes out.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat.X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secureplace.The warning lamp goes out.

ü N The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warningsounds.The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The vehicle is beingdriven faster than 15mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15mph(25 km/h).X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 39).The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is being driven fasterthan 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secureplace.The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.

190 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Safety systems

Warning/indicatorlamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences andM Solutions

$J N$ (USA only),J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is litwhile the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGThe brake boosting effect ismalfunctioning and the braking characteristicsmay beaffected.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to roadand traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 119).X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

$J N$ (USA only),J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is litwhile the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds.There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

G WARNINGThe braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to roadand traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 119).X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not correct the malfunction.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

$ N USA only: the red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.The multifunction display also shows a display message with the# symbol.The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 191

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Warning/indicatorlamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences andM Solutions

! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.ABS (anti-lock braking system) is malfunctioning.If there is an additional warning tone, the EBD (electronic brake force distribution)is malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be faulty.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listedabove. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for exam-ple.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The brakingdistance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, suchas the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not be available.

$J֌!

N$ (USA only),J (Canada only): the red brakewarning lamp and the yellowESP® and ABS warning lamps are lit while the engine is running.ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be faulty.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listedabove. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for exam-ple.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The brakingdistance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

192 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

Warning/indicatorlamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences andM Solutions

÷ N The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of skidding or atleast one wheel has started to spin.Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary.X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.X Do not deactivate ESP®.In rare cases (Y page 56), it may be best to deactivate ESP®.Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 56).

÷ N The yellow ESP® warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.ESP® is malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be faulty.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listedabove.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

å N The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running or the ECOstart/stop function is activated.ESP® is deactivated.

G WARNINGIf ESP® is switched off, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Reactivate ESP®.In rare cases (Y page 56), it may be best to deactivate ESP®.Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 56).

X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.If ESP® cannot be activated:X Drive on carefully.X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 193

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

Warning/indicatorlamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences andM Solutions

M N The yellow SPORT handlingmode warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.SPORT handling mode is activated.

G WARNINGWhen SPORT handlingmode is switched on, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Only switch to SPORT handling mode in accordance with the conditions descri-bed in the "Activating/deactivating ESP" section (Y page 56).

F! NF (USA only),! (Canada only): the red indicator lamp for the electricparking brake flashes or is lit and/or the yellow warning lamp for the electricparking brake is lit.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

6 N The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.The restraint system is faulty.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered uninten-tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Have the restraint system checked immediately at a qualified specialist work-shop.

For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 35).

194 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

Engine

Warning/indicatorlamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences andM Solutions

; N The yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.There may be a malfunction, for example:Rin the engine managementRin the fuel injection systemRin the exhaust systemRin the ignition systemRin the fuel systemThe emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergencymode.X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.In some states, youmust immediately visit a qualified specialist workshop as soonas the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. This is due to the legal require-ments in effect in these states. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulationsapply in the state in which you are currently driving.

8 N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

8 N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.In addition, the; Check Engine warning lamp may light up.The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler cap.X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist workshop.

? N The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and thecoolant temperature gauge is at the start of the scale.The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gage is defective.The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of enginedamage if the coolant temperature is too high.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attentionto road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 119).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 195

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Warning/indicatorlamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences andM Solutions

? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running.The coolant level is too low.If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked orthe electric engine radiator fan may be malfunctioning.The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attentionto road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 119).X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine hascooled down.

X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes(Y page 231).

X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the engine coolant sys-tem checked.

X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow,slush or ice.

X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡(120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.

X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain,and stop-and-go traffic.

? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warningtone also sounds.The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). The airflow to the engineradiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low.

G WARNINGThe engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids whichmay have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occurjust by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attentionto road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 119).X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine hascooled down.

X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes(Y page 231).

X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the engine coolant sys-tem checked.

196 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

Warning/indicatorlamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences andM Solutions

X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow,slush or ice.

X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the nearest qualifiedspecialist workshop.

X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain,and stop-and-go traffic.

Driving systems

Warning/indicatorlamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences andM Solutions

· N The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is inmotion. A warningtone also sounds.You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your line of travel at toohigh a speed.X Be prepared to brake immediately.X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or takeevasive action.

For further information about the distance warning function of COLLISION PRE-VENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (Y page 53).

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 197

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

Tires

Warning/indicatorlamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences and M Solutions

h N The yellow tire pressuremonitorwarning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.The tire pressuremonitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the tires.

G WARNINGTire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire trac-tion.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatlyimpaired.There is a risk of an accident.

X Stop the vehicle withoutmaking any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Payattention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 119).X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire(Y page 242).

X Check the tire pressure (Y page 260).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

h N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction)flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit.The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

G WARNINGThe system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire pressure.There is a risk of an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

198 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

Vehicle

Warning/indicatorlamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Ð N The red power steering warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.The power steering is malfunctioning.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGYou will need to use more force to steer.There is a risk of an accident.X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified specialist work-shop.

X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the nearest qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 199

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

General notes

The multimedia system section in this manualdescribes the basic principles for operation.More information can be found in the DigitalOperator's Manual.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you operate information systems and com-munication equipment integrated in the vehi-cle while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate the equip-ment when the vehicle is stationary.

Youmust observe the legal requirements for thecountry in which you are currently driving whenoperating the multimedia system.The multimedia system calculates the route tothe destination without taking the following intoaccount, for example:Rtraffic lightsRstop and yield signsRparking or stopping restrictionsRroad narrowingRother road and traffic rules and regulationsThe multimedia system may give incorrect nav-igation recommendations if the actual street/traffic situation does not correspond with thedigital map's data.For example:Ra diverted routeRthe road layout or the direction of a one-waystreet has been changed

For this reason, you must always observe roadand traffic rules and regulations during yourjourney. Road and traffic rules and regulationsalways have priority over multimedia systemdriving recommendations.Navigation announcements are intended todirect you while driving without diverting yourattention from the road and driving.

Please always use this feature instead of con-sulting the map display for directions. Lookingat the icons ormap display can distract you fromtraffic conditions and driving, and increase therisk of an accident.This equipment complies with FCC radiationexposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equip-ment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF)Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65.This equipment has very low levels of RF energythat is deemed to comply without maximumpermissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it isdesirable that it should be installed and oper-ated with at least 8 inches (20cm) and morebetween the radiator and a person's body(excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet andlegs.)

G WARNINGModifications to electronic components, theirsoftware as well as wiring can impair theirfunction and/or the function of other net-worked components. In particular, systemsrelevant to safety could also be affected. As aresult, these may no longer function as inten-ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety ofthe vehicle. There is an increased risk of anaccident and injury.Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-tronic components or their software. Youshould have all work to electrical and elec-tronic equipment carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

If you make any changes to the vehicle elec-tronics, the general operating permit is ren-dered invalid.

Function restrictions

For safety reasons, some functions are restric-ted or unavailable while the vehicle is in motion.You will notice this, for example, because eitheryou will not be able to select certain menu itemsor a message will appear to this effect.

200 Function restrictionsMultim

ediasystem

Operating system

Overview

General notes! Do not use the space in front of the displayfor storage. Objects placed here could dam-age the display or impair its function. Avoidany direct contact with the display surface.Pressure on the display surface may result inimpairments to the display, which could beirreversible.

Wearing polarized sunglasses may impair yourability to read the display.The display has an automatic temperature-con-trolled switch-off feature. The brightness isautomatically reduced if the temperature is toohigh. The display may temporarily switch offcompletely.

Cleaning instructions! Do not touch the display. The display has avery sensitive high-gloss surface; there is arisk of scratching. If you have to clean thescreen, however, use a mild cleaning agentand a soft, lint-free cloth.

The display must be switched off and havecooled down before you start cleaning. Do notapply pressure to the display surface whencleaning it, as this could cause irreversible dam-age to the display.

Switching the multimedia systemon/offX Press the control knob on the centerconsole to the right of the controller.

Adjusting the volumeX Turn the control knob on the center con-sole to the right of the controller.

The volume is adjusted:Rfor the currently selected media sourceRduring traffic or navigation announcementsRin hands-free mode during a phone call

Switching the sound on or offX Press the8 button on the multifunctionsteering wheel.If the audio output is switched off, the statusline will show the8 symbol. If you switchthemedia source or set the volume, the soundis automatically switched on.i You will hear navigation messages evenwhen the sound is muted (COMAND).

FunctionsThe multimedia system has the following func-tions:RRadio modeRMedia mode with media searchRSound systemsRNavigation systemCOMAND: navigation via the hard driveRCommunication functionsRSIRIUS Weather (COMAND)RVehicle functions with system settingsRFavorites functions

ControllerThe controller in the center console lets you:Rselect menu items on the displayRenter charactersRselect a destination on the mapRsave entriesThe controller can be:Rturned3Rslid left or right1Rslid forwards or back4Rslid diagonally2Rpressed briefly or pressed and held7

Back buttonYou can use the% button to exit amenu or tocall up the basic display of the current operatingmode.

Operating system 201

Multim

ediasystem

Z

X To exit the menu: briefly press the%button.The multimedia system changes to the nexthigher menu level in the current operatingmode.

X To call up the basic display: press the%button for longer than two seconds.The multimedia system changes to the basicdisplay of the current operating mode.

Touchpad

Switching the touchpad on/offMultimedia system:X Select VehicleQSystem Set‐tingsQActivate Touchpad.The touchpad is switched on O or off ª.

Operating the touchpad

: Touch-sensitive surface; Favorites button= Calls up audio and telephone menu (quick

access)? Returns to the previous displayNavigating in menus and lists can be done viatouch-sensitive surface: by swiping withyour finger.X To select themenu item: swipe up, down, tothe left or right.

X Press the touchpad.X To move the digital map: swipe in all direc-tions.

Swiping with two fingers, e.g. using this func-tion:X To show or hide the audio menu: swipe upor down with two fingers.

X To increase or reduce the vehicle andsound settings: turn two fingers to the rightor left.

X To zoom in and out of the map (COMAND):move two fingers together or apart.

Character entry with handwriting rec-ognition

Entering charactersX Use one finger to write characters on the sur-face.The character is entered in the input line. Ifthe character that you have entered can beinterpreted in different ways, these charactersuggestions are displayed.

X If character suggestions are shown, turn andpress the controller.

X Resume the character entry on the touchpad.

Handwriting recognition

: Active input line; Inserts a space= Character entered on the touchpad? Deletes charactersX To display the menu: press the touchpad.

202 Operating systemMultim

ediasystem

: Exits the menu; Returns to handwriting recognition= Uses the phone book or text templates

(COMAND)? Selects the input line or changes the posi-

tion of the cursorA Switches the languageB Finishes character entryX To select the input line: selectp.X Swipe up or down.X To move the cursor within the input line:selectp.

X Swipe to the left or right.X To delete characters: swipe to the left if aninput line is selected.

X To confirm the entry: press the touchpad.

Switching the text reader function of thehandwriting recognition on/offMultimedia system:X Select VehicleQSystem Set‐tingsQRead Out Handwriting Recog‐nition.The read-aloud function is switched on O oroff ª.

Quick access for audio

Changing the station/music track

Depending on the audio source that is currentlyactivated, you can use this function to select thenext station or music track.X Swipe upwards with two fingers on the touch-pad.The current audio source is displayed.

X To select the previous or next station/music track: glide to the right or left.The selected station/music track is played.

Switching the character entry betweentouchpad and controllerPrerequisite: an input line for text, numbers orcharacters has been selected.X To switch to the controller: press the con-troller.Character entry using the controller is active.

X To switch to the touchpad: press the touch-pad with your finger.Handwriting recognition on the touchpad isactive.

Favorites

Calling up and exiting favoritesX To call up: press theò button on the con-troller or on the touchpad.

X Select a favorite, e. g. Vehicle.The favorites are displayed.

X To exit: press theò button again.

Operating system 203

Multim

ediasystem

Z

Adding favorites

Adding a predefined favorite

: Adds a new favorite; Renames a selected favorite= Moves a selected favorite? Deletes a selected favoriteX Press theò button.X Slide6 the controller.The menu bar is shown.

X Select Reassign.The categories are displayed.

X Select a category.The favorites are displayed.

X Select a favorite.X Add a favorite at the desired position.If a favorite has already been added at thisposition, it will be overwritten.

Adding your own favoriteX Select VehicleQClimate Control.X Press and hold theò button until thefavorites are displayed.

X Add a favorite at the desired position.If a favorite has already been added at thisposition, it will be overwritten.

Climate control settings

General notesYou can adjust the climate control settingsusing the climate control bar or the climate con-trol menu.You can set the most important climate controlfunctions such as temperature, airflow and airdistribution using the climate control bar. Theclimate control bar is visible in most displays.

You can find all available climate control func-tions in the climate control menu. You can usethe climate control bar to switch to the climatecontrol menu.

Overview

Example: COMAND: Adjusts temperature and air distribution and

displays the current setting; Calls up the climate control menu, displays

the current cooling and climate mode set-ting

= Adjusts air distribution and temperature anddisplays the current setting

There may be fewer settings or none dependingon your vehicle's equipment.

Calling up the climate control menuMultimedia system:X Select Vehicle.The vehicle menu is displayed.

X Slide6 the controller repeatedly until theclimate control bar is activated.

X To select from climate control bar;: turnand press the controller.The menu for selecting climate control func-tions is activated.

X To select the desired climate control function:turn and press the controller.The selected climate control functionappears.

Calling up the climate control barMultimedia system:X Select Vehicle.The vehicle menu is displayed.

X Slide6 the controller repeatedly until theclimate control bar is activated.

204 Operating systemMultim

ediasystem

Settings in the climate menu

Setting the climate modeBy setting the climate mode you determine thetype of airflow. The setting is activewhen the air-conditioning system is set toà (Y page 96).X Call up the climate control menu(Y page 204).

X To select Climate Mode: turn and press thecontroller.

X To change the setting: turn the controller.Exiting a menu:X Press the% button.The current airflow setting is shown in the cli-mate control bar: DIFFUSE, MEDIUM or FOCUS.Settings in the bottom bar of the cli-mate control menu

Switching cooling with air dehumidifica-tion on/offX Call up the climate control menu(Y page 204).

X Slide6 the controller repeatedly until thebottom bar is activated.

X To select O A/C: turn and press the control-ler.

X Switch cooling with air dehumidification onO or off ª.

i The current status of the cooling function isdisplayed in the climate control bar: A/C ON– activated, A/C OFF – deactivated.

i Deactivating the cooling with air dehumidi-fication function reduces fuel consumption.

Synchronizing the climate control set-tingsUse O Sync (synchronization) to select the cli-mate control setting for all zones together O orseparately ª.X Call up the climate control menu(Y page 204).

X Slide6 the controller repeatedly until thebottom bar is activated.

X To select O Sync: turn and press the con-troller.

X Switch the synchronization function on O oroff ª.

For further information on synchronizing climatecontrol settings, see (Y page 97).

Navigation mode

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you operate information systems and com-munication equipment integrated in the vehi-cle while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate the equip-ment when the vehicle is stationary.

Youmust observe the legal requirements for thecountry in which you are currently driving whenoperating the navigation system.

General notesAmong other things, correct functioning of thenavigation systemdepends onGPS reception. Incertain situations, GPS reception may beimpaired, there may be interference or theremay be no reception at all, e.g. in tunnels orparking garages.The following descriptions apply to navigationwith COMAND. Further information can befound in the Digital Operator's Manual.

Selecting a route type and route optionsMultimedia system:X Select NaviQNavigation.Themap shows the vehicle's current position.

X Slide6 the controller.X Select OptionsQRoute Settings.Notes for route types:REco RouteCalculates an economic route.RDynamic Traffic Route

Operating system 205

Multim

ediasystem

Z

Traffic reports on the route for the route guid-ance are taken into account (only available inthe USA).RCalculate Alternative RoutesDifferent routes are being calculated. Insteadof Start, select the Continue menu item.

Notes for route options:RUse Toll RoadsThe route calculation includes roads whichrequire you to pay a usage fee (toll).RUse Carpool Lanes (only available in theUSA)Prerequisite: your vehicle meets the accessconditions for carpool lanes.Carpool lanes will be included if the carpoollanes option is activated.

Entering an addressMultimedia system:X Select NaviQNavigation.Themap shows the vehicle's current position.

X Slide6 the controller.X Select DestinationQAddress Entry.Enter an address, e.g. as follows:Rcity or ZIP code, street, house numberRcountry, city or ZIP codeRcity or ZIP code, centerRstreet, city or ZIP code, intersectionX Select City.The city in which the vehicle is currently loca-ted (current vehicle position) is at the top.Below this, you will see locations for whichroute guidance has already been carried out.

X Enter the city.TheG symbol: the location is contained onthe digital map multiple times.

X To switch to the list: slide the5 control-ler.

X Select the location.If available, the ZIP code is shown. If there aredifferent ZIP codes available for the location,the corresponding digits are displayedwith anX.

X Enter the street and house number.The address is in the menu.

Further options for destination entry:Rsearch for a keyword

The keyword search finds destinations usingfragments of words.Rselect the last destinationRselect a contactRselect a POIYou can search for a POI by location, name ortelephone number.Rselect destination on the mapRenter intermediate destinationYou can map the route to the destinationyourself with up to four intermediate destina-tions.Rselect destinations from Mercedes-BenzAppsRselect geo-coordinates

Calculating the routePrerequisite: the address has been entered andis in the menu.X Select Start or Continue.The route is calculatedwith the selected routetype and the selected route options.If route guidance has already been activated,a prompt will appear asking whether you wishto end the current route guidance.

X Select Yes or Set as Intermediate Des‐tination.Yes cancels the current route guidance andstarts route calculation to the new destina-tion.Set as Intermediate Destination addsthe new destination in addition to the existingdestination and opens the intermediate des-tinations list.

Connecting a mobile phone

PrerequisitesFor telephony via the Bluetooth® interface, yourequire a Bluetooth®-capablemobile phone. Themobile phone must support Hands-Free Profile1.0 or above.Multimedia system:X Select VehicleQSystem Set‐tingsQActivate Bluetooth.X Activate Bluetooth® O.

206 Operating systemMultim

ediasystem

Mobile phone:X Activate Bluetooth® and, if necessary, Blue-tooth® visibility for other devices (see themanufacturer's operating instructions).

The Bluetooth® device names for all of oneman-ufacturer's products might be identical. Tomake it possible to clearly identify your mobilephone, change the device name (see the man-ufacturer's operating instructions).If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (PhoneBook Access Profile) and MAP (MessageAccess Profile) Bluetooth® profiles, the follow-ing information will be transmitted after youconnect:RPhone bookRCall listsRMessages

i Further information on suitable mobilephones can be obtained on the Internet at:http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect

i In the USA you can also contact theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centerat 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372).In Canada, you can get in touch with the Cus-tomer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100.

Searching for and authorizing a mobilephoneBefore using your mobile phone with the multi-media system for the first time, you will need tosearch for the phone and then authorize (con-nect) it. Depending on themobile phone, author-ization either takes place by means of SecureSimple Pairing or by entering a passkey. Themultimedia system automatically makes theprocedure that is relevant for yourmobile phoneavailable. The mobile phone is always connec-ted automatically after authorization. Furtherinformation on using a mobile phone with themultimedia system (see the Digital Operator'sManual).If the multimedia system does not detect yourmobile phone, this may be due to particularsecurity settings on your mobile phone (see themanufacturer's operating instructions).Only one mobile phone can be connected to themultimedia system at any one time.Searching for a mobile phone

COMAND:X Select PhoneQConnectDeviceQSearch for PhonesQStartSearch.The available mobile phones are displayed.

Symbols in the device list

Sym-bol

Explanation

Ï New mobile phone found, not yetauthorized.

Ñ Mobile phone is authorized, but isnot connected

# Mobile phone is authorized andconnected

Connecting a mobile phoneAuthorization using Secure Simple Pairing:X Select mobile phone.A code is displayed in the multimedia systemand on the mobile phone.

X If the codes match: select Yes on the mul-timedia system.

X Confirm code on the mobile phone. Depend-ing on the mobile phone used, confirm theconnection to the multimedia system and forthe PBAP and MAP Bluetooth® profiles. Theprompt to confirm may take up to twominutes to be displayed (see the manufactur-er's operating instructions).

X If the codes are different: select No on themultimedia system.The process is canceled.Repeat authorization.

Authorization by entering a passkey:X Select Bluetooth® name of the mobile phone.The input menu for the passkey is displayed.

X Choose a one to sixteen-digit number combi-nation as a passkey.

X Enter the passkey on the multimedia system.X Press ¬ to confirm.X Enter and confirm the passkey on the mobilephone. Depending on the mobile phone used,confirm the connection to themultimedia sys-tem and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth®profiles. The prompt to confirm may take upto two minutes to be displayed (see the man-ufacturer's operating instructions).

Operating system 207

Multim

ediasystem

Z

Switching between mobile phonesIf you have authorized more than one mobilephone, you can switch between the individualphones.Multimedia system:X Select Connect Device.X Select a mobile phone from the device list.

Media mode

General notesIf you wish to play external media sources, thedefault display must already be turned on. Fur-ther information on media mode (see the DigitalOperator's Manual).The following external media sources can beused:RApple® devices (e.g. iPhone®)RUSB devices (e.g. USB stick, MP3 player)RCD/DVD (COMAND)RSD memory cards (COMAND)Rvia devices connected by Bluetooth®

Activating media modeMultimedia system:X Select MediaQDevices.The available media sources will be shown.The # dot indicates the current setting.

X Select the media source.Playable files are played.

Inserting and removing an SD memorycard (COMAND)

Important safety notesG WARNINGSDmemory cards are small parts. They can beswallowed and cause asphyxiation. Thisposes an increased risk of injury or even fatalinjury.Keep SD memory cards out of the reach ofchildren. If an SD memory card is swallowed,seek immediate medical attention.

! If you are no longer using the SD memorycard, you should remove it and take it out ofthe vehicle. High temperatures can damagethe card.

Inserting an SD memory cardThe SD card slot is located in the stowage com-partment under the armrest.X Insert the SD memory card into the SD cardslot until it engages. The side with the con-tacts must face downwards.

X Select the media source (Y page 208).

Ejecting an SD memory cardX Press the memory card.The memory card is ejected.

X Remove the memory card.

Connecting USB devicesThere are two USB ports in the stowage spaceunder the armrest.X Connect the USB device to the USB port.X Select the media source (Y page 208).

208 Operating systemMultim

ediasystem

Stowage areas

Loading guidelines

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbonmonoxide. If the tailgateis open when the engine is running, particu-larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumescould enter the passenger compartment.There is a risk of poisoning.Turn off the engine before opening the tail-gate. Never drive with the tailgate open.

G WARNINGIf objects, luggage or loads are not secured ornot secured sufficiently, they could slip, tipover or be flung around and thereby hit vehicleoccupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-den change in direction.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping before thejourney.

G WARNINGThe exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim canbecome very hot. If you come into contactwith these parts of the vehicle, you could burnyourself. There is a risk of injury.Always be particularly careful around theexhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allowthese components to cool down before touch-ing them.

The handling characteristics of a laden vehicleare dependent on the distribution of the loadwithin the vehicle. For this reason, you shouldobserve the following notes when transporting aload:RNever exceed the maximum permissiblegross vehicle weight or the gross axle weightrating of the vehicle (including occupants).The values are specified on the vehicle iden-tification plate on the B-pillar of the driver'sdoor.RThe cargo compartment is the preferred placeto carry objects.

RPosition heavy loads as far forwards as pos-sible and as low down in the cargo compart-ment as possible.RThe load must not protrude above the upperedge of the seat backrests.RHook in the cargo net when loading.RSecure the load with sufficiently strong andwear-resistant tie-downs. Pad sharp edges forprotection.

Stowage spaces

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you transport objects in the vehicle interiorand these are not adequately secured, theycould slip or be flung around and therebystrike vehicle occupants. In addition, cupholders, open stowage spaces and mobilephone brackets may not always be able tohold the objects placed in them in the event ofan accident. There is a risk of injury, particu-larly in the event of sharp braking or suddenchanges of direction.RAlways stow objects in such a way that theycannot be tossed about in these or similarsituations.RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-trude out of the stowage spaces, luggagenets or stowage nets.REnsure that closable stowage spaces areshut before beginning your journey.RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-ted, sharp-edged, fragile or large objects inthe cargo compartment.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 209).

Stowage areas 209

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Glove box

X To open: pull handle: and open glove boxflap;.

X To close: fold glove box flap; upwards untilit engages.

The glove box can be locked and unlocked usingthe mechanical key.X To lock: insert the mechanical key into thelock and turn it to position2.

X To unlock: insert the mechanical key into thelock and turn it to position1.

Stowage compartment in front of thearmrest

X To open: slide cover: forwards.

Stowage compartment under armrest

X To open: press button:.The stowage compartment opens from therear.

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the fol-lowing may be in the stowage compartment: amultimedia connector unit with an SD card slotand 2 USB ports, e.g. for use with an iPod®,iPhone® or MP3 player; see the separate oper-ating instructions.The ignition lock for starting the engine with thekey is in the stowage compartment(Y page 103).

Additional stowage spaceDepending on the equipment, the followingadditional stowage areas are available in thevehicle:Ropen stowage compartments in the doorsRstowage net in front-passenger footwellRstowage net on the left hand on the rear wallbehind the seats

i Reflective safety jackets can be stowed inthe stowage net on the rear wall behind thedriver's seat.

Observe the safety guidelines for stowagespaces (Y page 209).

210 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

Cargo compartment cover

Important safety notes

G WARNINGOn its own, the cargo compartment covercannot secure or restrain heavy objects,items of luggage and heavy loads. You couldbe hit by an unsecured load during suddenchanges in direction, braking or in the event ofan accident. There is an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. byusing tie downs, even if you are using thecargo compartment cover.

RThe cargo compartment cover concealsobjects in the vehicle's cargo compartment.

Attaching and detaching the cargo com-partment cover

X To attach: pull the cargo compartment coverby grab handle: and attach it to retainers;on the left and right-hand sides.

X To detach: detach the cargo compartmentcover from retainers; and guide it forwardsby grab handle: above retainers;, until itis completely rolled up.

Cargo net

Important safety notes

G WARNINGOn its own, the cargo net cannot secure orrestrain heavy objects, items of luggage andheavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecuredload during sudden changes in direction,braking or in the event of an accident. There isan increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. byusing tie downs, even if you are using thecargo net.

It is important to use a cargo net if you load thevehicle with small objects above the seat backr-ests. For safety reasons, always use a cargo netwhen transporting loads.Remove the cargo net from the bag supplied inthe cargo compartment.X Unroll and unfold the cargo net.

Attaching and tightening the cargo net

X To attach and tighten: push the seats as farback as possible.

X From the vehicle interior, insert hooks: intoupper retainers; and turn back by 90°.Upper tensioning hook= stretches the cargonet automatically.

Stowage areas 211

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

X Attach hooks? to lower retainersA.X After driving a short distance, check the ten-sion of the cargo net.

X To loosen and detach: turn back hooks:by 90° and detach from upper retainer;.

X Detach hooks? from lower retainersA.X To stow: fold the cargo net, roll it up and stowit in the bag supplied.

Features

Cup holder

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you transport objects in the vehicle interiorand these are not adequately secured, theycould slip or be flung around and therebystrike vehicle occupants. In addition, cupholders, open stowage spaces and mobilephone brackets may not always be able tohold the objects placed in them in the event ofan accident. There is a risk of injury, particu-larly in the event of sharp braking or suddenchanges of direction.RAlways stow objects in such a way that theycannot be tossed about in these or similarsituations.RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-trude out of the stowage spaces, luggagenets or stowage nets.

REnsure that closable stowage spaces areshut before beginning your journey.RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-ted, sharp-edged, fragile or large objects inthe cargo compartment.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 209).

! Only use the cup holders for containers ofthe right size and which have lids. The drinkscould otherwise spill.

Cup holder in the center console

X To open: slide cover: forwards until itengages.

The divider in the cup holder can be removed,e.g. for inserting smaller drinks cans.X To remove: pull the divider up and remove it.X To replace: re-insert the divider and push itdown until it engages.

You can remove the rubbermat of cup holder;to clean it. Clean with clear, lukewarm wateronly.

Sun visors

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf themirror cover of the vanitymirror is foldedup when the vehicle is in motion, you could beblinded by incident light. There is a risk of anaccident.Always keep the mirror cover folded downwhile driving.

212 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Sun visor (variant 1)

: Mirror light; Bracket= Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket? Vanity mirrorA Mirror cover

Sun visor (variant 2)

: Mirror light; Bracket= Retaining strip, e.g. for a parking lot ticket? Vanity mirrorA Mirror cover

Vanity mirror in the sun visorMirror light: only functions if the sun visor isclipped into retainer; andmirror coverA hasbeen folded up.

Moving the sun visor(sun visor variant 1 only)

X Fold down the sun visor.X Slide the sun visor horizontally as desired.

Glare from the side

X Fold down sun visor:.X Pull sun visor: out of bracket;.X Swing sun visor: to the side.X Slide sun visor: horizontally as required.

Ashtray! The stowage space under the ashtray is notheat resistant. Before placing lit cigarettes inthe ashtray, make sure that the ashtray isproperly engaged. Otherwise, the stowagespace could be damaged.

Features 213

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

You can place insert? into the cup holder onthe left-hand or right-hand side.X Slide cover: forwards until it engages.X To open: lift up lid;.X To close: press lid; downwards.X To remove: pull ashtray= up and out ofinsert?.

X To insert: place ashtray= into insert?.Remove insert? to be able to use the entirecup holder. Store removed insert? and ashtray= in a suitable place. Observe the loadingguidelines (Y page 209).

Cigarette lighter

G WARNINGYou can burn yourself if you touch the hotheating element or the socket of the cigarettelighter.In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:Rthe hot cigarette lighter fallsRa child holds the hot cigarette lighter toobjects, for example

There is a risk of fire and injury.Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.Always make sure that the cigarette lighter isout of reach of children. Never leave childrenunsupervised in the vehicle.

Your attention must always be focused on thetraffic conditions. Only use the cigarette lighterwhen road and traffic conditions permit.

X Select key position 2with the Start/Stop but-ton (Y page 103).

X To open: slide cover: forwards until itengages.

X Press in cigarette lighter;.Cigarette lighter;will pop out automaticallywhen the heating element is red-hot.

X To close: briefly press cover: at the front.

12 V sockets

General notesX Select key position 1 using the Start/Stopbutton (Y page 103).

The sockets can be used for accessories with amaximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accessoriesinclude such items as chargers for mobilephones.If you use the sockets for long periods when theengine is switched off, the battery may dis-charge.An emergency cut-out ensures that the on-board voltage does not drop too low. If the on-board voltage is too low, the power to the sock-ets is automatically cut. This ensures that thereis sufficient power to start the engine.

214 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Socket in the cargo compartment

X Lift up the cover of socket:.

mbrace

General notesThe mbrace system is only available in the USA.You must have a license agreement to activatethembrace service. Make sure that your systemis activated and operational. To log in, press theï MB Info call button. If any of the stepsmentioned are not carried out, the system maynot be activated.If you have questions about the activation, con-tact one of the following telephone hotlines:Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or1-866-990-9007Shortly after successfully registering with thembrace service, a user ID and password will besent to you by mail. You can use this passwordto log onto the mbrace area under "OwnersOnline" at http://www.mbusa.com.The system is available if:Rit has been activated and is operationalRthe corresponding mobile phone network isavailable for transmitting data to the Cus-tomer CenterRa service subscription is availableDetermining the location of the vehicle on amapis only possible if:RGPS reception is available.Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded to theCustomer Assistance Center.

The mbrace systemTo adjust the volume during a call, proceed asfollows:X Press theW orX button on the multi-function steering wheel.

orX Use the volume control on the multimediasystem.

The system offers various services, e.g.:RAutomatic and manual emergency callRRoadside Assistance callRMB Info callYou can find information and a description of allavailable features under "Owners Online" athttp://www.mbusa.com.

System self-testAfter you have switched on the ignition, the sys-tem carries out a self-diagnosis.A malfunction in the system has been detectedif one of the following occurs:RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does notcome on during the system self-test.RThe indicator lamp in the F RoadsideAssistance button does not light up duringself-diagnosis of the system.RThe indicator lamp in the ï MB Info callbutton does not light up during self-diagnosisof the system.RThe indicator lamp in one or more of the fol-lowing buttons continues to light up red afterthe system self-diagnosis:- SOS button- F Roadside Assistance call button- ï MB Info call buttonRThe Inoperative or the Service NotActivated message appears in the multi-function display after the system self-diagno-sis.

If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above,the system may not operate as expected. In theevent of an emergency, help will have to besummoned by other means.Have the system checked at the nearest author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center or contact the fol-lowing service hotlines:

Features 215

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or1-866-990-9007

Emergency call

Important safety notesG WARNINGIt can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle,even if you have pressed the SOS button in anemergency if:Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the vehi-cle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accidentRthe vehicle is on a dangerous section ofroadRthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily beseen by other road users, particularly whendark or in poor visibility conditions

There is a risk of an accident and injury.Leave the vehicle immediately in this or simi-lar situations as soon as it is safe to do so.Move to a safe location along with other vehi-cle occupants. In such situations, secure thevehicle in accordance with national regula-tions, e. g. with a warning triangle.

General notesObserve the notes on system activation(Y page 215).An emergency call is dialed automatically if anair bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is trig-gered. You cannot end an automatically trig-gered emergency call yourself.An emergency call can also be initiated man-ually.As soon as the emergency call has been initi-ated, the indicator lamp in the SOS buttonflashes. The Connecting Call messageappears in the multifunction display.The audio output is muted.Once the connection has been made, the CallConnected message appears in the multifunc-tion display.

All important information on the emergency istransmitted, for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicle (as determinedby the GPS system)Rvehicle identification numberRinformation on the severity of the accidentShortly after the emergency call has been initi-ated, a voice connection is automatically estab-lished between theCustomer AssistanceCenterand the vehicle occupants.RIf the vehicle occupants respond, theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centerattempts to get more information on theemergency.RIf there is no response from the vehicle occu-pants, an ambulance is immediately sent tothe vehicle.

If no voice connection can be established to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,the system has been unable to initiate an emer-gency call.This can occur, for example, if the relevantmobile phone network is not available. The indi-cator lamp in the SOS button flashes continu-ously.The Call Failedmessage appears in the mul-tifunction display and must be confirmed.In this case, summon assistance by othermeans.

Making an emergency call

X To initiate an emergency call manually:press cover: briefly to open.

X Press and hold the SOS button for at least onesecond;.The indicator lamp in SOS button; flashesuntil the emergency call is concluded.

216 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

X Wait for a voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.

X After the emergency call, close cover:.If the mobile phone network is unavailable,mbrace will not be able to make the emergencycall. If you leave the vehicle immediately afterpressing the SOS button, you will not knowwhether mbrace placed the emergency call. Inthis case, always summon assistance by othermeans.

Roadside Assistance button

X To call Roadside Assistance: press Road-side Assistance button:.This initiates a call to theMercedes-Benz Cus-tomer Assistance Center.The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistancebutton: flashes while the call is active. TheConnecting Call message appears in themultifunction display. The audio output ismuted.

If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐nected message appears in the multifunctiondisplay.If a mobile phone network and GPS receptionare available, the system transfers data to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicleRvehicle identification numberThe multimedia system display indicates that acall is active.Voice output is not available in this case.A voice connection is established between theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centerand the vehicle occupants.From the remote malfunction diagnosis, theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center

can ascertain the nature of the problem(Y page 220).The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-ter either sends a qualifiedMercedes-Benz tech-nician or makes arrangements for your vehicleto be transported to the nearest authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.You may be charged for services such as repairwork and/or towing.You can find more information in the separatembrace manual.The system has not been able to initiate a Road-side Assistance call, if:Rthe indicator lamp for Roadside Assistancecall button F is flashing continuously.Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center was estab-lished.

This can occur if the relevant mobile phone net-work is not available, for example.The Call Failedmessage appears in the mul-tifunction display.X To end a call: press the~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding multimedia systembutton for ending a phone call.

MB Info call button

X To call MB Info: pressMB Info call button:.This initiates a call to theMercedes-Benz Cus-tomer Assistance Center.The indicator lamp in MB Info call button:flashes while the connection is being made.The Connecting Call message appears inthe multifunction display. The audio output ismuted.

Features 217

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐nected message appears in the multifunctiondisplay.If a mobile phone network and GPS receptionare available, the system transfers data to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicleRvehicle identification numberVoice output is not available in this case.A voice connection is established between theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centerand the vehicle occupants.You receive information about operating yourvehicle, about the nearest authorizedMercedes-Benz Center and about other prod-ucts and services from Mercedes-Benz.You can find further information on the mbracesystem under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.The system has not been able to initiate an MBInfo call, if:Rthe indicator lamp inMB Info call button ïis flashing continuously.Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center was estab-lished.

This can occur if the relevant mobile phone net-work is not available, for example.The Call Failedmessage appears in the mul-tifunction display.X To end a call: press the~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding multimedia systembutton for ending a phone call.

Call priorityWhen service calls are active, e.g. RoadsideAssistance or MB Info calls, an emergency callcan still be initiated. In this case, an emergencycall will take priority and override all other activecalls.The indicator lamp of the respective buttonflashes until the call is ended.An emergency call can only be terminated by theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.

All other calls can be ended by pressing:Rthe~ button on themultifunction steeringwheelRthe corresponding button in the multimediasystem to end the voice call

When a call is initiated, the audio system ismuted.The mobile phone is no longer connected to themultimedia system.However, if you want to use your mobile phone,do so only when the vehicle is stationary and ina safe location.

Downloading destinations

Downloading destinationsDownloading destinations gives you access to adatabase with over 15 million points of interest(POIs). These can be downloaded on the navi-gation system in your vehicle. If you know thedestination, the address can be downloaded.Alternatively, you can obtain the location ofPoints of Interest (POIs)/important destinationsin the vicinity.Furthermore, you can download routes with upto four way points.You are prompted to confirm route guidance tothe address entered.X SelectYes by turning3 or sliding1the controller and confirm with7.The system calculates the route and subse-quently starts the route guidance with theaddress entered.If you select No the address can be stored inthe address book.

The destination download function is availableif:Rthe vehicle is equipped with a navigation sys-tem.Rthe relevant mobile phone network is availa-ble and data transfer is possible.

Route AssistanceThis service is part of thembrace PLUS Packageand cannot be purchased separately.You can use the route assistance function evenif the vehicle is not equipped with a navigationsystem.Within the framework of this service, you receivea professional and reliable form of navigationsupport without having to leave your vehicle.

218 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

The customer service representative finds asuitable route depending on your vehicle's cur-rent position and the desired destination. Youwill then be guided live through the current routesection.

Search & Send

General notesTo use "Search & Send", your vehicle must beequipped with mbrace and a navigation system.Additionally, an mbrace service subscriptionmust be completed."Search & Send" is a destination entry service. Adestination address which is found on GoogleMaps® can be transferred via mbrace directly toyour vehicle's navigation system.

Specifying and sending the destinationaddressX Go to the website http://maps.google.comand enter a destination address into the entryfield.

X To send the destination address to the e-mail address of your mbrace account:click on the corresponding button on theweb-site.Example:If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then'Mercedes-Benz', the destination address willbe sent to your vehicle.

X When the "Send" dialog window appears:Enter the e-mail address you specified whensetting up your mbrace account into the cor-responding field.

X Click "Send".Information on specific commands such as"Address entry" or "Send" can be found on thewebsite.

Calling up a transmitted destinationaddressX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 103).The transmitted destination address is loadedinto the vehicle's navigation system.

A display message appears, asking whethernavigation should be started.

X SelectYes by turning3 or sliding1the controller and confirm with7.The system calculates the route and subse-quently starts the route guidance with theaddress entered.If you select No the address can be stored inthe address book.If you have sent more than one destinationaddress, each individual destination must beconfirmed separately.

Destination addresses are loaded in the sameorder as the order in which they were sent.If you ownmultipleMercedes-Benz vehicleswithmbrace and activated mbrace accounts:If multiple vehicles are registered under thesame e-mail address, the destination will besent to all the vehicles.

Vehicle remote openingYou can use the vehicle remote opening if youhave unintentionally locked your vehicle and areplacement SmartKey is not available.The vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.The vehicle can be immediately openedremotely within four days of the ignition beingturned off. After this time, the remote unlockingmay be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After30 days, the vehicle can no longer be openedremotely.The vehicle remote unlocking feature is availa-ble if the relevant mobile phone network is avail-able and a data connection is possible.X Contact the following service hotlines:Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centerat 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)or 1-866-990-9007You will be asked for your password.

X Return to your vehicle at the time agreed uponwith the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-tance Center.

Alternatively, the vehicle can be opened via:Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" sec-tionRthe telephone application (e. g. for iPhone®,Android)

To do this, you will need your identification num-ber and password.

Features 219

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Vehicle remote closingThe vehicle remote-closing feature can be usedwhen you have forgotten to lock the vehicle andyou are no longer nearby.The vehicle can then be locked by theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.The vehicle can be immediately remotely lockedwithin four days of the ignition being turned off.After this time, remote closing may be delayedby 15 to 60 minutes. After 30 days the vehiclecan no longer be locked remotely.The vehicle remote closing feature is available ifthe relevant mobile phone network is availableand a data connection is possible.X Contact the following service hotlines:Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centerat 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)or 1-866-990-9007You will be asked for your password.

The next time you are inside the vehicle and youswitch on the ignition, the Doors LockedRemotelymessage appears in themultifunctiondisplay.Alternatively, the vehicle can be locked via:Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" sec-tionRthe telephone application (e. g. for iPhone®,Android)

To do this, you will need your identification num-ber and password.

Stolen vehicle recovery serviceIf your vehicle has been stolen:X Notify the police.The police will issue a numbered incidentreport.

X This number will be forwarded to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centertogether with your PIN.The Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter then tries to locate the system. TheMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centercontacts you and the local law enforcementagency if the vehicle is located.However, only the law enforcement agency isinformed of the location of the vehicle.

If the anti-theft alarm system is activated forlonger than 30 seconds, the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center is automaticallynotified.

Vehicle Health CheckWith the Vehicle Health Check, the CustomerAssistance Center can provide improved sup-port for problems with your vehicle. During anexisting call, vehicle data is transferred to theCustomer Assistance Center.The customer service representative can usethe received data to decide what kind of assis-tance is required. You are then, for example,guided to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or a recovery vehicle is called.If vehicle data needs to be transferred during anMB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call, this isinitiated by the Customer Assistance Center.The Roadside Assistance Connected mes-sage appears in the display. If the Vehicle HealthCheck can be started, the Request for Vehi‐cle Diagnostics Received Start vehi‐cle diagnostics? message appears in thedisplay.X Press the Yes button to confirm themessage.X When the Vehicle Diagnostics PleaseStart Ignition message appears: turn theSmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock(Y page 103).

X If the Please follow the instructionsreceived by phone and move your vehi‐cle to a safe position. messageappears: please follow the instructionsreceived by phone and move your vehicle to asafe position.The message in the display disappears.The vehicle operating state check begins.During this procedure, you will see the Vehi‐cle Diagnostics Active message.If you select Cancel, the Vehicle HealthCheck is canceled completely.

When the check is complete, the Sendingvehicle diagnostics data. (Voice con‐nection may be interrupted duringdata transfer)message appears. The vehicledata can now be sent.X Press the OK button to confirm the message.The voice connection with the CustomerAssistance Center is terminated.The Vehicle Diagnostics: Transfer‐ring Data... message appears.The vehicle data is sent to the CustomerAssistance Center.

Depending on what the customer service rep-resentative agreed with you, the voice connec-

220 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

tion is re-established after the transfer is com-plete. If necessary, you will be contacted at alater time by another means, e.g. by e-mail orphone.Another function of the Vehicle Health Check isthe transfer of service data to the CustomerAssistanceCenter. If a service is due, the displayshows a message to this effect together withinformation about any special offers at yourworkshop.This information can also be called up under"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.Information on the data stored in the vehicle(Y page 26).Information on Roadside Assistance(Y page 23).

Downloading routesDownloading routes allows you to transfer andsave predefined routes in the navigation sys-tem.A route can be prepared and sent by either acustomer service representative or under "Own-ers Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.Each route can include up to four way points.Once a route has been received by the naviga-tion system, you will see the External desti‐nation ICON_POI_Category Name_1 hasbeen saved to "Previous destina‐tions". Would you like to start navi‐gation? message on the multimedia systemdisplay.The route is saved.X To start route guidance: select Yes.An overview of the route is shown in the dis-play.If you select No, the saved route can be calledup later in the navigation menu.

X Select Start.Starting route guidance.

Downloaded and saved routes can be called upagain.You can find further information in the separatemultimedia system operating instructions.

Speed alertYou can define the upper speed limit, whichmust not be exceeded by the vehicle.If this selected speed is exceeded by the vehicle,a message will be sent to the Customer Assis-

tance Center. The Customer Assistance Centerthen forwards this information to you.You can select the way in which you receive thisinformation beforehand. Possible optionsinclude text message, e-mail or an automatedcall.The data you receive contains the followinginformation:Rthe location where the speed limit was excee-dedRthe time at which the speed limit was excee-dedRthe selected speed limit which was exceeded

Geo fencingGeo fencing allows you to select areaswhich thevehicle should not enter or leave. You will beinformed if the vehicle crosses the boundariesof the selected areas. You can select the way inwhich you receive this information beforehand.Possible options include text message, e-mail oran automated call.The area can be determined as either a circle ora polygon with a maximum of ten corners. Youcan specify up to ten areas simultaneously. Dif-ferent settings are possible for each area.These settings can be called up under "OwnersOnline" at http://www.mbusa.com.Alternatively, you can trigger anMB Info call andinform the customer service representative thatyou wish to activate geo fencing.Currently inactive areas can be activated by textmessage.

Triggering the vehicle alarmWith this function, you can trigger the vehicle'spanic alarm via text message. An alarm soundsand the exterior lighting flashes. Depending onthe setting, the panic alarm lasts five or ten sec-onds. Afterwards, the alarm switches off.

Features 221

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Rear spoiler

Overview

The rear spoiler improves the handling of thevehicle. It adapts the vehicle's aerodynamics tothe operating conditions, dependent on thespeed of the vehicle.Only use button: in the switch strip above theoverhead control unit to extend and retract therear spoiler manually for cleaning. Button: isnot used to operate the rear spoiler.The rear spoiler is extended automatically if youdrive faster than:R75 mph (120 km/h) in drive programs C, Sand S+R44 mph (70 km/h) in drive program RACEButton: flashes until the rear spoiler hasextended and then lights up in red.The rear spoiler is retracted automatically whenyou drive slower than:R50mph (80 km/h) in drive programs C, S andS+R19 mph (30 km/h) in drive program RACEButton: flashes until the rear spoiler hasretracted and then goes out.

Extending and retracting the rearspoiler manually

G WARNINGBody parts could become trapped if you man-ually retract the rear spoiler. There is a risk ofinjury.Make sure that nobody is within the range ofmovement of the rear spoiler. Release theswitch immediately if somebody becomestrapped. The rear spoiler then extends again.

When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

! Do not enter an automatic car wash with therear spoiler extended. Otherwise, the rearspoiler may be damaged.Only extend the rear spoiler in order to cleanit by hand. Retract it again when you have fin-ished cleaning it.

You can extend and retract the rear spoiler man-ually for cleaning.X Close the tailgate.X Select SmartKey position 2 with the Start/Stop button (Y page 103).

X To extend: press button:.The rear spoiler is extended.Button: flashes until the rear spoiler hasextended and then lights up in red.

X To retract: press and hold button: until therear spoiler is completely retracted.Button: flashes until the rear spoiler hasretracted and then goes out.Rear Spoiler Retracts Manuallyappears in the display.

If you release button:while retracting the rearspoiler, it extends again automatically.

222 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Problems with the rear spoiler

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The rear spoiler stopsbefore reaching the endposition when retractingmanually.

You have opened the tailgate while manually retracting the rearspoiler.X Close the tailgate.The rear spoiler extends or, if you press and hold the¬ button,continues retracting.

The rear spoiler stopsbefore reaching the endposition when retract-ing/extending manually.

You have switched off the ignition.X Switch the ignition back on.X Press the¬ button.The rear spoiler extends/retracts.

The rear spoiler cannotbe retracted again aftermanually extending it.

You have opened the tailgate while manually extending the rearspoiler.X Close the tailgate.

The rear spoiler does notextend or retract auto-matically.

The rear spoiler's movement is blocked, e.g. by an object jammedbetween the body and the rear spoiler.X Remove the object.

Garage door opener

General notesThe HomeLink® garage door opener integratedin the rear-view mirror allows you to operate upto three different door and gate systems.Use the integrated garage door opener only ongarage doors that:Rhave safety stop and reverse features andRmeet current U.S. federal safety standardsOnce programed, the integrated garage dooropener in the rear-view mirror will assume thefunction of the garage door system's remotecontrol. Please also read the operating instruc-tions for the garage door system.When programming a garage door opener, parkthe vehicle outside the garage. Do not run theengine while programming.Certain garage door drives are incompatiblewith the integrated garage door opener. If youhave difficulty programing the integrated garagedoor opener, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Alternatively, you can call the following tele-phone assistance services:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-FOR-MERCedesRCanada: Customer Service at1-800-387-0100RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515 (free ofcharge)

More information on HomeLink® and/or com-patible products is also available online athttp://www.homelink.com.Notes on the declaration of conformity(Y page 24).USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen you operate or program the garage doorwith the integrated garage door opener, per-sons in the range of movement of the garagedoor can become trapped or struck by thegarage door. There is a risk of injury.When using the integrated garage dooropener, always make sure that nobody is

Features 223

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

within the range of movement of the garagedoor.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.

Programming

Programming buttonsPay attention to the "Important safety notes"(Y page 223).

Garage door remote controlA is not includedwith the integrated garage door opener.X Select SmartKey position 2 with the Start/Stop button (Y page 103).

X Select one of buttons; to? to use to con-trol the garage door drive.

X To start programming mode: press andhold one of buttons; to? on the integratedgarage door opener.The garage door opener is now in program-ming mode. After a short time, indicatorlamp: lights up yellow.Indicator lamp: lights up yellow as soon asbutton;,= or? is stored for the first time.If the selected button has already been pro-grammed, indicator lamp: will only light upyellow after ten seconds have elapsed.

X Release button;,= or?. Indicatorlamp: flashes yellow.

X To program the remote control: pointgarage door remote controlA towards but-

tons; to? on the rear-view mirror at a dis-tance of 2 to 8 in (5 to 20 cm).

X Press and hold buttonB on remote controlA until indicator lamp: lights up green.When indicator lamp: lights up green: pro-gramming is finished.When indicator lamp: flashes green: pro-gramming was successful. The next step is tosynchronize the rolling code (Y page 224).

X Release buttonB on remote controlA forthe garage door drive system.If indicator lamp: lights up red: repeat theprograming procedure for the correspondingbutton on the rear-view mirror. When doingso, vary the distance between remote controlA and the rear-view mirror.The required distance between remote con-trolA and the integrated garage door openerdepends on the garage door drive system.Several attempts might be necessary. Youshould test every position for at least25 seconds before trying another position.

Synchronizing the rolling codePay attention to the "Important safety notes"(Y page 223).If the garage door system uses a rolling code,you will also have to synchronize the garagedoor system with the integrated garage dooropener in the rear-viewmirror. To do this youwillneed to use the programming button on the doordrive control panel. The programming buttonmay be located in different places depending onthe manufacturer. It is usually located on thedoor drive unit on the garage ceiling.Familiarize yourself with the garage door driveoperating instructions, e.g. under "Program-ming additional remote controls", before carry-ing out the following steps.Your vehicle must be within reach of the garagedoor or gate opener drive. Make sure that nei-ther your vehicle nor any persons/objects arepresent within the sweep of the door or gate.X Select SmartKey position 2 with the Start/Stop button (Y page 103).

X Get out of the vehicle.X Press the programming button on the doordrive unit.Usually, you now have 30 seconds to initiatethe next step.

224 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

X Get into the vehicle.X Press previously programmed button;,=or? on the integrated garage door openerrepeatedly and in quick succession until thedoor closes.The rolling code synchronization is then com-plete.

Notes on programming the remote con-trolCanadian radio frequency laws require a "break"(or interruption) of the transmission signalsafter broadcasting for a few seconds. Therefore,these signals may not last long enough for theintegrated garage door opener. The signal is notrecognized during programming. Comparablewith Canadian law, someU.S. garage door open-ers also feature a "break".Proceed as follows:Rif you live in CanadaRif you have difficulties programming thegarage door opener (regardless of where youlive) when using the programming steps

X Press and hold one of buttons; to? on theintegrated garage door opener.After a short time, indicator lamp: lights upyellow.

X Release the button.Indicator lamp: flashes yellow.

X Press buttonB of garage door remote con-trolA for two seconds, then release it for twoseconds.

X Press buttonB again for two seconds.X Repeat this sequence on buttonB of remotecontrolA until indicator lamp: lights upgreen.When indicator lamp: lights up green: pro-gramming is finished.When indicator lamp: flashes green: pro-gramming was successful. The next step is tosynchronize the rolling code.

X Release buttonB of remote controlA of thegarage door drive.If indicator lamp: lights up red: repeat theprogramming process for the correspondingbutton on the rear-view mirror. When doingso, vary the distance between remote controlA and the rear-view mirror.The required distance between remote con-trolA and the integrated garage door openerdepends on the garage door drive system.Several attempts might be necessary. You

should test every position for at least25 seconds before trying another position.

Problems when programmingIf you are experiencing problems programingthe integrated garage door opener on the rear-view mirror, take note of the following instruc-tions:RCheck the transmitter frequency used bygarage door drive remote controlA andwhether it is supported. The transmitter fre-quency can usually be found on the back ofthe garage door drive remote control.The integrated garage door opener is com-patible with devices that have units whichoperate in the frequency range of 280 to433 MHz.RReplace the batteries in garage door remotecontrolA. This increases the likelihood thatgarage door remote controlA will transmit astrong and precise signal to the integratedgarage door opener.RWhen programming, hold remote controlAat varying distances and angles from the but-ton which you are programming. Try variousangles at a distance between 2and 12 inches(5to 30 cm) or at the sameangle but at varyingdistances.RIf another remote control is available for thesame garage door drive, repeat the same pro-gramming steps with this remote control.Before performing these steps, make surethat new batteries have been installed ingarage door drive remote controlA.RNote that some remote controls only transmitfor a limited amount of time (the indicatorlamp on the remote control goes out). PressbuttonB on remote controlA again beforetransmission ends.RAlign the antenna cable of the garage dooropener unit. This can improve signal recep-tion/transmission.

Opening/closing the garage doorAfter it has been programmed, the integratedgarage door opener performs the function of thegarage door system remote control. Please alsoread the operating instructions for the garagedoor system.

Features 225

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

X Select SmartKey position 2 with the Start/Stop button (Y page 103).

X Press button;,= or? which you haveprogrammed to operate the garage door.Garage door system with a fixed code: indi-cator lamp: lights up green.Garage door system with a rolling code: indi-cator lamp: flashes green.The transmitter will transmit a signal as longas the button is pressed. The transmission ishalted after a maximum of ten seconds andindicator lamp: lights up yellow.

X Press button;,= or? again if necessary.

Clearing the memoryMake sure that you clear the memory of theintegrated garage door opener before selling thevehicle.X Select SmartKey position 2 with the Start/Stop button (Y page 103).

X Press and hold buttons; and?.The indicator lamp initially lights up yellowand then green.

X Release buttons; and?.The memory of the integrated garage dooropener in the rear-view mirror is cleared.

Floormats

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicle isjeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

X Slide the driver's seat backwards.X To install: place the floormat in position.X Press studs: onto retainers;.X To remove: pull the floormat off retainers;.X Remove the floormat.

226 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Engine compartment

Hood

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the hood is unlatched, it may open up whenthe vehicle is in motion and block your view.There is a risk of an accident.Never unlatch the hood while driving. Beforeevery trip, ensure that the hood is locked.

G WARNINGWhen opening and closing the hood, it maysuddenly fall into the closed position. There isa risk of injury to persons within range ofmovement of the hood.Open and close the hood only when no one iswithin its range of movement.

G WARNINGOpening the hood when the engine is over-heated or when there is a fire in the enginecompartment could expose you to hot gasesor other service products. There is a risk ofinjury.Let an overheated engine cool down beforeopening the hood. If there is a fire in theengine compartment, keep the hood closedand contact the fire department.

G WARNINGThe engine compartment contains movingcomponents. Certain components, such asthe radiator fan, may continue to run or startagain suddenly when the ignition is off. Thereis a risk of injury.If you need to do any work inside the enginecompartment:Rswitch off the ignitionRnever reach into the area where there is arisk of danger from moving components,such as the fan rotation area

Rremove jewelry and watchesRkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam-ple, away from moving parts

G WARNINGThe ignition system and the fuel injection sys-tem work under high voltage. If you touchcomponents which are under voltage, youcould get an electric shock. There is a risk ofinjury.Never touch components of the ignition sys-tem or fuel injection system when the ignitionis switched on.

Opening the hood

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGWhen the hood is open and the windshieldwipers are set inmotion, you can be injured bythe wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before opening the hood.

! Make sure that the windshield wipers arenot folded away from the windshield. Youcould otherwise damage the windshield wip-ers or the hood.

Engine compartment 227

Maintenance

andcare

Z

X Make sure that the windshield wipers areturned off.

X Pull release lever: on the hood.The hood is released.

X Reach into the gap, pull hood catch handle;up and lift the hood.If you lift the hood by approximately 15 in(40 cm), the hood is opened and held openautomatically by the gas-filled strut.

Closing the hoodX Lower the hood and let it fall from a height ofapproximately 8 in (20 cm).

X Check that the hood has engaged properly.If the hood can be raised slightly, it is notproperly engaged. Open it again and close itwith a little more force.

Engine oil

Notes on the oil levelDepending on your driving style, the vehicleconsumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil per600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumption may

be higher than this when the vehicle is new or ifyou frequently drive at high engine speeds.Depending on the engine, the oil dipstickmay bein a different location.It is only possible to correctly measure the oillevel when:Rthe engine is at normal operating temperatureRthe vehicle is parked on a level surfaceRthe engine is left running in neutral for at least30 seconds before switching offThis applies when checking the oil level usingthe oil dipstick or on-board computer.

Checking the oil level using the oil dip-stick

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

It is only possible to correctly measure the oillevel with the oil dipstick when the engine is atnormal operating temperature and in a period of2 to minutes after the engine has been switchedoff.

X Pull oil dipstick: out of the dipstick guidetube.

X Wipe off oil dipstick:.

228 Engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare

X Slowly slide oil dipstick: into the guide tubeto the stop, and take it out again.If the level is between MIN mark= and MAXmark;, the oil level is correct.

X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark= orbelow, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) engine oil.

Engine compartment 229

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Checking the oil level using the on-board computerX Select key position 2 with the Start/Stop button.X Useò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus.X Press the: or9 button on the steering wheel to select the Service menu.X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.X Use: or9 to select the Engine Oil Level submenu.X Pressa to confirm the selection.The Measuring Engine Oil Level Accurate Only When Vehicle Is Level messageappears in the multifunction display.

The measurement takes a few seconds. You will see one of the following messages in the multi-function display:

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Engine Oil Level OK The oil level is correct.

Check Engine OilLevel (Add 1 Liter)The oil level is too low.X Add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engine oil.

Reduce Engine OilLevelThe engine oil level is too high.X Have excess engine oil siphoned off.

For Engine OilLevel Ignition MustBe OnThe ignition is switched off.X Select key position 2 with the Start/Stop button.

Need More Time toCheck Engine OilLevelThe required waiting period was not observed.X The engine must be at regular operating temperature.It is only possible to make a correct measurement within the first 4minutes after the engine has been switched off.

Engine Oil LevelNot Measurable withEngine RunningThe engine is running; oil level measurement is not possible.X Switch off the engine.X Repeat the measurement. Observe the required waiting period.

Engine Oil LevelCorrect MeasurementOnly if Vehicle Ison Level Ground

The vehicle is not parked on a level surface.X Park the vehicle on a level surface.

Engine oil levelcannot be measured.The oil level measurement with the oil dipstick is possible. The meas-uring system is malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Adding engine oil

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.

Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

230 Engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare

G WARNINGIf engine oil comes into contact with hot com-ponents in the engine compartment, it mayignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next tothe filler neck. Let the engine cool down andthoroughly clean the engine oil off the com-ponents before starting the engine.

H Environmental noteWhen adding oil, take care not to spill any. Ifoil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful tothe environment.

! Only use engine oils and oil filters that havebeen approved for vehicles with a service sys-tem. You can obtain a list of the engine oilsand oil filters tested and approved in accord-ance with the Mercedes-Benz Specificationsfor Service Products at any Mercedes-BenzService center.Damage to the engine or exhaust system iscaused by the following:Rusing engine oils and oil filters that have notbeen specifically approved for the servicesystemRreplacing engine oil and oil filters after theinterval for replacement specified by theservice system has been exceededRusing engine oil additives.

! Do not add too much oil. If the oil level isabove the "max" mark on the dipstick, toomuch oil has been added. This can lead todamage to the engine or the catalytic con-verter. Have excess oil siphoned off.

Example: engine oil cap

X Turn cap: counter-clockwise and remove it.X Add engine oil.If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark onthe oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) of engineoil.

X Replace cap: on the filler neck and turnclockwise.Ensure that the cap locks into place securely.

X Check the oil level again with the oil dipstick(Y page 228).

Further information on engine oil (Y page 283).

Additional service products

Checking coolant level

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGThe cooling system is pressurized, particularlywhen the motor is warm. If you open the cap,you could be scalded if hot coolant sprays out.There is a risk of injury.Let the engine cool down before you open thecap. Wear gloves and eye protection. Slowlyopen the cap to relieve pressure.

! Before starting your journey, make sure thatall engine covers are installed. Otherwise, theengine can be damaged, e.g. through over-heating.

Engine compartment 231

Maintenance

andcare

Z

ExampleX Park the vehicle on a level surface.Only check the coolant level when the vehicleis on a level surface and the engine has cooleddown.

X Set the Start/Stop button to key position 2.X Check the coolant temperature display in theinstrument cluster.The coolant temperature must be below158 ‡ (70 †).

X Select key position 0with the Start/Stop but-ton.

X Remove the engine cover.X Slowly turn cap: half a turn counter-clock-wise to allow excess pressure to escape.

X Turn cap: further counter-clockwise andremove it.If the coolant is at the level of the marker barin the filler neck when cold, there is enoughcoolant in coolant expansion tank;.If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in(1.5 cm) above the marker bar in the fillerneck when warm, there is enough coolant inexpansion tank;.

X If necessary, add coolant that has been testedand approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Replace cap: and turn it clockwise as far asit will go.

X Replace the engine coverFor further information on coolant, see(Y page 284).

Windshield washer system

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.

Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate could ignite ifit comes into contact with hot engine compo-nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk offire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washer con-centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

ExampleX To open: pull cap: upwards by the tab.X Add the premixed washer fluid.X To close: press cap: onto the filler neckuntil it engages.

If the washer fluid level drops below the recom-mended minimum of 1 liter, a message appearsin the multifunction display prompting you toadd washer fluid (Y page 188).Further information on windshield washer fluid/antifreeze (Y page 285).

ASSYST PLUS

Service messageThe ASSYST PLUS service interval displayinforms you of the next service due date.Information on the type of service and serviceintervals (see the separate Maintenance Book-let).

232 ASSYST PLUSMaintenance

andcare

You can obtain further information from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or athttp://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

i The ASSYST PLUS service interval displaydoes not show any information on the engineoil level. Observe the notes on the engine oillevel (Y page 228).

The multifunction display shows a service mes-sage for several seconds, e.g.:RService A in XX DaysRService A DueRService A Overdue by XX DaysDepending on the operating conditions of thevehicle, the remaining time or distance until thenext service due date is displayed.The letter A or B, possibly in connection with anumber or another letter, indicates the type ofservice. A stands for a minor service and B for amajor service.You can obtain further information from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.The ASSYST PLUS service interval display doesnot take into account any periods of time duringwhich the battery is disconnected.Maintaining the time-dependent service sched-ule:X Note down the service due date displayed inthe multifunction display before disconnect-ing the battery.

orX After reconnecting the battery, subtract thebattery disconnection periods from the ser-vice date shown on the display.

Hiding a service messageX Press thea or% button on the steeringwheel.

Displaying service messagesX Switch on the ignition.X Useò on the steering wheel to call up thelist of menus.

X Press9 or: on the steering wheel toselect the Service menu and confirm witha.

X Press9 or: on the steering wheel toselect the ASSYST PLUS submenu and con-firm witha.The service due date appears in the multi-function display.

Information about Service

Resetting the ASSYST PLUS serviceinterval display! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval displayhas been inadvertently reset, this setting canbe corrected at a qualified specialist work-shop.Have service work carried out as described intheMaintenance Booklet. This may otherwiselead to increased wear and damage to themajor assemblies or the vehicle.

A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset theASSYST PLUS service interval display after theservice work has been carried out. You can alsoobtain further information on maintenancework, for example.

Special service requirementsThe specified maintenance interval takes onlythe normal operation of the vehicle intoaccount. Under arduous operating conditions orincreased load on the vehicle, maintenancework must be carried out more frequently, forexample:Rregular city drivingwith frequent intermediatestopsRif the vehicle is primarily used to travel shortdistancesRuse in mountainous terrain or on poor roadsurfacesRif the engine is often left idling for long periodsUnder these or similar conditions, have, forexample, the air filter, engine oil and oil filterreplaced or changed more frequently. Underarduous operating conditions, the tires must becheckedmore often. Further information can beobtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g.an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

ASSYST PLUS 233

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Driving abroadAn extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network isalso available in other countries. You can obtainfurther information from any authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Care

General notes

H Environmental noteDispose of empty packaging and cleaningcloths in an environmentally responsibleman-ner.

! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any ofthe following:Rdry, rough or hard clothsRabrasive cleaning agentsRsolventsRcleaning agents containing solventsDo not scrub.Do not touch the surfaces or protective filmswith hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper.You could otherwise scratch or damage thesurfaces and protective film.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, youshould drive for a few minutes after cleaning.Braking heats the brake discs and the brakepads/linings, thus drying them. The vehiclecan then be parked.

Regular care of your vehicle is a condition forretaining the quality in the long term.Use care products and cleaning agents recom-mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Washing the vehicle and cleaning thepaintwork

Automatic car wash

G WARNINGBraking efficiency is reduced after washingthe vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.After the vehicle has been washed, brakecarefully while paying attention to the trafficconditions until full braking power is restored.

! Never clean your vehicle in a TouchlessAutomatic Car Wash as these use specialcleaning agents. These cleaning agents candamage the paintwork or plastic parts.If you have your vehicle cleaned in a high-pressure automatic car wash, small amountsof water may enter the vehicle.

! If the SmartKey is within the rear detectionrange of KEYLESS-GO, the following situa-tions, for example, could lead to the uninten-tional opening of the tailgate:Rusing a car washRusing a power washerMake sure that the SmartKey is at least 10 ft(3 m) away from the vehicle.

! Make sure that:Rthe side windows are fully closed.Rthe blower for the ventilation/heating isswitched off.Rthewindshield wiper switch is at position0.Rthe rear view camera is switched off.The vehicle may otherwise be damaged.

! When washing your vehicle in a tow-throughcar wash, use the SmartKey instead of theStart/Stop button.Start the engine using the SmartKey.. Movethe transmission to N with the E-SELECTlever. Use the SmartKey to switch the engineoff again and then turn the SmartKey to posi-tion 2. Make sure that you then leave theSmartKey in position 2. You may otherwisedamage the vehicle, the transmission or thecar wash.Check the transmission position in the instru-ment cluster.

234 CareMaintenance

andcare

! Use the E‑SELECT lever to shift the trans-mission to N before switching the engine off.If you open the driver's or front-passengerdoor, the transmission remains in this posi-tion for up to 30 minutes if the SmartKey is inthe ignition, even if the engine is switched off.If you do not shift the transmission toN usingthe E‑SELECT lever beforehand, it shifts auto-matically to parking position P and locks thewheels if the driver's or front-passenger dooris opened and the engine is switched off. Thismay damage the vehicle, the transmission orthe car wash.

You can wash the vehicle in an automatic carwash from the very start.If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it beforecleaning it in an automatic car wash.After using an automatic car wash, wipe off waxfrom the windshield and the wiper blades. Thiswill prevent smears and reduce wiping noisescaused by residue on the windshield.

Washing by handIn some countries, washing by hand is onlyallowed at specially equipped washing bays.Observe the legal requirements in each country.X Do not use hot water and do not wash thevehicle in direct sunlight.

X Use a soft sponge to clean.X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a carshampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gen-tle jet of water.

X Do not point thewater jet directly towards theair inlet.

X Use plenty of water and rinse out the spongefrequently.

X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and drythoroughly with a chamois.

X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paint-work.

Carefully remove all deposits of road salt assoon as possible when driving in winter.

Power washers

G WARNINGThe water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirtblasters) can cause invisible exterior damageto the tires or chassis components. Compo-

nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-edly. There is a risk of an accident.Do not use power washers with circular jetnozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damagedtires or chassis components replaced imme-diately.

! Always maintain a distance of at least11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and thepower washer nozzle. Information about thecorrect distance is available from the equip-ment manufacturer.Move the power washer nozzle around whencleaning your vehicle.Do not aim directly at any of the following:RtiresRdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.Relectrical componentsRbatteryRconnectorsRlightsRsealsRtrimRventilation slotsDamaged seals or electrical components canlead to leaks or failures.

! If the SmartKey is within the rear detectionrange of KEYLESS-GO, the following situa-tions, for example, could lead to the uninten-tional opening of the tailgate:Rusing a car washRusing a power washerMake sure that the SmartKey is at least 10 ft(3 m) away from the vehicle.

Cleaning the paintwork! Do not affix:RstickersRfilmsRmagnetic plates or similar itemsto painted surfaces. You could otherwisedamage the paintwork.

Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected bycorrosion and damage caused by inadequatecare cannot always be completely repaired. Insuch cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Care 235

Maintenance

andcare

Z

X Remove dirt immediately, where possible,while avoiding rubbing too hard.

X Soak insect remains with insect remover andrinse off the treated areas afterwards.

X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse offthe treated areas afterwards.

X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils,fuels and greases by rubbing gently with acloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighterfluid.

X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.X Use silicone remover to remove wax.If water no longer forms "beads" on the paintsurface, use the paint care products recommen-ded and approved byMercedes-Benz. This is thecase approximately every three to five months,depending on the climate conditions and thecare product used.If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or if thepaint has become dull, the paint cleaner recom-mended and approved by Mercedes-Benzshould be used.Do not use these care products in the sun or onthe hood while the hood is hot.X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB Touch-Up Stick, to repair slight damage to the paint-work quickly and provisionally.

Matte finish care! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloywheels. Polishing causes the finish to shine.

! The following may cause the paint tobecome shiny and thus reduce the matteeffect:Rstrong rubbing of the paintwork withunsuitable materialsRfrequent use of automatic car washesRwashing the vehicle in direct sunlight

! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or polishingproducts, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax. Theseproducts are only suitable for high-gloss sur-faces. Their use on vehicles with matte finishleads to considerable surface damage (shiny,mottled areas).Always have paintwork repairs carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

! Do not use wash programs with a hot waxtreatment under any circumstances.

Observe these notes if your vehicle has a clearmatte finish. This will help you to avoid damageto the paintwork due to incorrect treatment.These notes also apply to light alloy wheels witha clear matte finish.

i The vehicle should preferably be washed byhand using a soft sponge, car shampoo andplenty of water.

i Use only insect remover and car shampoofrom the range of recommended andapproved Mercedes-Benz care products.

Cleaning the vehicle parts

Cleaning the wheels

G WARNINGThe water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirtblasters) can cause invisible exterior damageto the tires or chassis components. Compo-nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-edly. There is a risk of an accident.Do not use power washers with circular jetnozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damagedtires or chassis components replaced imme-diately.

! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning productsto remove brake dust. This could damagewheel bolts and brake components.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, youshould drive for a few minutes after cleaning.Braking heats the brake discs and the brakepads/linings, thus drying them. The vehiclecan then be parked.

Cleaning the windows

G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning thewindshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.

236 CareMaintenance

andcare

Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.

! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,solvents or cleaning agents containing sol-vents to clean the inside of the windows. Donot touch the insides of the windows withhard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. Thereis otherwise a risk of damaging the windows.

! Clean the water drainage channels of thewindshield and the rear window at regularintervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals andpollen may under certain circumstances pre-vent water from draining away. This can leadto corrosion damage and damage to elec-tronic components.

X Clean the inside and outside of the windowswith a damp cloth and a cleaning product thatis recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning wiper blades

G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning thewindshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.

! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, thewiper blade could be damaged.

! Do not clean wiper blades too often and donot rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graph-ite coating could be damaged. This couldcause wiper noise.

! Hold the wiper arm securely when foldingback. The windshield could be damaged if thewiper arm smacks against it suddenly.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from thewindshield.

X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a dampcloth.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms back againbefore switching on the ignition.

Cleaning the exterior lighting! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning clothswhich are suitable for plastic light lenses.Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning clothscould scratch or damage the plastic light len-ses.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior light-ing using a wet sponge and a mild cleaningagent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo orcleaning cloths.

Cleaning the mirror turn signals! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning clothsthat are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitablecleaning agents or cleaning cloths couldscratch or damage the plastic lenses of themirror turn signals.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn sig-nals in the exterior mirror housing using a wetsponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g.Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaningcloths.

Cleaning the sensors! If you clean the sensors with a powerwasher, make sure that you keep a distanceof at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicleand the power washer nozzle. Informationabout the correct distance is available fromthe equipment manufacturer.

X Clean sensors: of the driving systems withwater, car shampoo and a soft cloth.

Care 237

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Cleaning the rear view camera! Do not clean the camera lens and the areaaround the rear view camera with a powerwasher.

X Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean cam-era lens:.

Cleaning the exhaust pipe

G WARNINGThe exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim canbecome very hot. If you come into contactwith these parts of the vehicle, you could burnyourself. There is a risk of injury.Always be particularly careful around theexhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allowthese components to cool down before touch-ing them.

! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-based cleaning agents, such as bathroomcleaner or wheel cleaner.

! Vehicles with black exhaust pipes: blackchromed screens should not be polished witha chrome polish. Theywill otherwise lose theirblack shine. For optimal care, the screensshould be rubbed with a lightly oiled clothafter every car wash. Commercially availableengine and care oils are suitable for this.For heavier soiling, you can apply a fine paint-work polish with a microfiber cloth. Removethe excess polish residue after polishing.

X Clean the exhaust pipe with a chrome careproduct tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Impurities combined with the effects of road gritand corrosive environmental factors may cause

flash rust to form on the surface. You canrestore the original shine of the exhaust pipe bycleaning it regularly, especially in winter andafter washing.

Interior care

Cleaning the display! For cleaning, do not use any of the following:Ralcohol-based thinner or gasolineRabrasive cleaning agentsRcommercially-available household cleaningagents

These may damage the display surface. Donot put pressure on the display surface whencleaning. This could lead to irreparable dam-age to the display.

X Before cleaning the display, make sure that itis switched off and has cooled down.

X Clean the display surface using a commer-cially available microfiber cloth and TFT/LCDdisplay cleaner.

X Dry the display surface using a dry microfibercloth.

Cleaning the plastic trim

G WARNINGCare products and cleaning agents containingsolvents cause surfaces in the cockpit tobecome porous. As a result, plastic parts maycome loose in the event of air bag deploy-ment. There is a risk of injury.Do not use any care products and cleaningagents to clean the cockpit.

! Do not affix the following to plastic surfaces:RstickersRfilmsRscented oil bottles or similar itemsYou can otherwise damage the plastic.

! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent orsunscreen to come into contact with the plas-tic trim. Thismaintains the high-quality look ofthe surfaces.

238 CareMaintenance

andcare

X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-freecloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod-ucts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.The surface may change color temporarily.Wait until the surface is dry again.

Cleaning the steering wheel and gear orselector leverX Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or useleather care agents that have been recom-mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning genuine wood and trim ele-ments! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agentssuch as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishesor waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damag-ing the surface.

! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces.The trim pieces have a chrome look but aremostly made of anodized aluminum and canlose their shine if chrome polish is used. Usea damp, lint-free cloth instead when cleaningthe trim pieces.If the chrome-plated trim pieces are verydirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you areunsure as to whether the trim pieces arechrome-plated or not, consult an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with adamp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod-ucts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the seat covers

General notes! Donot use amicrofiber cloth to clean coversmade out of real leather, artificial leather orDINAMICA. If used often, these can damagethe cover.

i Note that regular care is essential to ensurethat the appearance and comfort of the cov-ers is retained over time.

Genuine leather seat covers! To retain the natural appearance of theleather, observe the following cleaninginstructions:RClean genuine leather covers carefully witha damp cloth and then wipe the coversdown with a dry cloth.RMake sure that the leather does notbecome soaked. It may otherwise becomerough and cracked.ROnly use leather care agents that havebeen tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain these from a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Leather is a natural product.It exhibits natural surface characteristics, forexample:Rdifferences in the textureRmarks caused by growth and injuryRslight nuances of colorThese are characteristics of leather and notmaterial defects.

Seat covers of other materials! Observe the following when cleaning:Rclean artificial leather covers with a clothmoistened with a solution containing 1%detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).Rclean cloth covers with a microfiber clothmoistened with a solution containing 1%detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rubcarefully and always wipe entire seat sec-tions to avoid leaving visible lines. Leavethe seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning resultsdepend on the type of dirt and how long ithas been there.Rclean DINAMICA covers with a damp cloth.Make sure that you wipe entire seat sec-tions to avoid leaving visible lines.

Cleaning the seat belts

G WARNINGSeat belts can become severely weakened ifbleached or dyed. This could cause the seatbelts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event ofan accident. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or fatal injury.Never bleach or dye the seat belts.

Care 239

Maintenance

andcare

Z

! Do not clean the seat belts using chemicalcleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts byheating at temperatures above 176 ‡ (80†)or in direct sunlight.

X Use clean, lukewarmwater and soap solution.

Cleaning the headliner and carpetsX Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush ordry shampoo.

X Carpets: use the carpet and textile cleaningagents recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.

240 CareMaintenance

andcare

Where will I find...?

Vehicle tool kit

General notesApart from certain country-specific variations,the vehicles are not equipped with a tire-changetool kit. If the vehicle is equipped with tire-changing tools, these are located in the left-hand stowage compartment behind the serviceflap in the cargo compartment. Some tools forchanging a wheel are specific to the vehicle. Formore information on which tire changing toolsare required and approved to perform a wheelchange on your vehicle, consult a qualified spe-cialist workshop.Tools required for changing a wheel mayinclude, for example:RJackRWheel chockRLug wrenchRRatchet wrenchRAlignment bolt

The vehicle tool kit is located in the left-handstowage compartment behind service flap: inthe cargo compartment.X Open the tailgate.X Turn fastener; on the service flap to the left.X Open service flap:.

Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit

: Towing eye; Tire inflation compressor= Alignment bolt? Tire sealant filler bottleX Use the TIREFIT kit (Y page 242).

Vehicles with a tire-change tool kit

: Lug wrench; Towing eye= Tire inflation compressor? Alignment boltA Folding wheel chockB Tire sealant filler bottleC JackX Use the TIREFIT kit (Y page 242).

i Example: equipment and country-specificvariations possible.

Where will I find...? 241

Breakdow

nassistance

Flat tire

Preparing the vehicleYour vehicle may be equipped with:Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 241)Information on changing and mounting wheels(Y page 272).X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery andlevel ground, as far away as possible fromtraffic.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 119).

X If possible, bring the front wheels into thestraight-ahead position.

X Switch off the engine.X With KEYLESS-GO start function or vehi-cles with KEYLESS-GO: open the driver'sdoor.The on-board electronics now have status 0.This is the same as the SmartKey having beenremoved.

orX Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.X Make sure that the passengers are not endan-gered as they do so. Make sure that no one isnear the danger area while a wheel is beingchanged. Anyone who is not directly assistingin the wheel change should, for example,stand behind the barrier.

X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to trafficconditions when doing so.

X Close the driver's door.

TIREFIT kit

Important safety notesTIREFIT is a tire sealant.You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tiretread. You can use TIREFIT at outside tempera-tures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †).

G WARNINGIn the following situations, the tire sealant isunable to provide sufficient breakdown assis-tance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly:Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire largerthan those mentioned above.Rthe wheel rim is damaged.Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures oron a flat tire.

There is a risk of an accident.Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

G WARNINGThe tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita-tion. It must not come into contact with yourskin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do notinhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant awayfrom children. There is a risk of injury.If you come into contact with the tire sealant,observe the following:RRinse off the tire sealant from your skinimmediately with water.RIf the tire sealant comes into contact withyour eyes, immediately rinse them thor-oughly with clean water.RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediatelyrinse your mouth out thoroughly and drinkplenty of water. Do not induce vomiting,and seek medical attention immediately.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with tire sealant.RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medicalattention immediately.

! Do not operate the tire inflation compressorfor longer than ten minutes at a time withouta break. It may otherwise overheat.The tire inflation compressor can be operatedagain once it has cooled down.

Comply with the manufacturer's safety instruc-tions on the tire inflation compressor label andon the tire sealant bottle.

242 Flat tireBreakdow

nassistance

Using the TIREFIT kit

X Donot remove any foreign objectswhich havepenetrated the tire, e.g. screws or nails.

X Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accompa-nying TIREFIT sticker and the tire inflationcompressor from the stowage compartmentin the cargo compartment (Y page 241).

X Affix part: of the TIREFIT sticker to theinstrument cluster within the driver's field ofvision.

X Affix part; of the TIREFIT sticker near thevalve on the wheel with the defective tire.

Youwill also find operating instructions= in thelid of the TIREFIT kit.X Remove filler hoseE and plug? from thebottom section of the tire inflation compres-sor housing.

X Unscrew flanged capA.X Unscrew the cap from tire sealant bottle:.Make sure that the aluminum film is not dam-aged when doing so.

X Screw tire sealant bottle: firmly onto theseal of flangeF.This pierces the aluminum film.

X Make sure that pressure release screwC isclosed.

X Remove the dust protection cap from fillerhoseE.

X Remove the cap from valveG on the faultytire.

X Screw filler hoseE onto valveG.

Flat tire 243

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

X Make sure that on and off switch; on thetire inflation compressor is set to 0.

X Insert connector? into the 12 V socket(Y page 214).

X Select key position 2with the Start/Stop but-ton (Y page 103).

X Press on and off switch; on the tire inflationcompressor to I.The tire inflation compressor is switched on.The tire is inflated.First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire. Thepressure can briefly rise to approximately500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).Do not switch off the tire inflation com-pressor during this phase.

X Let the tire inflation compressor run for amaximumof tenminutes. The tire should thenhave attained a pressure of at least 180 kPa(1.8 bar/26 psi).

X In order to read the correct value from pres-sure gaugeB, switch the tire inflation com-pressor off briefly.

If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) hasbeen attained after five minutes, see "Tire pres-sure reached" (Y page 244).If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) hasnot been attained after five minutes, see "Tirepressure not reached" (Y page 244).If tire sealant has escaped, clean it off affectedareas as quickly as possible. Use plain water ifpossible.If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant, havethem cleaned with perchloroethylene at a drycleaner as soon as possible.

Tire pressure not reachedIf a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has notbeen attained after five minutes:X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of thefaulty tire.Note that tire sealant may escape when youunscrew the filler hose.

X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approx-imately 30 ft (10 m).

X Leave tire sealant bottle: attached to theflange.

X Pump up the tire again.After a maximum of five minutes the tire pres-sure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi).

G WARNINGIf the required tire pressure is not reachedafter the specified time, the tire is too badlydamaged. The tire sealant cannot repair thetire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tirepressure that is too low can significantlyimpair the vehicle's braking and driving char-acteristics. There is a risk of accident.Do not continue driving. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Tire pressure reached

G WARNINGA tire temporarily sealed with tire sealantimpairs the driving characteristics and is notsuitable for higher speeds. There is a risk ofaccident.You should therefore adapt your driving styleaccordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceedthe specified maximum speed with a tire thathas been repaired using tire sealant.

The maximum permissible speed for a tiresealed with tire sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h).The upper part of the TIREFIT sticker must beaffixed to the instrument cluster in the driver'sfield of vision.

! Residue from the tire sealant may come outof the filler hose after use. This could causestains.

244 Flat tireBreakdow

nassistance

Therefore, place the filler hose in the plasticbag which contained the TIREFIT kit.

H Environmental noteHave the used tire sealant bottle disposed ofprofessionally, e.g. at a qualified specialistworkshop.

If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) hasbeen attained after five minutes:X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of thefaulty tire.Leave the tire sealant bottle attached to theflange.

X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire infla-tion compressor.

X Pull away immediately.X Stop after driving for approximately tenminutes and check the tire pressure with thetire inflation compressor.The tire pressure must now be at least130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).

G WARNINGIf the required tire pressure is not reachedafter driving for a short period, the tire is toobadly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repairthe tire in this instance. Damaged tires and atire pressure that is too low can significantlyimpair the vehicle's braking and driving char-acteristics. There is a risk of accident.Do not continue driving. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

i In cases such as the one mentioned above,contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-ter. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in theUSA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

X Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire andLoading Information placard on the driver'sside B-pillar or the tire pressure table in thefuel filler flap for values.

X To increase the tire pressure: switch on thetire inflation compressor.

X To reduce the tire pressure: open releasescrewC.

X When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew thefiller hose from the valve of the sealed tire.

X Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve of thesealed tire.

X Unscrew the tire sealant bottle from the tireinflation compressor.

X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist work-shop and have the tire changed there.

X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced as soonas possible at a qualified specialist workshop.

X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced everyfour years at a qualified specialist workshop.

Battery (vehicle)

Important safety notesSpecial tools and expert knowledge are requiredwhen working on the battery, e.g. removal andinstallation. You should therefore have all workinvolving the battery carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

G WARNINGWork carried out incorrectly on the batterycan lead, for example, to a short circuit andthus damage the vehicle electronics. This canlead to function restrictions applying tosafety-relevant systems, e.g the lighting sys-tem, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or theESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The oper-ating safety of your vehicle may be restricted.You could lose control of the vehicle, forexample:Rwhen brakingRin the event of abrupt steering maneuversand/or when the vehicle's speed is notadapted to the road conditions

There is a risk of an accident.In the event of a short circuit or a similar inci-dent, contact a qualified specialist workshopimmediately. Do not drive any further. Youshould have all work involving the battery car-ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

For further information about ABS and ESP®,see (Y page 52) and (Y page 55).

Battery (vehicle) 245

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

H Environmental noteBatteries contain dangeroussubstances. It is against thelaw to dispose of them withthe household rubbish. Theymust be collected separatelyand recycled to protect theenvironment.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally friendlymanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualified spe-cialist workshop or a specialcollection point for used bat-teries.

! Have the battery checked regularly at aqualified specialist workshop.Observe the service intervals in the Mainte-nanceBooklet or contact a qualified specialistworkshop for more information.

! Always havework on batteries carried out ata qualified specialist workshop. Should it, inexceptional circumstances, be absolutelynecessary to disconnect the 12-volt batteryyourself, observe the following:Rsecure the vehicle to prevent it from rollingaway.Rswitch off the ignition.Ralways disconnect the negative terminalclamp first, followed by the positive termi-nal clamp.

After the battery has been disconnected, thetransmission is locked in position P.After the work has been done, install the bat-tery and replace the cover of the positive ter-minal clamp firmly.

Comply with safety precautions and take pro-tective measures when handling batteries.

Risk of explosion.

Fire, open flames and smoking areprohibited when handling the bat-tery. Avoid creating sparks.

The electrolyte of the battery is cor-rosive. Avoid contact with skin, eyesor clothing.Wear suitable protective clothing,especially gloves, apron and face-guard.Immediately rinse electrolytesplashes off with clean water. Con-tact a physician if necessary.Wear eye protection.

Keep children away.

Observe this Operator's Manual.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use batteries which havebeen tested and approved for your vehicle byMercedes-Benz. These batteries provideincreased impact protection to prevent vehicleoccupants from suffering acid burns should thebattery be damaged in the event of an accident.In order for the battery to achieve the maximumpossible service life, it must always be suffi-ciently charged.Like other batteries, the vehicle battery maydischarge over time if you do not use the vehicle.In this case, have the battery disconnected at aqualified specialist workshop. You can alsocharge the battery with a special charger rec-ommended by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a quali-fied specialist workshop for further information.Have the battery condition of charge checkedmore frequently if you use the vehicle mainly forshort trips or if you leave it standing idle for alengthy period. Consult a qualified specialistworkshop if you wish to leave your vehicleparked for a long period of time.When you use the SmartKey in the ignition andyou park the car, remove the key if you do notrequire any electrical consumers. The vehiclewill then use very little energy, thus conservingbattery power.

246 Battery (vehicle)Breakdow

nassistance

If the power supply has been interrupted, e.g. ifyou reconnect the battery, you will have to:Rreset the function for automatically foldingthe exterior mirrors in/out by folding the mir-rors out once (Y page 82)Rreset the side windows, see (Y page 73)

Charging the battery! Only use battery chargers with a maximumcharging voltage of 14.4 V.

! Only charge the battery using the jump-starting connection point.

The jump-starting connection point is in theengine compartment (Y page 248).X Open the hood.X Connect the battery charger to the positiveterminal and ground point in the same orderas when connecting the donor battery in thejump-starting procedure (Y page 248).

Keep away from fire and open flames. Do notlean over a battery. Never charge the battery if itis still installed in the vehicle, unless you use abattery charger which has been tested andapproved by Mercedes-Benz. A battery chargerunit specially adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehi-cles and tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is available as an accessory. It permits thecharging of the battery in its installed position.Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerfor further information and availability. Read thebattery charger's operating instructions beforecharging the battery.Do not charge a battery which has beenremoved at low temperatures with a batterycharger. Allow the battery to warm up gentlyfirst, if necessary. Otherwise, the service life canbe shortened and the starting characteristicsimpaired, especially at low temperatures.

Battery (vehicle) 247

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

Jump-starting

For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point in the engine com-partment, consisting of a positive terminal and a ground point.

! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could bedamaged by the non-combusted fuel.

Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, theengine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper cables.Observe the following points:RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold.ROnly jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating.ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected fora few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.Make sure that:RThe jumper cables are not damaged.RBare parts of the terminal clamp do not come into contact with othermetal parts while the jumpercables are connected to the battery.RThe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine isrunning, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.

X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Make sure that the ignition is switched off. All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must beoff. When using the SmartKey, turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it(Y page 103).

X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc.X Open the hood.Vehicles with carbon engine cover:

X Turn fasteners: oneÕ turn and remove.X Remove cover.All vehicles:

248 Jump-startingBreakdow

nassistance

Position numberB identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-startingdevice.X Slide coverA of positive terminal: in the direction of the arrow.X Connect positive terminal: on your vehicle to positive terminal; of donor batteryB using thejumper cable. Always begin with positive terminal: on your own vehicle first.

X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.X Connect negative terminal= of donor batteryB to ground point? of your vehicle using thejumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to donor batteryB first.

X Start the engine.X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.X First, remove the jumper cables from ground point? and negative terminal=, then from pos-itive clamp: and positive terminal;. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehicle first.

X After removing the jumper cables, close coverA of positive terminal:.Vehicles with carbon engine cover:X Replace the jump-starting connection point cover. Make sure all mountings for the fasteners arepositioned precisely behind the corresponding recesses in the cover.

X Press the fasteners into the mountings. Turn the fasteners byÕ of a turn to engage.All vehicles:X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Jump-starting 249

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

Towing and tow-starting

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe rear axle locks when:Rthe engine is not runningRthe engine stalls while the vehicle is beingtowedRthere is a malfunction in the power supplyor the vehicle's electrical system

There is a risk of an accident.In the event of a breakdown, you shouldalways have the vehicle transported.

G WARNINGIf the brake system or power steering is mal-functioning and your vehicle is then towedaway, significantly more effort may berequired to steer and brake than is normallyrequired. There is a risk of an accident.In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing,make sure that the steering moves freely.

G WARNINGWhen towing or tow-starting another vehicleand its weight is greater than the permissiblegross weight of your vehicle, the:Rthe towing eye could detach itselfRthe vehicle/trailer combination could roll-over.

There is a risk of an accident.When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,its weight should not be greater than the per-missible gross weight of your vehicle.

Details on the permissible gross vehicle weightof your vehicle can be found on the vehicle iden-tification plate (Y page 280).

! Use the SmartKey instead of the Start/Stopbutton when towing the vehicle.Start the engine and keep it running. Turn theSmartKey to position 2 in the ignition. Set thetransmission to N using the E-SELECT lever.Make sure that you then leave the SmartKeyin position 2.

Check the transmission position in the instru-ment cluster.

! Make sure that the electric parking brake isreleased. If the electric parking brake is faulty,visit a qualified specialist workshop.

! Secure the tow rope or tow bar to the towingeye only. Otherwise, the vehicle couldbecome damaged.

! When COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS, DISTRONIC PLUS or theHOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakes automaticallyin certain situations.To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivatethese systems in the following or similar sit-uations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

! Do not use the towing eyes for recovery pur-poses as this could damage the vehicle. If indoubt, recover the vehicle with a crane.

! When towing, pull away slowly andsmoothly. If the tractive power is too high, thevehicles could be damaged.

! Shift the automatic transmission to N anddo not open the driver's or front passenger'sdoor during towing. The automatic transmis-sion may otherwise shift to position P, whichcould damage both vehicles.

! Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Thiscould damage the vehicle.

! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of30miles (50km). The towing speed of 30mph(50 km/h) must not be exceeded.If the vehicle has to be towed more than30 miles (50km), the entire vehicle must beraised and transported.

! Observe the transmission fluid temperature(AMG menu) in the on-board computer whentowing. The transmission fluid temperaturemust not exceed 250 ‡ (120 †). If thisoccurs, you must stop towing immediately.

! Tow-starting the vehicle is not permitted.The transmissionmay otherwise be damaged.

250 Towing and tow-startingBreakdow

nassistance

Also observe the following notes:RIf the engine does not start, try jump-startingit (Y page 248). Tow-starting the vehicle is notpermitted.RIf it is not possible to jump-start the vehicle,have it transported to the nearest qualifiedspecialist workshop, e.g. an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

If the vehicle can no longer be driven because ofan accident or breakdown, you have the follow-ing options:Rtransporting the vehicleAs a rule, you should have the vehicle trans-ported.Rtowing the vehicle with a tow rope or tow barOnly tow the vehicle in exceptional cases. Theengine must be running if you tow the vehiclewith a tow rope or tow bar.

If the vehicle has suffered transmission damage,have it transported on a transporter or trailer.Observe the displaymessages in the instrumentcluster.The battery must be connected and charged.Otherwise, you:Rwill not be able to switch on the ignition withthe Start/Stop buttonRcannot start the engineRcannot release the electric parking brakeRcannot shift the automatic transmission toposition N

Disarm the automatic locking feature before thevehicle is towed (Y page 67). You could other-wise be locked out when pushing or towing thevehicle.

Installing/removing the towing eye

Installing the towing eyeThe bracket for the screw-in towing eye isbehind the radiator trim.X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle toolkit (Y page 241).

X Fold cover: forwards and leave it to hangfrom the retaining strap.

X Lever off the cover behind it using a flat tooland fold it out.

X Screw in the towing eye clockwise to the stop.

Removing the towing eyeX Unscrew and remove the towing eye.X Fold down the inner cover until it engages.X Attach cover at the bottom and press it in atthe top until it engages.

X Put the towing eye back into the vehicle toolkit.

Towing a vehicle with both axles onthe groundIt is important that you observe the safetyinstructions when towing away your vehicle(Y page 250).The automatic transmission automatically shiftsto positionPwhen you open the driver's or front-passenger door or when you remove the Smart-Key from the ignition lock. In order to ensurethat the automatic transmission stays in posi-tion N when towing the vehicle, you mustobserve the following points:X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. Youmust use the SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button (Y page 103).

X Start the engine and leave it running duringthe entire towing procedure.

X Depress and hold the brake pedal.X Move the transmission to position N with theE-SELECT lever.

Towing and tow-starting 251

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

X Check the transmission position using theindicator in the multifunction display(Y page 110).

X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake.X Switch on the hazard warning lamps(Y page 88).

In order to signal a change of direction whentowing the vehicle with the hazard warninglamps switched on, use the combination switchas usual. In this case, only the indicator lampsfor the direction of travel flash. After resettingthe combination switch, the hazard warninglamp starts flashing again.

Transporting the vehicle

! When the vehicle is loaded for transport, thefront and rear axlesmust be stationary and onthe same transportation vehicle. Positioningover the connection point of the transportvehicle is not permitted. The drive train mayotherwise be damaged.

! You may only secure the vehicle by thewheels, not by parts of the vehicle such asaxle or steering components. Otherwise, thevehicle could be damaged.

The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicleonto a trailer or transporter for transporting pur-poses.X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. Youmust use the SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button (Y page 103).

X Start the engine and leave it running duringthe entire loading operation.

X Move the transmission to position N with theE-SELECT lever.

X Check the transmission position using theindicator in the multifunction display(Y page 110).

As soon as the vehicle has been loaded:X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away byapplying the electric parking brake.

X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-tion P.

X Turn the SmartKey to position0 in the ignitionlock and remove it.

X Secure the vehicle.

Tow-starting (emergency enginestarting)! Vehicles with automatic transmission mustnot be tow-started. You could otherwise dam-age the automatic transmission.i You can find information on "Jump-starting"under (Y page 248).

Fuses

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or ifyou replace it with a fuse with a higher amper-age, the electric cables could be overloaded.This could result in a fire. There is a risk of anaccident and injury.Always replace faulty fuses with the specifiednew fuses having the correct amperage.

Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of thesame rating, which you can recognize by thecolor and value. The fuse ratings are listed in thefuse allocation chart.The fuse allocation chart is on the fuse box in thecargo compartment (Y page 253).If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have thecause traced and rectified at a qualified special-ist workshop, e.g. an authorizedMercedes-BenzCenter.

! Only use fuses that have been approved forMercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the

252 FusesBreakdow

nassistance

correct fuse rating for the system concerned.Otherwise, components or systems could bedamaged.

! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that it islying correctly on the fuse box.Moisture seep-ing in or dirt could otherwise impair the oper-ation of the fuses.

The fuses in your vehicle serve to close downfaulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo-nents on the circuit and their functions stopoperating.

Before changing a fuseX Switch off the engine.X Switch off all electrical consumers.X Open the driver's door.The on-board electronics now have status 0.This is the same as the SmartKey having beenremoved.

or, if the SmartKey is inserted in the ignitionlock:X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 119).

All indicator lamps in the instrument clustermust be off.

Fuse box in the front-passenger foot-well! The floor panel must be installed properly,otherwise moisture or dirt could impair thefunction of the fuses.

X Open the front-passenger door.X To open: remove the carpet over the footrest.X Loosen screws: on the floor panel using asuitable tool.

X Remove the floor panel.X To close: install the floor panel again.X Screw in and tighten screws:.X Put in the carpet and press to secure.

Fuse box in the cargo compartment

X Open the tailgate.X To open: turn fastener; on the service flapto the left.

X Open service flap:.

i The fuse allocation chart is located in arecess at the side of the fuse box. You can findthe corresponding fuse rating and fuse typeon the fuse allocation chart.

Fuses 253

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf wheels and tires of the wrong size are used,the wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay be damaged. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Always replace wheels and tires with thosethat fulfill the specifications of the originalpart.When replacing wheels, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmodelWhen replacing tires, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmanufacturerRmodel

G WARNINGA flat tire severely impairs the driving, steer-ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle.There is a risk of accident.Tires without run-flat characteristics:Rdo not drive with a flat tire.Rimmediately replace the flat tire with youremergency spare wheel or spare wheel, orconsult a qualified specialist workshop.

Tires with run-flat characteristics:Rpay attention to the information and warn-ing notices on MOExtended tires (tires withrun-flat characteristics).

Accessories that are not approved for your vehi-cle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used cor-rectly can impair the operating safety.Before purchasing and using non-approvedaccessories, visit a qualified specialist work-shop and inquire about:RsuitabilityRlegal stipulationsRfactory recommendations

Information on the sizes and types ofwheels andtires for your vehicle can be found under"Wheel/tire combinations" (Y page 277).Tire pressure information can be found:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar on the driver's side(Y page 263)Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap(Y page 118)Rin the "Tire pressure" section

Operation

Information on drivingCheck the tire pressure when the vehicle isheavily laden and adjust prior to a trip.While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noisesand unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pull-ing to one side. This may indicate that thewheels or tires are damaged. If you suspect thata tire is defective, reduce your speed immedi-ately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible tocheck the wheels and tires for damage. Hiddentire damage could also be causing the unusualhandling characteristics. If you find no signs ofdamage, have the tires and wheels checked at aqualified specialist workshop.When parking your vehicle, make sure that thetires do not get deformed by the curb or otherobstacles. If they cannot be avoided, drive overobstacles such as curbs slowly and at an obtuseangle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheelsor tires.

Notes on high performance tires

G WARNINGDue to the special tire tread in combinationwith the optimized rubber compound, there isan increased risk of hydroplaning and skid-ding on a damp or wet road surface. tire grip isalso noticeably reduced at low outside tem-peratures and low tire operating tempera-tures. There is a risk of an accident.Turn on ESP® and adapt your driving styleaccordingly. When the outside temperaturefalls below 10 †, use M+S tires.

254 OperationWheelsandtires

i Different driving styles may lead to high tirewear and the tires may reach the minimumtire tread depth after only a short time.

Regular checking of wheels and tires

G WARNINGDamaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-sure loss. As a result, you could lose control ofyour vehicle. There is a risk of accident.Check the tires regularly for signs of damageand replace any damaged tires immediately.

Checkwheels and tires for damage at least oncea month. Check wheels and tires after drivingoff-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheelscan cause a loss of tire pressure. Pay particularattention to damage such as:Rcuts in the tiresRpuncturesRtears in the tiresRbulges on tiresRdeformation or severe corrosion on wheelsRegularly check the tire tread depth and thecondition of the tread across the whole width ofthe tire (Y page 255). If necessary, turn thefront wheels to full lock in order to inspect theinner side of the tire surface.All wheels must have a valve cap to protect thevalve against dirt and moisture. Do not mountanything onto the valve other than the standardvalve cap or other valve caps approved byMercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Do not use anyother valve caps or systems, e.g. tire pressuremonitoring systems.Regularly check the pressure of all the tires par-ticularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire pres-sure as necessary (Y page 257).The service life of tires depends, among otherthings, on the following factors:Rdriving styleRtire pressureRdistance covered

Notes on tire tread

G WARNINGInsufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.This means that on wet road surfaces, the riskof hydroplaning increases, in particular wherespeed is not adapted to suit the driving con-ditions. There is a risk of accident.If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tiresmay exhibit different levels of wear at differ-ent locations on the tire tread. Thus, youshould regularly check the tread depth andthe condition of the tread across the entirewidth of all tires.Minimum tire tread depth for:RSummer tires:â in (3 mm)RM+S tires:ã in (4 mm)For safety reasons, replace the tires beforethe legally prescribed limit for the minimumtire tread depth is reached.

Marking: shows where the bar indicator(arrow) for tread wear is integrated into the tiretread.Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law.Six indicators are positioned on the tire tread.They are visible once a tread depth of approx-imatelyá in (1.6mm) has been reached. If thisis the case, the tire is so worn that it must bereplaced.

Selecting, mounting and replacingtiresROnly mount tires and wheels of the same typeand make.

Operation 255

Wheelsandtires

Z

Exception: it is permissible to install a differ-ent type or make in the event of a flat tire.ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto thewheels.RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds for thefirst 60 miles (100 km). They only reach theirfull performance after this distance.RDo not drive with tires which have too littletread depth, as this significantly reduces thetraction on wet roads (hydroplaning).RReplace the tires after six years at the latest,regardless of wear.

Winter operation

General notesHave your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop at the onset of winter.Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"section (Y page 272).

Driving with summer tiresAt temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), summertires lose elasticity and therefore traction andbraking power. Change the tires on your vehicleto M+S tires. Using summer tires at very coldtemperatures could cause cracks to form,thereby damaging the tires permanently.Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility forthis type of damage.

G WARNINGDamaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-sure loss. As a result, you could lose control ofyour vehicle. There is a risk of accident.Check the tires regularly for signs of damageand replace any damaged tires immediately.

M+S tires

G WARNINGM+S tires with a tire tread depth of less thanã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winterand do not provide sufficient traction. There isa risk of an accident.

M+S tires with a tread depth of less thanã in(4 mm) must be replaced immediately.

At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7†), use wintertires or all-season tires. Both types of tire areidentified by the M+S marking.Only winter tires bearing thei snowflakesymbol in addition to the M+S marking providethe best possible grip in wintry road conditions.Only these tires will allow driving safety systemssuch as ABS and ESP® to function optimally inwinter. These tires have been developed specif-ically for driving in snow.UseM+S tires of the samemake and tread on allwheels to maintain safe handling characteris-tics.Always observe the maximum permissiblespeed specified for the M+S tires you havemounted.When you have mounted the M+S tires:X Check the tire pressures (Y page 257).X Restart the tire pressure monitor(Y page 262).

Snow chains

G WARNINGIf snow chains are installed to the frontwheels, they may drag against the vehiclebody or chassis components. This couldcause damage to the vehicle or the tires.There is a risk of an accident.To avoid hazardous situations:Rnever install snow chains to the frontwheelsRalways install snow chains in pairs to therear wheels.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use snow chains that havebeen specially approved for your vehicle byMercedes-Benz, or are of a correspondingstandard of quality. For more information,please contact a qualified specialist workshop.

256 Winter operationWheelsandtires

If you intend to mount snow chains, please bearthe following points in mind:RSnow chains may not be mounted on allwheel/tire combinations. Permissible wheel-tire combinations (Y page 277).ROnly use snow chains when driving on roadscompletely covered by snow. Remove thesnow chains as soon as possible when youcome to a road that is not snow-covered.RLocal regulationsmay restrict the use of snowchains. Observe the appropriate regulations ifyou wish to mount snow chains.RDo not exceed the maximum permissiblespeed of 30 mph (50 km/h).

You may wish to deactivate ESP® when pullingaway with snow chains installed (Y page 56).You can thereby allow the wheels to spin in acontrolled manner, achieving an increased driv-ing force (cutting action).

Tire pressure

Tire pressure specifications

Important safety notes

G WARNINGUnderinflated or overinflated tires pose thefollowing risks:Rthe tires may burst, especially as the loadand vehicle speed increase.Rthe tires may wear excessively and/orunevenly, which may greatly impair tiretraction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steer-ing and braking, may be greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.Follow recommended tire inflation pressuresand check the pressure of all the tires includ-ing the spare wheel:Rmonthly, at leastRif the load changesRbefore beginning a long journeyRunder different operating conditions, e.g.off-road driving

If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

The data on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard and tire pressure table are only exam-ples. Tire pressure specifications are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data shownhere. The tire pressure specifications that arevalid for your vehicle can be found on the Tireand Loading Information placard and tire pres-sure table on the vehicle.

General notesThe recommended tire pressures for the tiresmounted at the factory can be found on thelabels described here.Further information on tire pressures can beobtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Tire and Loading Information placard

: Recommended tire pressuresThe Tire and Loading Information placard is onthe B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 263).The Tire and Loading Information placard con-tains the recommended tire pressures for coldtires. The recommended tire pressures are validfor the maximum permissible load and up to themaximum permissible vehicle speed.

Tire pressure tableThe tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuelfiller flap. It shows the tire pressure for all tirespermitted at the factory for this vehicle; seeillustration (example).

Tire pressure 257

Wheelsandtires

Z

The tire pressure table contains the recommen-ded pressures for cold tires for various operat-ing conditions, i.e. differing load and speed con-ditions.If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the fol-lowing tire pressure information is only valid forthat tire size; see illustration (example).

The load conditions "partially laden" and "fullyladen" are defined in the table for different num-bers of occupants and amounts of luggage. Theactual number of seats may differ.

Some tire pressure tables show only the rimdiameters instead of the full tire size, e.g. R18.Rim diameter is part of the tire size and can befound on the tire sidewall (Y page 267).If the tire pressures have been set to the lowervalues for lighter loads and/or lower roadspeeds, the pressures should be reset to thehigher values:Rif you want to drive with an increased loadand/orRif you want to drive at higher road speedsThe tire pressures for increased loads and/orhigher road speeds, shown in the tire pressuretable, may have a negative effect on drivingcomfort.If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this canlead to an excessive build up of heat and a sud-den loss of pressure.For more information, contact a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Important notes on tire pressure

G WARNINGIf the tire pressure drops repeatedly, thewheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tirepressure that is too low may result in a tireblow-out. There is a risk of an accident.RCheck the tire for foreign objects.RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or thevalve is leaking.

If you are unable to rectify the damage, con-tact a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you fit unsuitable accessories onto tirevalves, the tire valves may be overloaded andmalfunction, which can cause tire pressureloss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pres-sure monitors keep the tire valve open. Thiscan also result in tire pressure loss. There is arisk of an accident.Only screw the standard valve cap or othervalve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz foryour vehicle onto the tire valve.

Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tirepressure. The outer appearance of a tire does

258 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

not permit any reliable conclusion about the tirepressure. On vehicles equipped with the elec-tronic tire pressure monitor, the tire pressurecan be checked in the on-board computer.The tire temperature and pressure increasewhen the vehicle is in motion. This is dependenton the driving speed and the load.Therefore, you should only correct tire pres-sures when the tires are cold.The tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tiresout of direct sunlight for at least three hoursandRif the vehicle has not been driven further than1 mile (1.6 km)

The tire temperature changes depending on theoutside temperature, the vehicle speed and thetire load. If the tire temperature changes by18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure changes byapproximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Takethis into account when checking the pressure ofwarm tires. Only correct the tire pressure if it istoo low for the current operating conditions. Ifyou check the tire pressure when the tires arewarm, the resulting value will be higher than ifthe tires were cold. This is normal. Do notreduce the tire pressure to the value specifiedfor cold tires. The tire pressure would otherwisebe too low.Observe the recommended tire pressures forcold tires:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar on the driver's sideRin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap(Y page 118).

Underinflated or overinflated tires

Underinflated tires

G WARNINGTires with pressure that is too low can over-heat and burst as a consequence. In addition,they also suffer from excessive and/or irreg-ular wear, which can severely impair the brak-ing properties and the driving characteristics.There is a risk of an accident.Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all thetires, including the spare wheel.

Underinflated tires may:Roverheat, leading to tire defectsRadversely affect handlingRwear excessively and/or unevenlyRhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption

Overinflated tires

G WARNINGTires with excessively high pressure can burstbecause they are damaged more easily byroad debris, potholes etc. In addition, theyalso suffer from irregular wear, which canseverely impair the braking properties and thedriving characteristics. There is a risk of anaccident.Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all thetires, including the spare wheel.

Overinflated tires may:Rincrease the braking distanceRadversely affect handlingRwear excessively and/or unevenlyRhave an adverse effect on ride comfortRbe more susceptible to damage

Maximum tire pressures

: Example: maximum permissible tire pres-sure

Never exceed the maximum permissible tireinflation pressure. Always observe the recom-mended tire pressure for your vehicle whenadjusting the tire pressure (Y page 257).

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe-cific and may deviate from the values in theillustration.

Tire pressure 259

Wheelsandtires

Z

Checking the tire pressures

Important safety notesObserve the notes on tire pressure(Y page 257).Information on air pressure for the tires on yourvehicle can be found:Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Informationplacard on the B-pillarRin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap(Y page 118)Rin the "Tire pressure" section

Checking tire pressures manuallyTo determine and set the correct tire pressure,proceed as follows:X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to bechecked.

X Press the tire pressure gage securely onto thevalve.

X Read the tire pressure and compare it to therecommended value on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard or the tire pressure table(Y page 257).

X If the tire pressure is too low, increase the tirepressure to the recommended value.

X If the tire pressure is too high, release air. Todo so, press down the metal pin in the valve,using the tip of a pen for example. Then checkthe tire pressure again using the tire pressurechecker.

X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.X Repeat these steps for the other tires.

Tire pressure monitor

General notesIf a tire pressure monitor is installed, the vehi-cle's wheels have sensors that monitor the tirepressures in all four tires. The tire pressuremon-itor warns you if the pressure drops in one ormore of the tires. The tire pressure monitor onlyfunctions if the corresponding sensors areinstalled in all wheels.Information on tire pressures is displayed in themultifunction display. After a few minutes ofdriving, the current tire pressure of each tire is

shown in the Servicemenu of themultifunctiondisplay; see illustration (example).

For information on the message display, refer tothe "Checking the tire pressure electronically"section (Y page 261).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGEach tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked at least once every twoweeks when cold and inflated to the pressurerecommended by the vehicle manufactureron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pres-sure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. Ifyour vehicle has tires of a different size thanthe size indicated on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard or, if available, the tirepressure label, you should determine theproper tire pressure for those tires.As an added safety feature, your vehicle hasbeen equippedwith a tire pressuremonitoringsystem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-sure telltale when one or more of your tiresare significantly underinflated. Accordingly,when the low tire pressure telltale lights up,you should stop and check your tires as soonas possible, and inflate them to the properpressure. Driving on a significantly underin-flated tire causes the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure.Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiencyand tire tread life, andmay affect the vehicle'shandling and stopping ability. Please note thatthe TPMS is not a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver's responsi-

260 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even ifunderinflation has not reached the level totrigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres-sure telltale.Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate whenthe system is not operating properly. TheTPMS malfunction indicator is combined withthe low tire pressure telltale. When the sys-tem detects a malfunction, the warning lampwill flash for approximately a minute and thenremain continuously illuminated. Thissequencewill be repeated every time the vehi-cle is started as long as the malfunctionexists. When the malfunction indicator is illu-minated, the systemmay not be able to detector signal low tire pressure as intended.TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety ofreasons, including the installation of incom-patible replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMSfrom functioning properly. Always check theTPMS malfunction telltale after replacing oneor more tires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement or alternate Tiresand wheels allow the TPMS to continue tofunction properly.

It is the driver's responsibility to set the tirepressure to that recommended for cold tireswhich is suitable for the operating situation(Y page 257). Note that the correct tire pressurefor the current operating situation must first betaught-in to the tire pressure monitor. If there isa substantial loss of pressure, the warningthreshold for the warning message is aligned tothe reference values taught-in. Restart the tirepressuremonitor after adjusting the pressure ofthe cold tires (Y page 262). The current pres-sures are saved as new reference values. As aresult, a warning message will appear if the tirepressure drops significantly.The tire pressure monitor does not warn you ofan incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe thenotes on the recommended tire pressure(Y page 257).The tire pressuremonitor is not able to warn youof a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire ispenetrated by a foreign object. In the event of asudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a

halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steeringmovements.The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warninglamp in the instrument cluster for indicatingpressure loss or a malfunction. Whether thewarning lamp flashes or lights up indicateswhether a tire pressure is too low or the tirepressure monitor is malfunctioning:Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tirepressure on one or more tires is significantlytoo low. The tire pressure monitor is not mal-functioning.Rif the warning lamp flashes for around aminute and then remains lit constantly, thetire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.

In addition to the warning lamp, a messageappears in the multifunction display. Observethe information on display messages(Y page 183).It may take up to ten minutes for a malfunctionof the tire pressure monitor to be indicated. Amalfunction will be indicated by the tire pres-sure warning lamp flashing for approximatelyone minute and then remaining lit. When themalfunction has been rectified, the tire pressurewarning lamp goes out after a few minutes ofdriving.The tire pressure values indicated by the on-board computer may differ from those meas-ured at a gas station with a pressure gauge. Thetire pressures shown by the on-board computerrefer to those measured at sea level. At highaltitudes, the tire pressure values indicated by apressure gauge are higher than those shown bythe on-board computer. In this case, do notreduce the tire pressures.The operation of the tire pressure monitor canbe affected by interference from radio transmit-ting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-wayradios) thatmay be being operated in or near thevehicle.

Checking the tire pressure electroni-callyX Switch on the ignition (Y page 103).X Useò on the steering wheel to call up thelist of menus.

X Press9 or: on the steering wheel toselect the Service menu.

X Press thea button.

Tire pressure 261

Wheelsandtires

Z

X Press9 or: to select Tire Pres‐sure.X Press thea button.The current tire pressure of each tire is shownin the multifunction display.

If the vehicle was parked for longer than20 minutes, the following message appears:Tire pressure will be displayed afterdriving a few minutes.After a teach-in process, the tire pressure mon-itor automatically detects new wheels or newsensors. As long as a clear allocation of the tirepressure value to the individual wheels is notpossible, the Tire Pressure Monitor Activemessage is shown instead of the tire pressuredisplay. The tire pressures are already beingmonitored.

Tire pressure monitor warning mes-sagesIf the tire pressure monitor detects a pressureloss in one or more tires, a warning message isshown in the multifunction display. The yellowtire pressure warning lamp then lights up.RIf the Please Correct Tire Pressuremessage appears in themultifunction display,the tire pressure in at least one tire is too low.The tire pressure must be corrected when theopportunity arises.RIf the Check Tires message appears in themultifunction display, the tire pressure in atleast one tire has dropped significantly. Thetires must be checked.RIf the Warning Tire Malfunctionmessageappears in the multifunction display, the tirepressure in at least one tire has dropped sud-denly. The tires must be checked.

Observe the instructions and safety notes in thedisplay messages in the "Tires" section(Y page 183).If the wheel positions on the vehicle are rotated,the tire pressures may be displayed for thewrong positions for a short time. This is rectifiedafter a few minutes of driving, and the tire pres-sures are displayed for the correct positions.

Restarting the tire pressure monitorWhen you restart the tire pressure monitor, allexisting warning messages are deleted and thewarning lamps go out. Themonitor uses the cur-rently set tire pressures as the reference values

for monitoring. In most cases, the tire pressuremonitor will automatically detect the new refer-ence values after you have changed the tirepressure. However, you can also define refer-ence valuesmanually as described here. The tirepressure monitor then monitors the new tirepressure values.X Set the tire pressure to the value recommen-ded for the corresponding driving situation onthe Tire and Loading Information placard onthe driver's side B-pillar (Y page 257).Additional tire pressures for various operatingconditions can be found in the tire pressuretable in the fuel filler flap (Y page 257).

X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct onall four wheels.

X Switch on the ignition (Y page 103).X Useò on the steering wheel to call up thelist of menus.

X Press9 or: on the steering wheel toselect the Service menu.

X Press thea button.X Press9 or: to select Tire Pres‐sure.X Press thea button.The current tire pressure for each wheel orthe Tire pressure will be displayedafter driving a few minutes messagewill be displayed in the multifunction display.

X Press the: button.The Use Current Pressures as New Ref‐erence Valuesmessage appears in the mul-tifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart:X Press thea button.The Tire Press. Monitor Restartedmes-sage appears in the multifunction display.After driving for a few minutes, the systemchecks whether the current tire pressures arewithin the specified range. The new tire pres-sures are then accepted as reference valuesand monitored.

If you wish to cancel the restart:X Press the% button.The tire pressure values stored at the lastrestart will continue to be monitored.

262 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

Loading the vehicle

Instruction labels for tires and loads

G WARNINGOverloaded tires can overheat, causing ablowout. Overloaded tires can also impair thesteering and driving characteristics and leadto brake failure. There is a risk of accident.Observe the load rating of the tires. The loadrating must be at least half of the GAWR ofyour vehicle. Never overload the tires byexceeding the maximum load.

Two instruction labels on your vehicle show themaximum possible load.(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard is

on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The Tireand Loading Information placard shows themaximum permissible number of occu-pants and themaximumpermissible vehicleload. It also contains details of the tire sizesand corresponding pressures for tiresmounted at the factory.

(2) The vehicle identification plate is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle iden-tification plate informs you of the grossvehicle weight rating. It is made up of thevehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, thefuel and the cargo. You can also find infor-mation about the maximum gross axleweight rating on the front and rear axle.The maximum gross axle weight rating isthe maximum weight that can be carried byone axle (front or rear axle). Never exceedthe maximum load or the maximum grossaxle weight rating for the front or rear axle.

: B-pillar, driver's side

Maximum permissible gross vehicleweight rating

X Specification for maximum gross vehicleweight: is listed in the Tire and LoadingInformation placard: "The combinedweight ofoccupants and cargo should never exceedXXX kilograms or XXX lbs."

The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, loadand luggage must not exceed the specifiedvalue.

i The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in the illustrationare examples. The maximum permissiblegross vehicle weight rating is vehicle-specificand may differ from that in the illustration.You can find the valid maximum permissiblegross vehicle weight rating for your vehicle onthe Tire and Loading Information placard.

Number of seats

Maximum number of seats: indicates themaximum number of occupants allowed totravel in the vehicle. This information can befound on the Tire and Loading Information plac-ard.

Loading the vehicle 263

Wheelsandtires

Z

i The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in the illustrationare examples. The number of seats is vehicle-specific and can differ from the details shown.The number of seats in your vehicle can befound on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard.

Determining the correct load limit

Step-by-step instructionsThe following steps have been developed asrequired of all manufacturers under Title 49,Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pur-suant to the "National Traffic and Motor VehicleSafety Act of 1966".X Step 1: Locate the statement "The combinedweight of occupants and cargo should neverexceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle’sTire and Loading Information placard.

X Step 2: Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will be riding inyour vehicle.

X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of thedriver and passengers from XXX kilograms orXXX lbs.

X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the avail-able amount of cargo and luggage load capa-city. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals1400 lbs and there will be five 150-lb pas-sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail-able cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

X Step 5: Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded on the vehi-cle. That weight may not safely exceed theavailable cargo and luggage load capacity cal-culated in step 4.

264 Loading the vehicleWheelsandtires

Example: steps 1 to 3The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varyingseating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a load limit of1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only.Make sure you are using the actual loadlimit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (Y page 263).The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.Step 1

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Combined maximumweight of occupantsand cargo (data fromthe Tire and LoadingInformation placard)

1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg)

Step 2

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Number of people inthe vehicle (driver andoccupants)

5 3 1

Distribution of theoccupants

Front: 2Rear: 3

Front: 1Rear: 2

Front: 1

Weight of the occu-pants

Occupant 1: 150 lbs(68 kg)Occupant 2: 180 lbs(82 kg)Occupant 3: 160 lbs(73 kg)Occupant 4: 140 lbs(63 kg)Occupant 5: 120 lbs(54 kg)

Occupant 1: 200 lbs(91 kg)Occupant 2: 190 lbs(86 kg)Occupant 3: 150 lbs(68 kg)

Occupant 1: 150 lbs(68 kg)

Gross weight of alloccupants

750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)

Step 3

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Permissible load (maxi-mum gross vehicleweight rating from theTire and Loading Infor-mation placard minusthe gross weight of alloccupants)

1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò750 lbs (340 kg) =750 lbs (340 kg)

1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò540 lbs (245 kg)=960 lbs (435 kg)

1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò150 lbs (68 kg) =1350 lbs (612 kg)

Loading the vehicle 265

Wheelsandtires

Z

Vehicle identification plateEven if you have calculated the total cargo care-fully, you should still make sure that the grossvehicle weight rating and the gross axle weightrating are not exceeded. Details can be found onthe vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar onthe driver's side of the vehicle (Y page 263).Permissible Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR): the gross weight of the vehicle, all pas-sengers, load and trailer load/noseweight (ifapplicable) must not exceed the permissiblegross vehicle weight.Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): the maxi-mum permissible weight that can be carried byone axle (front or rear axle).To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed themaximum permissible values (gross vehicleweight and maximum gross axle weight rating),have your loaded vehicle (including driver, occu-pants, cargo, and full trailer load if applicable)weighed on a suitable vehicle weighbridge.

All about wheels and tires

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand-ards

Overview of Tire Quality Grading Stand-ards

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are U.S.government specifications. Their purpose is toprovide drivers with uniform reliable informationon tire performance data. Tire manufacturershave to grade tires using three performance fac-tors:: tread wear grade,; traction grade and= temperature grade. These regulations do notapply to Canada. Nevertheless, all tires sold inNorth America are provided with the corre-

sponding quality grading markings on the side-wall of the tire.Quality grades can be found, where applicable,on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum section width.Example:RTreadwear grade: 200RTraction grade: AARTemperature grade: AAll passenger car tiresmust conform to the stat-utory safety requirements in addition to thesegrades.

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe-cific and may deviate from the values in theillustration.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specified U.S.government course. For example, a tire graded150 would wear one and one-half times as wellon the government course as a tire graded 100.The relative performance of tires depends uponthe actual conditions of their use, however, andmay depart significantly from the norm due tovariations in driving habits, service practicesand differences in road characteristics and cli-mate.

Traction

G WARNINGThe traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cor-nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction char-acteristics.

! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage tothe drive train.

The traction grades – from highest to lowest –are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent thetire's ability to stop on wet pavement as meas-ured under controlled conditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces of asphalt and con-crete. A tire marked C may have poor tractionperformance.The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icyroad is always lower than on dry road surfaces.

266 All about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires

You should pay special attention to road condi-tions when temperatures are around freezingpoint.Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum treaddepth ofã in (4 mm) on all four winter tires.Observe the legally required minimum tire treaddepth (Y page 255). Winter tires can reduce thebraking distance on snow-covered surfaces incomparison with summer tires. The braking dis-tance is still much further than on surfaces thatare not icy or covered with snow. Take appro-priate care when driving.Further information on winter tires (M+S tires)(Y page 256).

Temperature

G WARNINGThe temperature grade for this tire is estab-lished for a tire that is properly inflated andnot overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-tion, or excessive loading, either separately orin combination, can cause excessive heatbuild-up and possible tire failure.

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire's resistance to thegeneration of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditionson a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus-tained high temperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can lead to sudden tirefailure. The grade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger car tires mustmeet under the Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimum required by law.

Tire labeling

Overview

: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard(Y page 271)

; DOT, Tire Identification Number(Y page 270)

= Maximum tire load (Y page 269)? Maximum tire pressure (Y page 259)A ManufacturerB Tire material (Y page 270)C Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity

and speed rating (Y page 267)D Load index (Y page 269)E Tire nameThe markings described above are on the tire inaddition to the tire name (sales designation) andthe manufacturer's name.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviatefrom the data in the example.

Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity and speed rating

G WARNINGExceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa-city and the approved maximum speed couldlead to tire damage or the tire bursting. Thereis a risk of accident.Therefore, only use tire types and sizesapproved for your vehicle model. Observe the

All about wheels and tires 267

Wheelsandtires

Z

tire load rating and speed rating required foryour vehicle.

: Tire width; Nominal aspect ratio in %= Tire code? Rim diameterA Load bearing indexB Speed ratingGeneral: depending on the manufacturer'sstandards, the size imprinted in the tire wall maynot contain any letters or may contain one letterthat precedes the size description.If there is no letter preceding the size descrip-tion (as shown above): these are passengervehicle tires according to European manufac-turing standards.If "P" precedes the size description: these arepassenger vehicle tires according to U.S. man-ufacturing standards.If "LT" precedes the size description: these arelight truck tires according to U.S. manufacturingstandards.If "T" precedes the size description: compactemergency wheels with high tire pressure thatare only designed for temporary use in an emer-gency.Tire width: tire width: shows the nominal tirewidth in millimeters.Height-width ratio: aspect ratio; is the sizeratio between the tire height and tire width andis shown in percent. The aspect ratio is calcula-ted by dividing the tire width by the tire height.Tire code: tire code= specifies the tire type."R" represents radial tires; "D" represents diag-onal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial tires.Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of over149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the size

description, depending on the manufacturer(e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).Rim diameter: rim diameter? is the diameterof the bead seat, not the diameter of the rimflange. The rim diameter is specified ininches (in).Load-bearing index: load-bearing indexA is anumerical code that specifies the maximumload-bearing capacity of a tire.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximum permissibleload can be found on the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information placard on the B-pillar onthe driver's side (Y page 263).Example:Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximumload of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can bear.For further information on the maximum tireload in kilograms and lbs, see (Y page 269).For further information on the load bearingindex, see "Load index" (Y page 269).Speed rating: speed ratingB specifies theapproved maximum speed of the tire.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviatefrom the data in the example.

Regardless of the speed rating, always observethe speed limits. Drive carefully and adapt yourdriving style to the traffic conditions.Summer tires

Index Speed rating

Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)

S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)

T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h)

ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed ofover 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in

268 All about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires

the size description, depending on the man-ufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18).The service specification is made up of load-bearing indexA and speed ratingB.RIf the size description of your tire includes"ZR" and there are no service specifications,ask the tire manufacturer in order to find outthe maximum speed.If a service specification is available, the max-imum speed is limited according to the speedrating in the service specification. Example:245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this example, "97 Y" isthe service specification. The letter "Y" rep-resents the speed rating. The maximumspeed of the tire is limited to 186 mph(300 km/h).RThe size description for all tires with maxi-mum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h)must include "ZR", and the service specifica-tion must be given in parentheses. Example:275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating "(Y)" indi-cates that the maximum speed of the tire isover 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the tire man-ufacturer about the maximum speed.

All-weather tires and winter tires

Index Speed rating

Q M+S1 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

T M+S1 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H M+S1 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V M+S1 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

i Not all tires with the M+S marking providethe driving characteristics of winter tires. Inaddition to the M+Smarking, winter tires alsohave thei snowflake symbol on the tirewall. Tires with this marking fulfill the require-ments of the Rubber Manufacturers Associa-tion (RMA) and the Rubber Association ofCanada (RAC) regarding the tire traction onsnow. They have been especially developedfor driving on snow.

An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehi-cle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph(210 km/h).The speed rating of tires mounted at the factorymay be higher than themaximum speed that theelectronic speed limiter permits.

Make sure that your tires have the requiredspeed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. Therequired speed rating for your vehicle can befound in the "Tires" section (Y page 277).Further information about reading tire data canbe obtained from any qualified specialist work-shop.

Load index

In addition to the load-bearing index, loadindex: may also be imprinted on the sidewallof the tire. You will find this after the letter thatidentifies the speed rating (Y page 267).RIf no specification is given: no text (as in theexample above), represents a standard load(SL) tireRXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced tireRLight Load: represents a light load tireRC, D, E: represents a load range that dependson themaximum load that the tire can carry ata certain pressure

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviatefrom the data in the example.

Maximum load rating

1 Or M+Si for winter tires.

All about wheels and tires 269

Wheelsandtires

Z

Maximum tire load: is the maximum permis-sible weight for which the tire is approved.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximum permissibleload can be found on the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information placard on the B-pillar onthe driver's side (Y page 263).

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe-cific and may deviate from the values in theillustration.

DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)US tire regulations stipulate that every tire man-ufacturer or retreadermust imprint a TIN in or onthe sidewall of each tire produced.

The TIN is a unique identification number. TheTIN enables the tiremanufacturers or retreadersto inform purchasers of recalls and other safety-relevant matters. It makes it possible for thepurchaser to easily identify the affected tires.The TIN is made up of manufacturer identifica-tion code;, tire size=, tire type code? andmanufacturing dateA.DOT (Department of Transportation): tiresymbol:marks that the tire complies with therequirements of the U.S. Department of Trans-portation.Manufacturer identification code: manufac-turer identification code; provides details onthe tire manufacturer. New tires have a codewith two symbols. Retreaded tires have a codewith four symbols.For further information about retreaded tires,see (Y page 277).Tire size: identifier= describes the tire size.Tire type code: tire type code? can be used bythe manufacturer as a code to describe specificcharacteristics of the tire.

Date of manufacture: date of manufactureAprovides information about the age of a tire. Thefirst and second positions represent the week ofmanufacture, starting with "01" for the first cal-endar week. Positions three and four representthe year of manufacture. For example, a tire thatis marked "3214" wasmanufactured in week 32in 2014.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviatefrom the data in the example.

Tire characteristics

This information describes the type of tire cordand the number of layers in sidewall: andunder tire tread;.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviatefrom the data in the example.

Definition of terms for tires and loading

Tire ply composition and material usedDescribes the number of plies or the number oflayers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire treadand sidewall. These are made of steel, nylon,polyester and other materials.

BarMetric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 poundsper square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals (kPa)are the equivalent of 1 bar.

DOT (Department of Transportation)DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements of theU.S. Department of Transportation.

Normal occupant weightThe number of occupants for which the vehicleis designedmultiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lbs).

270 All about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires

Uniform Tire Quality Grading StandardsA uniform standard to grade the quality of tireswith regards to tread quality, tire traction andtemperature characteristics. The quality grad-ing assessment is made by the manufacturerfollowing specifications from the U.S. govern-ment. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall ofthe tire.

Recommended tire pressuresThe recommended tire pressure applies to thetires mounted at the factory.The Tire and Loading Information placard con-tains the recommended tire pressures for coldtires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the maxi-mum permissible vehicle speed.The tire pressure table contains the recommen-ded pressures for cold tires for various operat-ing conditions, i.e. differing load and speed con-ditions.

Increased vehicle weight due to optionalequipmentThe combined weight of all standard andoptional equipment available for the vehicle,regardless of whether it is actually installed onthe vehicle or not.

RimThis is the part of the wheel on which the tire ismounted.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weightrating. The actual load on an axle must neverexceed the gross axle weight rating. The grossaxle weight rating can be found on the vehicleidentification plate on the B-pillar on the driver'sside.

Speed ratingThe speed rating is part of the tire identification.It specifies the speed range for which the tire isapproved.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)The gross vehicle weight includes the weight ofthe vehicle including fuel, tools, the sparewheel,accessories installed, occupants, luggage andthe drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The grossvehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehi-cle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehi-cle identification plate on the B-pillar on thedriver's side.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)The GVWR is the maximum permissible grossweight of a fully loaded vehicle (theweight of thevehicle including all accessories, occupants,fuel, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, ifapplicable). The gross vehicle weight rating isspecified on the vehicle identification plate onthe B-pillar on the driver's side.

Maximum loaded vehicle weightThe maximum weight is the sum of:Rthe curb weight of the vehicleRthe weight of the accessoriesRthe load limitRthe weight of the factory installed optionalequipment

Kilopascal (kPa)Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corre-sponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure isbar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of1 bar.

Load indexIn addition to the load-bearing index, the loadindex may also be imprinted on the sidewall ofthe tire. This specifies the load-bearing capacitymore precisely.

Curb weightTheweight of a vehicle with standard equipmentincluding the maximum capacity of fuel, oil andcoolant. It also includes the air-conditioning sys-tem and optional equipment if these are instal-led in the vehicle, but does not include passen-gers or luggage.

Maximum load ratingThe maximum tire load is the maximum permis-sible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire isapproved.

Maximum permissible tire pressureMaximum permissible tire pressure for one tire.

Maximum load on one tireMaximum load on one tire. This is calculated bydividing the maximum axle load of one axle bytwo.

All about wheels and tires 271

Wheelsandtires

Z

PSI (pounds per square inch)A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.

Aspect ratioRelationship between tire height and tire widthin percent.

Tire pressureThis is pressure inside the tire applying an out-ward force to each square inch of the tire's sur-face. The tire pressure is specified in pounds persquare inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in bar.The tire pressure should only be corrected whenthe tires are cold.

Cold tire pressureThe tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tiresout of direct sunlight for at least three hoursandRif the vehicle has not been driven further than1 mile (1.6 km)

TreadThe part of the tire that comes into contact withthe road.

BeadThe tire bead ensures that the tire sits securelyon thewheel. There are several steel wires in thebead to prevent the tire from coming loose fromthe wheel rim.

SidewallThe part of the tire between the tread and thebead.

Weight of optional extrasThe combined weight of those optional extrasthat weigh more than the replaced standardparts and more than 5 lbs (2.3 kg). Theseoptional extras, such as high-performancebrakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-per-formance battery, are not included in the curbweight and the weight of the accessories.

TIN (Tire Identification Number)This is a unique identifier which can be used bya tire manufacturer to identify tires, for examplefor a product recall, and thus identify the pur-chasers. The TIN is made up of the manufactur-er's identity code, tire size, tire type code andthe manufacturing date.

Load bearing indexThe load bearing index (also load index) is a codethat contains the maximum load bearing capa-city of a tire.

TractionTraction is the result of friction between the tiresand the road surface.

Treadwear indicatorsNarrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distrib-uted over the tire tread. If the tire tread is levelwith the bars, the wear limit ofá in (1.6 mm)has been reached.

Occupant distributionThe distribution of occupants in a vehicle at theirdesignated seating positions.

Total load limitNominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg(150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats inthe vehicle.

Changing a wheel

Flat tireThe "Breakdown assistance" section(Y page 242) contains information and notes onhow to deal with a flat tire.

Rotating the wheels

G WARNINGInterchanging the front and rear wheels mayseverely impair the driving characteristics ifthe wheels or tires have different dimensions.The wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay also be damaged. There is a risk of acci-dent.Rotate front and rearwheels only if thewheelsand tires are of the same dimensions.

! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressuremonitor, electronic components are locatedin the wheel.Tire-mounting tools should not be used nearthe valve. This could damage the electroniccomponents.

272 Changing a wheelWheelsandtires

Only have tires changed at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Always observe the instructions and safetynotes in the "Mounting a wheel" section(Y page 273).The wear patterns on the front and rear tiresdiffer, depending on the operating conditions.Rotate the wheels before a clear wear patternhas formed on the tires. Front tires typicallywear more on the shoulders and the rear tires inthe center.On vehicles that have the same size front andrear wheels, you can rotate the wheels accord-ing to the intervals in the tire manufacturer'swarranty book in your vehicle documents. If nowarranty book is available, the tires should berotated every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to10,000 km). Depending on tire wear, this maybe required earlier. Do not change the directionof wheel rotation.Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and thebrake disc thoroughly every time awheel is rota-ted. Check the tire pressure and reactivate thetire pressure monitor if necessary.

Direction of rotationTires with a specified direction of rotation haveadditional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of hydro-planing. These advantages can only be gained ifthe tires are installed corresponding to thedirection of rotation.An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates itscorrect direction of rotation.

Storing wheelsStore wheels that are not being used in a cool,dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tiresfrom oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.

Mounting a wheel

Preparing the vehicleX Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery andlevel ground.

X Apply the electric parking brake manually.X Bring the front wheels into the straight-aheadposition.

X Shift the transmission to position P.X Switch off the engine.X With KEYLESS-GO start function or vehi-cles with KEYLESS-GO: open the driver'sdoor.The on-board electronics now have status 0.This is the same as the SmartKey having beenremoved.

orX Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.X If included in the vehicle equipment, removethe tire-change tool kit from the vehicle.

X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away.

Securing the vehicle to prevent it fromrolling away

If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, itcan be found in the tire-change tool kit(Y page 241).The folding wheel chock is an additional safetymeasure to prevent the vehicle from rollingaway, for example when changing a wheel.X Fold both plates upwards:.X Fold out lower plate;.X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into theopenings in base plate=.

Changing a wheel 273

Wheelsandtires

Z

X Place chocks or other suitable items underthe front and rear of the wheel that is diago-nally opposite the wheel you wish to change.

Raising the vehicle

G WARNINGIf you do not position the jack correctly at theappropriate jacking point of the vehicle, thejack could tip over with the vehicle raised.There is a risk of injury.Only position the jack at the appropriate jack-ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jackmust be positioned vertically, directly underthe jacking point of the vehicle.

! The jack is designed exclusively for jackingup the vehicle at the jacking points. Other-wise, your vehicle could be damaged.

Observe the followingwhen raising the vehi-cle:RTo raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-spe-cific jack that has been tested and approvedby Mercedes-Benz. If used incorrectly, thejack could tip over with the vehicle raised.RThe jack is designed only to raise and hold thevehicle for a short time while a wheel is beingchanged. It must not be used for performingmaintenance work under the vehicle.RAvoid changing the wheel on uphill and down-hill slopes.RBefore raising the vehicle, secure it from roll-ing away by applying the parking brake andinserting wheel chocks. Do not disengage theparking brake while the vehicle is raised.RThe jack must be placed on a firm, flat andnon-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large,flat, load-bearing underlaymust be used. On aslippery surface, a non-slip underlay must beused, e.g. rubber mats.RDo not use wooden blocks or similar objectsas a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jackwill notbe able to achieve its load-bearing capacitydue to the restricted height.RMake sure that the distance between theunderside of the tires and the ground does notexceed 1.2 in (3 cm).RNever place your hands and feet under theraised vehicle.RDo not lie under the vehicle.

RDo not start the engine when the vehicle israised.RNever open or close a door or the tailgatewhen the vehicle is raised.RMake sure that no persons are present in thevehicle when the vehicle is raised.

Vehicles with hub caps: the hub cap coversthe wheel bolts. Before you can unscrew thewheel bolts, you must remove the hub cap.

X To remove: take socket; and lug wrench= from the vehicle tool kit (Y page 241).

X Position socket; on hub cap:.X Position lug wrench= on socket;.X Using lug wrench=, turn hub cap: coun-ter-clockwise and remove it.

X To install: before installing, check hub cap:and the wheel area for soiling and clean ifnecessary.

X Put hub cap: in position and turn until it is inthe right position.

X Position socket; on hub cap:.X Attach lug wrench= to socket; andtighten hub cap:.The tightening torque must be18 lb-ft (25 Nm).

i Note that the hub cap should be tightenedto the specified torque of 18 lb-ft (25 Nm).Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe hub cap installed at a qualified specialistworkshop.

274 Changing a wheelWheelsandtires

X Using lug wrench=, loosen the bolts on thewheel you wish to change by about one fullturn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely.

The jacking point is centered between the frontand rear wheel arches (arrow).

X Position jackA at jacking point?.

X Make sure that the base of the jack is posi-tioned directly under the jacking point.

X Turn crankB clockwise until jackA sitscompletely on jacking point? and the baseof the jack lies evenly on the ground.

X Turn crankB until the tire is raised a maxi-mum of 1.2 in (3 cm) off the ground.

Removing a wheel! AMG ceramic high performance compoundbrake system:When detaching or attaching the wheel, thewheel rim may hit against the ceramic brakedisc and damage it.For this reason, you should proceed carefully.Request the assistance of a second person oruse a second alignment bolt.

! Do not placewheel bolts in sand or on a dirtysurface. The bolt andwheel hub threads couldotherwise be damaged when you screw themin.

When mounting/removing wheels, and for aslong as the wheels are removed, avoid applyingany external force on the brake disks. This couldimpair the level of comfort when braking.

Changing a wheel 275

Wheelsandtires

Z

X Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com-pletely.

X Screw alignment bolt: into the threadinstead of the wheel bolt.

X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.X Remove the wheel.

Mounting a new wheel

G WARNINGOiled or greased wheel bolts or damagedwheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheelbolts to come loose. As a result, you couldlose a wheel while driving. There is a risk ofaccident.Never oil or greasewheel bolts. In the event ofdamage to the threads, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop immediately. Have thedamaged wheel bolts or hub threadsreplaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.

G WARNINGIf you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is raised, the jack could tipover. There is a risk of injury.Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is on the ground.

Always pay attention to the instructions andsafety notes in the "Changing a wheel" section(Y page 272).Only use wheel bolts that have been designedfor the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea-sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that youonly use wheel bolts which have been approvedfor Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respectivewheel.

! AMG ceramic high performance compoundbrake system:When detaching or attaching the wheel, thewheel rim may hit against the ceramic brakedisc and damage it.For this reason, you should proceed carefully.Request the assistance of a second person oruse a second alignment bolt.

! To prevent damage to the paintwork, holdthe wheel securely against the wheel hubwhile screwing in the first wheel bolt.

: Wheel boltX Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact sur-faces.

X Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the align-ment bolt and push it on.

X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger-tight.

X Unscrew the alignment bolt.X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-tight.

276 Changing a wheelWheelsandtires

Lowering the vehicle

G WARNINGThe wheels could work loose if the wheel nutsand bolts are not tightened to the specifiedtightening torque. There is a risk of accident.Have the tightening torque immediatelychecked at a qualified specialist workshopafter a wheel is changed.

X Turn the crank of the jack counter-clockwiseuntil the vehicle is once again standing firmlyon the ground.

X Place the jack to one side.

X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswisepattern in the sequence indicated (: toA).The specified tightening torque is 133 lb-ft(180 Nm).

X Turn the jack back to its initial position.X Stow the jack and the rest of the tire-changetool kit in the cargo compartment again.

X Check the tire pressure of the newly mountedwheel and adjust it if necessary.Observe the recommended tire pressure(Y page 257).

When you are driving with the emergency sparewheel mounted, the tire pressure monitor can-not function reliably. Only restart the tire pres-suremonitor when the defectivewheel has beenreplaced with a new wheel. All wheels mountedmust be equipped with functioning sensors.

Wheel and tire combinations

You can ask for information regarding permittedwheel-tire combinations at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use tires and wheelswhich have been approved byMercedes-Benzspecifically for your vehicle.These tires have been specially adapted foruse with the control systems, such as ABS orESP®, and are marked as follows:RMO = Mercedes-Benz OriginalRMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer-tain AMG tires)

Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires mayonly be used on wheels that have been spe-cifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.Only use tires, wheels or accessories testedand approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certaincharacteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noiseemissions or fuel consumption, may other-wise be adversely affected. In addition, whendriving with a load, tire dimension variationscould cause the tires to come into contactwith the bodywork and axle components. Thiscould result in damage to the tires or the vehi-cle.Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for dam-age resulting from the use of tires, wheels oraccessories other than those tested andapproved.Information on tires, wheels and approvedcombinations can be obtained from any quali-fied specialist workshop.

! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor rec-ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previ-ous damage cannot always be detected onretreaded tires. As a result, Mercedes-Benzcannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreadedtires are mounted. Do not mount used tires ifyou have no information about their previoususage.

The recommended pressures for various oper-ating conditions can be found:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar on the driver's sideRin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flapObserve the notes on recommended tire pres-sures under various operating conditions(Y page 257).Check tire pressures regularly, and only whenthe tires are cold. Comply with the maintenance

Wheel and tire combinations 277

Wheelsandtires

Z

recommendations of the tire manufacturer inthe vehicle document wallet.Notes on the vehicle equipment – always equipthe vehicle with:Rwith tires of the same size on a given axle (leftand right)Rwith the same type of tires on all wheels at agiven time (summer tires, winter tires)Exception: it is permissible to install a differ-ent type or make in the event of a flat tire.

278 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires

Information regarding technical data

i The data stated here specifically refers to avehicle with standard equipment. Consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center for thedata for all vehicle variants and trim levels.

Vehicle electronics

Tampering with the engine electron-ics! Only have work carried out on the engineelectronics and its associated parts, such ascontrol units, sensors, actuating componentsand connector leads, at a qualified specialistworkshop. Vehicle components may other-wise wear more quickly and the vehicle'soperating permit may be invalidated.

Retrofitting two-way radios andmobile phones (RF transmitters)

G WARNINGThe electromagnetic radiation from modifiedor incorrectly retrofitted RF-transmitters caninterfere with the vehicle electronics. This cancompromise the operational safety of thevehicle. There is a risk of an accident.You should have all work to electrical andelectronic equipment carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

G WARNINGThe electromagnetic radiation from incor-rectly operated RF transmitters can interferewith the vehicle electronics, for example:Rif the RF transmitter is not connected withan exterior antennaRthe exterior antenna has been installedincorrectly or is not a low-reflection type

This can compromise the operational safetyof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Have the low-reflection exterior antennamounted at a qualified specialist workshop.When operating RF transmitters in the vehi-

cle, always connect them with the low-reflec-tion exterior antenna.

! The operating permit may be invalidated ifthe instructions for installation and use of RFtransmitters are not observed.In particular, the following conditionsmust becomplied with:Ronly approved wavebands may be used.Rcompliance with the maximum permissibleoutput in these wavebands is required.Ronly approved antenna positions may beused.

Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiationmay cause damage to your health and the healthof others. Using an exterior antenna takes intoaccount current scientific discussions relatingto the possible health hazards that may resultfrom electromagnetic fields.

Antenna positions: Rear fenderOn the rear fenders, it is recommended to posi-tion the antenna on the side of the vehicle clos-est to the center of the road.Use the Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609when retrofitting RF transmitters (RoadVehicles- EMC guidelines for installation of aftermarketradio frequency transmitting equipment).Observe the legal requirements for accessoryparts.If your vehicle has installations for two-way radioequipment, use the power supply or antennaconnections intended for use with the basic wir-ing. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's Sup-plement when installing.Deviations with respect to frequency bands,maximum transmission outputs or antennapositions must be approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Vehicle electronics 279

Technicaldata

Z

Themaximum transmission output (PEAK) at thebase of the antenna must not exceed the fol-lowing values:

Frequency band Maximumtransmission

output

Short wave3 - 54 MHz

100 W

4 m waveband74 - 88 MHz

30 W

2 m waveband144 - 174 MHz

50 W

Trunked radio system/Tetra380 - 460 MHz

10 W

70 cm waveband400 - 460 MHz

35 W

Mobile communications(2G/3G/4G)

10 W

The following can be used in the vehicle withoutrestrictions:RRF transmitters with a maximum transmis-sion output of up to 100 mWRRF transmitters with transmitter frequenciesin the 380 - 410 MHz frequency band and amaximum transmission output of up to 2 W(trunked radio system/Tetra)RMobile phones (2G/3G/4G)There is no restriction for antenna positions onthe outside of the vehicle for the following fre-quency bands:RTrunked radio system/TetraR70 cm wavebandR2G/3G/4G

Identification plates

Vehicle identification plate with vehi-cle identification number (VIN)

X Open the driver's door.You will see vehicle identification plate:.

Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only); VIN= Vehicle model

Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only); VIN= Paint code

i The data shown on the vehicle identificationplate is used only as an example. This data isdifferent for every vehicle and can deviate

280 Identification platesTechnicaldata

from the data shown here. You can find thedata applicable to your vehicle on the vehicleidentification plate.

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

X Slide the right-hand front seat to its rearmostposition.

X Fold floor covering: upwards.You will see VIN;.

The VIN can be found on the vehicle identifica-tion plate (Y page 280).The VIN can also be found at the lower edge ofthe windshield (Y page 281).

Engine number

: Emission control information plate, includ-ing the certification of both federal and Cali-fornian emissions standards

; VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)= Engine number (stamped into the crank-

case)

Service products and filling capaci-ties

Important safety notes

G WARNINGService products may be poisonous and haz-ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.Comply with instructions on the use, storageand disposal of service products on the labelsof the respective original containers. Alwaysstore service products sealed in their originalcontainers. Always keep service products outof the reach of children.

H Environmental noteDispose of service products in an environ-mentally responsible manner.

Service products include the following:RFuelsRLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)RCoolantRBrake fluidRWindshield washer fluidRClimate control system refrigerantComponents and service products must match.Only use products recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Damage which is caused by the use ofproducts which have not been recommended isnot covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty orgoodwill gestures. They are listed in thisMercedes-Benz Operator's Manual in the appro-priate section.Information on tested and approved productscan be obtained at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.You can recognize service products approved byMercedes-Benz by the following inscription onthe containers:RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)RMB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)Other designations or recommendations indi-cate a level of quality or a specification inaccordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB229.5). They have not necessarily beenapproved by Mercedes-Benz.

Service products and filling capacities 281

Technicaldata

Z

Other identifications, for example:R0 W-30R5 W-30R5 W-40

Fuel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-sion.You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistance with-out delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-ing.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.

Tank capacity

Model Total capacity

All models 19.8 US gal(75.0 l)

Model Of whichreserve

All models Approx.3.2 US gal(12.0 l)

Gasoline

Fuel grade! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with agasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignitionif you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.Even small amounts of the wrong fuel couldresult in damage to the fuel system and theengine. Notify a qualified specialist workshopand have the fuel tank and fuel lines drainedcompletely.

! Only refuel using unleaded premium gradegasoline with at least 91 AKI/95 RON.

i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol.Your vehicle is E10-compatible. You canrefuel your vehicle using E10 fuel.

! Only use the fuel recommended. Operatingthe vehicle with other fuels can lead to enginefailure.

! Do not use the following:RE15 (gasoline with 15% ethanol)RE85 (gasoline with 85% ethanol)RE100 (100% ethanol)RM15 (gasoline with 15% methanol)RM30 (gasoline with 30% methanol)RM85 (gasoline with 85% methanol)RM100 (100% methanol)RGasoline with metalliferous additivesRDieselDo not mix such fuels with the fuel recom-mended for your vehicle.

! To ensure the longevity and full perform-ance of the engine, only premium-gradeunleaded gasoline must be used.If standard unleaded gasoline is unavailableand you have to refuel with unleaded gasolineof a lower grade, observe the following pre-cautions:ROnly fill the fuel tank to half full with regularunleaded gasoline and fill the rest with pre-

282 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

mium-grade unleaded gasoline as soon aspossible.RDo not drive at the maximum speed.RAvoid sudden acceleration and enginespeeds over 3,000 rpm.

Reformulated Gasoline (RFG) and/or unleadedgasoline with additives can be used. The con-centration of additives in the fuel, however,must not exceed 10%, for example:REthanolRTAMERETBERIPARTBAFor MTBE, the concentration should not exceed15%.The concentration of methanol in gasoline,including other additives, must not exceed 3%.All of these blends must fulfill the fuel require-ments, for example:Rknock resistanceRboiling pointRvapor pressureYou will usually find information about the fuelgrade on the pump. If you cannot find the labelon the pump, ask the staff for assistance.

i For further information, consult a qualifiedspecialist workshop or visithttp://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

Information on refueling (Y page 118).

Additives! Operating the engine with fuel additivesadded later can lead to engine failure. Do notmix fuel additives with fuel. This does notinclude additives for the removal and preven-tion of residue buildup. gasoline must only bemixed with additives recommended byMercedes-Benz. Comply with the instructionsfor use on the product label.More informationabout recommended additives can beobtained from any authorizedMercedes-BenzCenter.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use bran-ded fuels that have additives.The fuel quality available in some countries maynot be sufficient. Residue could build up in thefuel injection system as a result. In such cases,and in consultation with an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center, the fuel may be mixed

with the cleaning additive recommended byMercedes-Benz. You must observe the notesand mixing ratios specified on the container.

Engine oil

General notes

! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a spec-ification other than is necessary to fulfill theprescribed service intervals. Do not changethe engine oil or oil filter in order to achievelonger replacement intervals than those pre-scribed. You could otherwise cause enginedamage or damage to the exhaust gas after-treatment.Follow the instructions in the service intervaldisplay regarding the oil change. Otherwise,you may damage the engine and the exhaustgas aftertreatment.

When handling engine oil, observe the importantsafety notes on service products(Y page 281).The engine oils are matched to the performanceofMercedes-Benz engines and service intervals.You should therefore only use engine oils and oilfilters that are approved for vehicles with main-tenance systems.For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Or visit the websitehttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.The table shows which engine oils have beenapproved for your vehicle.

MB-Freigabe orMB-Approval

All models 229.5

Service products and filling capacities 283

Technicaldata

Z

i MB approval is indicated on the oil contain-ers.

Filling capacitiesThe following values refer to an oil changeincluding the oil filter.

Capacity

All models 7.4 US qt (7.0 l)

Additives! Do not use any additives in the engine oil.This could damage the engine.

Brake fluid

G WARNINGThe brake fluid constantly absorbs moisturefrom the air. This lowers the boiling point ofthe brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brakefluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in thebrake system when the brakes are appliedhard. This would impair braking efficiency.There is a risk of an accident.You should have the brake fluid renewed atthe specified intervals.

Comply with the important safety notes for ser-vice products when handling brake fluid(Y page 281).The brake fluid change intervals can be found inthe Maintenance Booklet.Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz in accordance with MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 331.0.Information about approved brake fluid can beobtained at any qualified specialist workshop oron the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at aqualified specialist workshop and the replace-ment confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet.

Coolant

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf antifreeze comes into contact with hot com-ponents in the engine compartment, it mayignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Let the engine cool down before you add anti-freeze.Make sure that antifreeze is not spillednext to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean theantifreeze from components before startingthe engine.

! Only add coolant that has been premixedwith the desired antifreeze protection. Youcould otherwise damage the engine.Further information on coolants can be foundin the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Ser-vice Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g. on theInternet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.Or contact a qualified specialist workshop.

! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, evenin countries where high temperatures prevail.Otherwise, the engine cooling system is notsufficiently protected from corrosion andoverheating.

i Have the coolant regularly replaced at aqualified specialist workshop and the replace-ment confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet.

Comply with the important safety notes for ser-vice products when handling coolant(Y page 281).The coolant is a mixture of water and anti-freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the fol-lowing tasks:RAnti-corrosion protectionRAntifreeze protectionRRaising the boiling pointIf the coolant has antifreeze protection down to-35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the coolantduring operation is approximately 266 ‡(130 †).

284 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

The antifreeze concentrate/corrosion inhibitorconcentration in the engine cooling systemshould:Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the enginecooling system against freezing down toapproximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection downto -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat will not bedissipated as effectively.

Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accordancewith MB Specifications for Service Products310.1.The coolant is checked with every maintenanceinterval at a qualified specialist workshop.

i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filledwith a coolant mixture that ensures adequateantifreeze and anti-corrosion protection.

i The coolant is checked with every mainte-nance interval at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Filling capacities

Model Capacity

All models 15.0 US qt (14.2 l)

Windshield washer system

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate could ignite ifit comes into contact with hot engine compo-nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk offire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washer con-centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

! Only use washer fluid that is suitable forplastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit orMBWinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid could dam-age the plastic lenses of the headlamps.

! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFitwasher fluid should be mixed together. Thespray nozzles may otherwise becomeblocked.

Do not use distilled or de-ionized water, other-wise, the level sensor may give a false reading.At temperatures above freezing:X Fill thewasher fluid reservoir with amixture ofwater and windshield washer fluid, e.g. MBSummerFit.

Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.At temperatures below freezing:X Fill thewasher fluid reservoir with amixture ofwater and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit.For the correct mixing ratio refer to the infor-mation on the antifreeze reservoir.

i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB Sum-merFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid allyear round.

Climate control system refrigerant

Important safety notesThe climate control system of your vehicle is fil-led with refrigerant R‑134a.The instruction label regarding the refrigeranttype used can be found on the radiator crossmember.

! Only the refrigerant R‑134a and the PAG oilapproved by Mercedes-Benz may be used.The approved PAG oil may not be mixed withany other PAG oil that is not approved forR-134a refrigerant. Otherwise, the climatecontrol system may be damaged.

Service work, such as refilling with refrigerant orreplacing component parts, may only be carriedout by a qualified specialist workshop. All appli-cable regulations must be adhered to, SAEstandard J639 included.Always have work on the climate control systemcarried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Service products and filling capacities 285

Technicaldata

Z

Refrigerant instruction label

Example: refrigerant instruction label: Warning symbol; Refrigerant filling capacity= Applicable standards? PAG oil part numberA Type of refrigerantWarning symbol: advises you about:RPossible dangersRHaving service work carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop

Filling capacities

All models Capacity

Refrigerant 22.9 ± 0.4 oz(650 ± 10 g)

PAG oil 4.2 oz(120 g)

Vehicle data

General notesPlease note that for the specified vehicle data:Rthe heights specified may vary as a result of:

- Tires- Load- Condition of the suspension- Optional equipmentROptional equipment reduces the maximumpayload.

Dimensions and weights

All models : Opening height

Rear wing retracted 78.1 in (1985 mm)

Rear wing extended 80.6 in (2047 mm)

Fixed rear wing 83.4 in (2119 mm)

All models

Vehicle length 179.5 in (4560 mm)

Vehicle widthincluding outsidemirrors

81.7 in (2075 mm)

Vehicle height 50.7 in (1288 mm)

Wheelbase 103.5 in (2630 mm)

Turning radius 37.7 ft (11.50 m)

Maximum trunkload

220 lb (100 kg)

286 Vehicle dataTechnicaldata

287

288